Home

HSPICE RF User Guide - RFIC Group @ Fudan University

1. The total resistance of the chain has two possible solutions 0 3333 and 0 54550 You can use OPTION PARHIER to specify which parameter value prevails when you define parameters with the same name at different levels of the design hierarchy Under global scoping rules if names conflict the top level assignment PARAM Val 1 overrides the subcircuit defaults and the total is 0 33330 Under local HSPICE RF User Guide 149 Y 2006 03 SP1 scoping rules the lower level assignments prevail and the total is 0 54550 one two and three ohms in parallel The example in Figure 14 produces the results in Table 14 based on how you set OPTION PARHIER to local global Table 14 PARHIER LOCAL vs PARHIER GLOBAL Results Element PARHIER Local PARHIER Global r1 1 0 1 0 r2 2 0 1 0 r3 3 0 1 0 Parameter Passing Solutions The checklist below determines whether you will see simulation differences when you use the default scoping rules These checks are especially important if your netlists contain devices from multiple vendor libraries m Check your sub circuits for parameter defaults on the SUBCKT or MACRO line m Check your sub circuits for a PARAM statement within a SUBCKT definition To check your circuits for global parameter definitions use the PARAM statement If any of the names from the first three checks are identical set up two HSPICE simulation jobs one with OPTION
2. ss cece eee KI KI KK KK KIR kk Behavioral Passive Elements kak kk kk E KEKE KIRI eee eee Resistors Capacitors Frequency Dependent Inductors kk kk kK KK KK cee eee eee DC Block and Choke Elements 00000 RR KK KK KK KK Ideal Transformers osse ERE RA er Soe ak N RAE Coupled Inductor Element 0 000 eee nes Scattering Parameter Data Element kK KK KK RR KK RR KK KI eee Frequency Dependent Multi Terminal S Element Frequency Table Model 000 KK KK KK RR KK KK RI elle Group Delay Handler in Time Domain Analysis Pre Conditioning S Parameters 0 00 ce cece eee eee Port Element Port Element Syntax cesis eii ka dy W WAD tees Using the Port Element for Mixed Mode Measurement Steady State Voltage and Current Sources kK EREK KK and V Element Syntax anena kk kk kK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KO Steady State HB Sources 4 kk kk kk KK kk KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK Phase Differences Between HB and SIN Sources 00005 Behavioral Noise Sources kk kK KK KK KK KIRI es Power Supply Current and Voltage Noise Sources Function Approximations for Distributed Devices Foster Pole Residue Form for Transconductance or Gain Advantages of Foster Form Modeling KK RR RR KK G and E Element Syntax
3. 0 Overview io Wed dale HHH HH Been eS daw oe BE Rect aia aN Application of Statistical Analysis llle Analytical Model Types kk kk kk kK KK KK KK KK KK e Simulating Circuit and Model Temperatures 2 Temperature Analysis llle TEMP Statement anunua kK KK KK KK KK KK eee Worst Case Analysis 00 kK kK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK Model Skew Parameters kK KK KK KK KK KEK KK KK KK Monte Carlo Analysis ees Monte Carlo Setup kk kk kk KK KK KK KK KK KK ee Monte Carlo Output kk kk kK KK KK KK KK KK KK ee PARAM Distribution Function 0 0000 e KK KK eee Monte Carlo Parameter Distribution 00005 Monte Carlo Examples uk kK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK Worst Case and Monte Carlo Sweep Example lusus Transient Sigma Sweep Results LAKE Monte Carlo Results Ak kk KK KK KK KK KK KK KK eee Simulating the Effects of Global and Local Variations with Monte Carlo Variations Specified on Geometrical Instance Parameters Variations Specified in the Context of Subcircuits Variations on a Model Parameter Using a Local Model in Subcircu Indirect Variations on a Model Parameter Variations Specified on Model Parameters Variations Specified Using DEV and LOT Combinations of Variation Specifications Variation on Model Parame
4. HSPICE Form Function Class Description temper current circuit control Uses parameters to define the current simulation temperature temperature during transient temperature analysis hertz current control Uses parameters to define the frequency during simulation AC analysis frequency Parameter Scoping and Passing If you use parameters to define values in sub circuits you need to create fewer similar cells to provide enough functionality in your library You can pass circuit parameters into hierarchical designs and assign different values to the same parameter within individual cells when you run simulation For example if you use parameters to set the initial state of a latch in its subcircuit definition then you can override this initial default in the instance call You need to create only one cell to handle both initial state versions of the latch You can also use parameters to define the cell layout For example you can use parameters in a MOS inverter to simulate a range of inverter sizes with only one cell definition Local instances of the cell can assign different values to the size parameter for the inverter In HSPICE you can also perform Monte Carlo analysis or optimization on a cell that uses parameters How you handle hierarchical parameters depends on how you construct and analyze your cells You can construct a design in which information flows from the top of the design down into the lowest hierarc
5. When used with independent sources a baseband data stream can be input in binary or hexadecimal format and the scheme used to divide the data into and Q signals can be specified m With controlled VMRF sources the modulating and Q signals can be separately specified with other signal sources such as a PWL source and then used as control inputs into the VMRF source Implementation The VMRF source is a mathematical implementation of the following block diagram Data in Serial to Parallel ee Q t cos wt sin wt S t The following equation calculates the time and frequency domain stimuli from the quadrature modulated signal sources s t I t cos 2nf t 69 Q 1 sin Znfct oo 192 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Complex Signal Sources and Stimuli The discrete ideal in phase and Q quadrature signal components are digital Discrete values allow uniform scaling of the overall signal HSPICE RF generates data streams for the and Q signals based on interpreting the data string breaking the data string into a binary representation and then using the bit pairs to assign values for the and Q data streams For BPSK binary phase shift keying modulation the discrete signals are scaled so that a Q ed Data In Data Q Data 1 zt 2 2 1 i 1 J2 J2 For QPSK quadrature phase shift keying modula
6. ALTER processing cannot revise LIB statements within a file that an INCLUDE statement calls However AL TER processing can accept INCLUDE statements within a file that a LIB statement calls Using Multiple ALTER Blocks For the first simulation run HSPICE reads the input file up to the first ALTER statement and performs the analyses up to that ALTER statement After it completes the first simulation HSPICE reads the input between the first ALTER statement and either the next ALTER statement or the END statement HSPICE RF then uses these statements to modify the input netlist file HSPICE RF then resimulates the circuit Foreachadditional ALTER statement HSPICE RF performs the simulation that precedes the first ALTER statement HSPICE RF then performs another simulation using the input between the current ALTER statement and either the next ALTER statement or the END statement If you do not want to rerun the simulation that precedes the first ALTER statement every time you run an ALTER simulation then do the following 1 Putthe statements that precede the first ALTER statement into a library 2 Usethe LIB statement in the main input file 3 Puta DEL LIB statement in the ALTER section to delete that library for the ALTER simulation run Altering Design Variables and Subcircuits The following rules apply when you use an ALTER block to alter design
7. VI VQ FREQ fc PHASE ph lt SCALE A gt lt gt Gxxx n n VCCS VMRF Iin Iin Qin Qin FREQ fc PHASE ph lt SCALE A gt lt gt Hxxx n n lt CCVS gt VMRF lt gt VI VQ FREQ fc PHASE ph lt SCALE A gt lt gt Parameter Description Exxx Voltage controlled voltage source Fxxx Current controlled current source Gxxx Voltage controlled current source Hxxx Current controlled current source VCVS Keyword for voltage controlled voltage source CCCS Keyword for current controlled current source VCCS Keyword for voltage controlled current source CCVS Keyword for current controlled current source n n Positive and negative controlled source connecting nodes HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Complex Signal Sources and Stimuli Parameter Description VMRF Keyword that identifies and activates the vector modulated RF signal source lin lin Node names for input I t signal Qin Qin Node names for input Q t signal VI VQ FREQ Carrier frequency in Hertz Set fc 0 0 to generate baseband I Q signals PHASE Carrier phase in degrees If fc 0 0 ph 0 and baseband l t is generated ph 90 and baseband Q t is generated SCALE Unit less amplitude scaling parameter Example Emod1 inp innl VMRF It plus It neg Ot plus Qt neg freq 1g phase 0 scale 1 5 File Driven PWL Source Vxxx nl n2 PWL PWLFILE filename coll lt col2 gt
8. Zo is the reference impedance at port i V and definitions are Fourier coefficients rather than phasors For a multi tone analysis it can be expressed as b 7 VENUE x e ae Hj m yn n ny a n T NC Akp Pah xy kei vp en W 0 N Vj w nj Zg l W Es em a w Libycis De 17 4 Ol Vj w Xen Zoill w Xe DoD zs ol Where w is the ith tone The frequency translate S parameters are calculated by applying different n j 1 N to different ports Limitations The HBLIN analysis has these known limitations Noise parameters are not calculated for mixed mode operation Only the S parameters corresponding to the set of frequencies specified at each port are extracted HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Frequency Translation S Parameter HBLIN Extraction Multiple small signal tones are not supported The port P element impedance cannot be specified as complex HB Analysis An HB analysis is required prior to an HBLIN analysis To extract the frequency translation S parameters a sweep of the small signal tone is necessary You can identify the small signal tone sweep in the HBLIN command or in the HB command together with a SS_ TONE specification For additional information regarding HB analysis see Harmonic Balance Analysis on page 206 Port Element You must use a port P element as the termination
9. BPNMATCHTOL val Determines the minimum required match between the NLP and PAC phase noise algorithms An acceptable range is 0 05dB to 5dB The default is 0 5dB HSPICE RF User Guide 241 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Timing Jitter Analysis Table 20 PHASENOISE Analysis Options Continued Parameter Description PHASENOISEKRYLOVDIM PHASENOISEKRYLOVITER PHASENOISETOL PHNOISELORENTZ val Specifies the dimension of the Krylov subspace that the Krylov solver uses This must be an integer greater than zero The default is 500 Specifies the maximum number of Krylov iterations that the phase noise Krylov solver takes Analysis stops when the number of iterations reaches this value The default is 1000 Specifies the error tolerance for the phase noise solver This must be a real number greater than zero The default is 1e 8 Turns on a Lorentzian model for the phase noise analysis val 0 uses a linear approximation to a lorentzian model val 1 default applies a lorentzian model to all noise sources val 2 applies a lorentzian model to all non frequency dependent noise sources Timing Jitter Analysis Timing jitter is a measurement of oscillator uncertainty in the time domain For clock applications time domain measurements are preferable since most specifications of concern involve time domain values Timing jitter is the standard deviation of the timing
10. Predefined analysis function PARAM lt mcVar gt Agauss 1 0 0 1 MEASURE statement MEASURE DC AC TRAN result TRIG TARG lt GOAL val gt lt MINVAL val gt lt WEIGHT val gt lt MeasType gt lt MeasParam gt See Specifying User Defined Analysis MEASURE on page 252 PRINT PROBE I PRINT PROBE outParam Par Expression A parameter definition in HSPICE always uses the last value found in the input netlist subject to local versus global parameter rules The definitions below assign a value of 3 to the DupParam parameter PARAM DupParam 1 PARAM DupParam 3 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 134 HSPICE assigns 3 as the value for all instances of DupParam including instances that are earlier in the input than the PARAM DupParam 3 statement All parameter values in HSPICE are IEEE double floating point numbers The parameter resolution order is 1 Resolve all literal assignments 2 Resolve all expressions 3 Resolve all function calls Table 10 shows the parameter passing order Table 10 Parameter Passing Order OPTION PARHIER GLOBAL OPTION PARHIER LOCAL Analysis sweep parameters Analysis sweep parameters PARAM statement library SUBCKT call instance SUBCKT call instance SUBCKT definition symbol SUBCKT definition symbol PARAM statement library Assigning Parameters You can assign the following types of values to parameters
11. Frequency at which the transmission line has the electrical length specified in NL Normalized electrical length of the transmission line at the frequency specified in the F parameter in units of wavelengths per line length Default 0 25 which is a quarter wavelength U model reference name A lossy transmission line model representing the characteristics of the lossless transmission line Only one input and output port is allowed Example 1 The T1 transmission line connects the in node to the out node Tl in gnd out gnd Z0 50 TD 5n L 5 Both signal references are grounded mpedance is 50 ohms The transmission delay is 5 nanoseconds per meter The transmission line is 5 meters long Example 2 The Tcable transmission line connects the in1 node to the out1 node Tcable inl gnd outi gnd Z0 100 F 100k NL 1 Both signal references are grounded Impedance is 100 ohms The normalized electrical length is 1 wavelength at 100 kHz 120 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines Example 3 The Tnet1 transmission line connects the driver node to the output node Tnetl driver gnd output gnd Umodell L 1m Both signal references are grounded m Umodel1 references the U model The transmission line is 1 millimeter long Ideal Transmission Line For the ideal transmission line voltage and current will propagate without loss along the length of the l
12. Subcircuit Library Structure Your library structure must adhere to the INCLUDE statement specification in the implicit subcircuit You can use this statement to specify the directory that contains the lt subname gt inc subcircuit file and then reference the lt subname gt in each subcircuit call The component naming conventions for each subcircuit is lt subname gt inc Store the subcircuit in a directory that is accessible by a OPTION SEARCH lib path statement Create subcircuit libraries in a hierarchy Typically the top level subcircuit fully describes the input output buffer any hierarchy is buried inside The buried hierarchy can include model statements lower level components and parameter assignments Your library cannot use LIB or INCLUDE statements anywhere in the hierarchy HSPICE RF User Guide 77 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Using Subcircuits 78 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 5 Elements Describes the syntax for the basic elements of a circuit netlist in HSPICE or HSPICE RF Elements are local and sometimes customized instances of a device model specified in your design netlist For descriptions of the standard device models on which elements instances are based see the HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual and the HSPICE MOSFET Models Manual Passive Elements This section describes the passive elements resistors capacitors and inductors
13. ndN ndR nd ref MNAME FQMODEL TYPE Zo 166 Nsignal terminal nodes see Figure 15 on page 170 Three kinds of definitions are present With no reference node ndRef the default reference node in this situation is GND Each node ndi i 1 N and GND construct one of the N ports of the S element With one reference node ndRef is defined Each node ndi i 1 N and the ndRef construct one of the N ports of the S element With an N reference node each port has its own reference node You can write the node definition in a clearer way as nd1 4 nd1 nd2 nd2 ndN ndN Each pair of the nodes ndi and ndi i 1 N constructs one of the N ports of the S element Reference node Name of the S model Frequency behavior of the S Y or Z parameters MODEL statement of sp type which defines the frequency dependent matrices array Parameter type S scattering default Y admittance Z impedance Characteristic impedance value for reference line frequency independent For multiple terminals N gt 1 HSPICE or HSPICE RF assumes that the characteristic impedance matrix of the reference lines is diagonal and that you set diagonal values to Zo To specify general types of reference lines use Zof Default value is 50 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Scattering Parameter Data Element Parameter Specifies FBASE FMAX PRECFAC DELAYHANDLE D
14. HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 About This Manual Conventions Conventions The following conventions are used in Synopsys documentation Convention Description Courier Indicates command syntax Italic Indicates a user defined value such as object name Bold Indicates user input text you type verbatim in syntax and examples Denotes optional parameters such as write_file f filename Indicates that parameters can be repeated as many times as necessary pini pin2 pinN Indicates a choice among alternatives such as low medium high Indicates a continuation of a command line Indicates levels of directory structure Edit gt Copy Indicates a path to a menu command such as opening the Edit menu and choosing Copy Control c Indicates a keyboard combination such as holding down the Control key and pressing c Customer Support Customer support is available through SolvNet online customer support and through contacting the Synopsys Technical Support Center HSPICE RF User Guide xvii Y 2006 03 SP1 About This Manual Customer Support xviii Accessing SolvNet SolvNet includes an electronic knowledge base of technical articles and answers to frequently asked questions about Synopsys tools SolvNet also gives you access to a wide range of Synopsys online services which include downloading software viewing Documentation on the Web and entering a call to the Support Center To ac
15. V n1 time t SUM OVER m REAL V n1 m COS OMEGA m t IMAG V n1 m SIN OMEGA m t Where m starts from 0 to the number of frequency points in the HB simulation The output syntax is PRINT HBTRAN HBTR V n1 PROBE HBTRAN HBTR V n1 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis The output time ranges from 0 to twice the period of the smallest frequency in the HB specira Output Examples PRINT HB P rload RMS power spectrum dissipated at the rload resistor Differential voltage spectrum between the n1 n2 nodes Phase of voltage at the out node at the fundamental frequency RMS power delivered to the Pout port at third order intermod PRINT HBTRAN V n1 Voltage at n1 in time domain PROBE HBTRAN V nl lt n2 gt Differential voltages between n and n2 node in time domain PROBE HB V n1 v2 PRINT HB VP out 1 PROBE HB P Pout 2 1 Ur Ur UY Ur Ur XY UY UY UY UY Using MEASURE with HB Analyses For transient analysis TRAN the independent variable for calculating MEASURE is time For AC analysis the independent variable for calculating MEASURE is frequency However as with DC analysis the use of a MEASURE command is peculiar for HB analysis because it has no obvious independent variable In HSPICE RF the independent variable for HB MEASURE analysis is the first swept va
16. i Ideal Netlist S REL v HSPICE RF Active Nodes lt Back annotation HSPICE RF pe Get You can use the selective post layout flow to simulate a post layout design for a memory or digital circuit and for a corner point verification run Instead of back annotating all RC parasitics into the ideal netlist the selective post layout flow automatically detects and back annotates only active parasitics into the hierarchical LVS ideal netlist For a high latency design the selective post layout flow is an order of magnitude faster than the standard post layout flow HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Note The selective post layout flow applies only to RF transient analyses and cannot be used with other analyses such as DC AC or HB Selective Post Layout Flow Control Options To invoke the selective post layout flow include one of the options listed in Table 21 in your netlist Table 21 Selective Post Layout Flow Options Syntax Description SIM DSPF ACTIVE HSPICE RF performs a preliminary verification run to or determine the activity of the nodes and generates two ASCII SIM_SPEF_ACTIVE files active_node rc and active_node rcxt These files save all active node information in both Star RC format and Star RCXT format By default a node is considered active if th
17. 0 n1 f1 env_time M 1 f 0 alol v in b 0 v in alo v out b 0 v out no 0 n f1 f 1 a 1 v in b 1 v in a v out b 1 v out no 0 n f1 f N a IN v in bIN v in a N v out bIN v out no fO n1 f1 Where there are M data blocks corresponding to M envelope time points with each block containing N 1 rows for the frequency data The units for the env time sweep are seconds 282 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 13 Post Layout Analysis Describes the post layout analysis flow including post layout back annotation DSPF and SPEF files linear acceleration check statements and power analysis Post Layout Back Annotation A traditional straightforward brute force flow runs an RC extraction tool that produces a detailed standard parasitic format DSPF file DSPF is the standard format for transferring RC parasitic information This traditional flow then feeds this DSPF file into the circuit simulation tool for post layout simulation A key problem is that the DSPF file is flat Accurately simulating a complete design such as an SRAM or an on chip cache is a waste of workstation memory disc space usage and simulation runtime Because this DSPF file is flat control and analysis are limited How do you set different options for different blocks for better trade off between speed and accuracy How do you perform a power analysis on a flat netlist to check the power
18. Optimizing HB Analysis There are two types of optimizations with HB analyses Optimization with only HB measurements Optimization with HBNOISE PHASENOISE or HBTRAN measurements HSPICE RF User Guide 375 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Optimization 376 Optimization With HB Measurements The required statements are Analysis statement HB TONES fi f2 fn NHARMS hi h2 lt hn gt gt SWEEP parameter sweep OPTIMIZE OPTxxx RESULT measname MODEL mname Measure statement MEASURE HB measname FIND out_vari AT val GOAL val Optimization With HBNOISE PHASENOISE or HBTRAN Measurements The required statements are Analysis statement HB TONES fi f2 fn lt NHARMS lt hi1 gt lt h2 gt lt hn gt gt SWEEP OPTIMIZE OPTxxx RESULT measname MODEL mname For example HBOSC tones 1g nharms 5 optimize optl result yl y2 model m model m1 opt level 0 PHASENOISE dec 1 1k 1g meas phasenoise yl find phnoise at 10k goal 150dbc meas phasenoise y2 RMSJITTER phnoise units sec goal 1 0e 12 Measure statement MEASURE HBNOISE measname FIND out varl AT val GOAL val MEASURE PHASENOISE measname FIND out varl AT val GOAL val MEASURE HBTRAN measname FIND out varl AT val GOAL val Optimizing HBOSC Analysis There are two types of optimizations with HBOSC analyses Optimization with only HB measurements Optimization with
19. RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Simulating Circuit and Model Temperatures Model reference temperature specified in a MODEL statement The temperature parameter is usually TREF but can be TEMP or TNOM in some models This parameter specifies the temperature in C at which HSPICE RF measures and extracts the model parameters Set the value of TNOM in an OPTION statement Its default value is 25 C Circuit temperature that you specify using a TEMP statement or the TEMP parameter This is the temperature in C at which HSPICE RF simulates all elements To modify the temperature for a particular element use the DTEMP parameter The default circuit temperature is the value of TNOM ndividual element temperature which is the circuit temperature plus an optional amount that you specify in the DTEMP parameter To specify the temperature of a circuit in a simulation run use either the TEMP statement or the TEMP parameter in the DC AC or TRAN statements HSPICE RF compares the circuit simulation temperature that one of these statements sets against the reference temperature that the TNOM option sets TNOM defaults to 25 C unless you use the SPICE option which defaults to 27 C To calculate the derating of component values and model parameters HSPICE RF uses the difference between the circuit simulation temperature and the TNOM reference temperature Elements and m
20. Saving PRINT simulation output to a separate file HERTZ variable for frequency dependent equations IC OFF in element statements IC parameter initial conditions HSPICE RF also adds the following measurement capabilities to HSPICE Small signal scattering parameters Small signal two port noise parameters 1 dB compression point Intercept points for example IP2 IP3 Mixer conversion gain and noise figure VCO output spectrum Oscillator phase noise Options simplify specifying levels of accuracy As a result HSPICE RF provides effective simulation solutions for RF high speed and PCB signal integrity circuit challenges HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 1 HSPICE RF Features and Functionality HSPICE and HSPICE RF Differences HSPICE and HSPICE RF Differences The following tables give an overview of which features Table 1 and device models Table 2 on page 7 in HSPICE are not supported in HSPICE RF Table 1 HSPICE Features Not in HSPICE RF Feature See Read hspice ini file Short names for internal sub circuits such as 10 M1 MODEL types AMP and PLOT for graphs Parameter definition PARAM for Monte Carlo statistical functions PLOT simulation output GRAPH simulation output uses PLOT model type WIDTH and OPTION CO OPTION ACCT Element template output Group time delay parameters in AC analysis output DISTO distortion analysis and associated output
21. Values for Elements HSPICE RF accepts equation based resistors and capacitors You can specify the value of a resistor or capacitor as an arbitrary equation involving node voltages or variable parameters Unlike HSPICE you cannot use parameters to indirectly reference node voltages in HSPICE RF HSPICE RF User Guide 79 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Resistor Elements in a HSPICE or HSPICE RF Netlist Rxxx n1 n2 mname Rval TC1 lt TC2 gt lt TCs gt SCALE val lt M val gt AC val DTEMP val L val W val C val NOISE vals Rxxx nl n2 mname lt R gt resistance lt lt TCl gt val gt TC2 5val TC val SCALE val lt M val gt AC val DTEMP val L val W val C val NOISE val Rxxx nl n2 R equation Parameter Description Rxxx Resistor element name Must begin with R followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters n1 Positive terminal node name n2 Negative terminal node name mname Resistor model name Use this name in elements to reference a resistor model TC TC1 alias The current definition overrides the previous definition TC1 First order temperature coefficient for the resistor See the Passive Device Models chapter in the HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual for temperature dependent relations TC2 Second order temperature coefficient for the resistor SCALE Element scale factor scales resistance
22. You can nest IF ELSE blocks You can include SUBCKT and MACRO statements within an IF ELSE block You can include an unlimited number of ELSEIF statements within an IF ELSE block You cannot include sweep parameters or simulation results within an IF ELSE block You cannot use an IF ELSE block within another statement In the following example HSPICE or HSPICE RF does not recognize the IF ELSE block as part of the resistor definition r10 if r val 10k 10k else r val endif Using Subcircuits Reusable cells are the key to saving labor in any CAD system This also applies to circuit simulation in HSPICE or HSPICE RF To create and simulate a reusable circuit construct it as a subcircuit Use parameters to expand the utility of a subcircuit Traditional SPICE includes the basic subcircuit but does not provide a way to consistently name nodes However HSPICE or HSPICE RF provides a simple HSPICE RF User Guide 71 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Using Subcircuits 72 method for naming subcircuit nodes and elements use the subcircuit call name as a prefix to the node or element name In HSPICE RF you cannot replicate output commands within subcircuit subckt definitions Figure 7 Subcircuit Representation J e 9 gt oUu gt po 2 JE E e 2 gt re MN MP INV The following input creates an instance named
23. and all levels below the first level where zero level are top level nodes For example x1 A x4 554 xab abc123 PROBE v x Print node voltages for nodes whose names start with x at the second level and all levels below the second level For example x1 x2 a xab xdff in PRINT v x HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition Match all first level nodes with names that are exactly two characters long For example x1 in x4 12 PRINT v x n HSPICE RF print the logic state of all top level nodes whose names start with b For example b1 b2 b3 b56 bac LPRINT 1 4 b Element Instance and Subcircuit Naming Conventions Instances and subcircuits are elements and as such follow the naming conventions for elements Element names in HSPICE or HSPICE RF begin with a letter designating the element type followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters Element type letters are R for resistor C for capacitor M for a MOSFET device and so on see Element and Source Statements on page 55 Subcircuit Node Names HSPICE assigns two subcircuit node names To assign the first name HSPICE or HSPICE RF uses the extension to concatenate the circuit path name with the node name for example X1 XBIAS M5 Node designations that start with the same number followed by any letter are the same node For example 1c and 1d are t
24. biasing device under test by opening the termination at the operating point LIN analysis System impedance used when converting to a power source inserted in series with the voltage source Currently this only supports real impedance When power 0 z0 defaults to 0 When power 1 z0 defaults to 50 ohms You can also enter zo val HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Port Element Parameter Description lt RDC val gt DC analysis Series resistance overrides zo lt RAC val gt AC analysis Series resistance overrides z0 lt RHBAC val gt HSPICE RF HBAC analysis Series resistance overrides zo lt RHB val gt ae RF HB analysis Series resistance overrides z0 lt RTRAN val gt Transient analysis Series resistance overrides z0 power 01 1121 WI dbm HSPICE RF power switch When 0 default element treated as a voltage or current source When 1 or W element treated as a power source realized as a voltage source with a series impedance In this case the source value is interpreted as RMS available power in units of Watts When 2 or dbm element treated as a power source in series with the port impedance Values are in dbms You can use this parameter for Transient analysis if the power source is either DC or SIN Example For example the following port element specifications identify a 2 port network with 50 ohm reference impedances between
25. 1E 5 NLX 2 455237E 7 DVTOW 0 DVT1W 0 DVT2W 0 DVTO 2 8937881 DVT1 0 6610934 DVT2 0 0446083 U0 421 8714618 UA 1 18967E 10 UB 1 621684E 18 UC 3 422111E 11 VSAT 1 145012E5 AO 1 119634 AGS 0 1918651 BO 1 800933E 6 Bl 5E 6 KETA 3 313177E 3 Al 0 A2 1 RDSW 984 149934 PRWG 1 133763E 3 PRWB 7 19717E 3 WR 1 WINT 9 590106E 8 LINT 1 719803E 8 XL 5E 8 XW 0 DWG 2 019736E 9 DWB 6 217095E 9 VOFF 0 1076921 NFACTOR 0 CIT 0 CDSC 2 4E 4 CDSCD 0 CDSCB 0 ETAO 0 0147171 ETAB 7 256296E 3 DSUB 0 3377074 PCLM 1 1535622 PDIBLC1 2 946624E 4 PDIBLC2 4 171891E 3 PDIBLCB 0 0497942 DROUT 0 0799917 PSCBE1 3 380501E9 PSCBE2 1 69587E 9 PVAG 0 4105571 DELTA 0 01 MOBMOD 1 PRT 0 UTE zl 5 KEA 0 11 KT1L 0 KT2 0 022 UA1 4 31E 9 UB1 7 61E 18 UC1 5 6E 11 AT 3 3E4 WL 0 WLN 1 WW 1 22182E 15 WWN 1 1657 WWL 0 LL 0 LLN 1 LW 0 LWN 1 LWL 0 CAPMOD 2 XPART 0 4 CGDO 3 73E 10 CGSO 3 73E 10 CGBO 1E 11 CJ 8 988141E 4 PB 0 8616985 MJ 0 3906381 CJSW 2 463277E 10 PBSW 0 5072799 MJSW 0 1331717 PVTHO 0 0143809 PRDSW 81 683425 WRDSW 107 8071189 PK2 1 210197E 3 WKETA 1 00008E 3 LKETA 6 1699E 3 PAGS 0 24968 AF 1 0 KE 1 0E 30 END HSPICE RF User Guide 33 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 5 CMOS GPS VCO Figure 1 VCO Schematic Quadrature LC VCO The
26. 231 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Harmonic Balance for Oscillator Analysis 232 brief stimulus and then return to zero HB analysis effectively ignores this type of source treating it as zero valued This method does the following 1 If HBTRANFREQSEARCH 1 transient analysis runs for several periods attempting to determine the oscillation frequency from the probe voltage signal Transient analysis continues until the time specified in HBTRANINIT Stores the values of all state variables over the last period of the transient analysis 4 Transforms the state variables to the frequency domain by using a Fast Fourier Transform FFT to establish an initial guess for HB oscillator analysis 5 Starts the standard HB oscillator analysis Additional HBOSC Analysis Options Oscillator analysis will make use of all standard HB analysis options as listed in the following table In addition the following options are specifically for oscillator applications Table 19 HBOSC Analysis Options for Oscillator Applications Parameter Description HBFREQABSTOL An additional convergence criterion for oscillator analysis HBFREQABSTOL is the maximum absolute change in frequency between solver iterations for convergence Default is 1 Hz HBFREQRELTOL An additional convergence criterion for oscillator analysis HBFREQRELTOL is the maximum relative change in frequency between solver iterations for convergence De
27. 287 309 311 SIM LA FREQ 311 SIM LA MAXR 312 SIM LA MINC 312 SIM LA MINMODE 312 SIM LA TIME 312 SIM LA TOL 312 SIM ORDER 315 317 SIM OSC DETECT TOL 318 SIM POSTAT 370 SIM POSTDOWN 371 SIM POSTSCOPE 371 SIM POSTSKIP 370 SIM POWER ANALYSIS 384 SIM POWER TOP 384 SIM POWERDC ACCURACY 382 SIM POWERDC HSPICE 382 SIM POWERPOST 384 SIM POWERSTART 384 SIM RAIL 101 SIM SPEF 286 SIM SPEF ACTIVE 289 SIM SPEF INSERROR 291 SIM SPEF LUMPCAPS 291 SIM SPEF MAX ITER 290 SIM SPEF PARVALUE 291 SIM SPEF RAIL 290 SIM SPEF SCALEC 290 SIM SPEF SCALER 290 SIM SPEF VTOL 289 SIM TG THETA 317 SIM TRAP 318 options configuration file 366 oscillator 27 example 27 HB analysis 227 phase noise 233 oscillator analysis 227 output files 10 format DSPF 293 NW 320 tabulated data 319 WDB 319 format power analysis 385 generating 10 restricting 369 variables function 141 P p2d file 251 packed input files 43 PAR keyword 138 PARAM statement 65 326 in ALTER blocks 66 68 parameters algebraic 138 139 analysis 137 assignment 135 cell geometry 143 constants 136 data type 135 data driven analysis 64 defaults 147 defining 133 144 evaluation order 135 hierarchical 72 143 inheritance 146 147 input netlist file 49 libraries 144 146 M 72 measurement 137 modifying 64 multiply 137 optimization 143 overriding 145 148 PARHIER option 147 passing 143 150 order 135 problems 150 Index Release 95 1 and earlier
28. Constant real number Algebraic expression of real values Predefined function Function that you define Circuit value Model value To invoke the algebraic processor enclose a complex expression in single quotes A simple expression consists of one parameter name HSPICE RF User Guide 135 Y 2006 03 SP1 The parameter keeps the assigned value unless A later definition changes its value or An algebraic expression assigns a new value during simulation HSPICE does not warn you if it reassigns a parameter Inline Parameter Assignments To define circuit values using a direct algebraic evaluation rl nl 0 R 1k sqrt HERTZ Resistance for frequency Parameters in Output To use an algebraic expression as an output variable in a PRINT PROBE or MEASURE statement use the PAR keyword See Chapter 7 Simulation Output for more information Example PRINT DC v 3 gain PAR v 3 v 2 PAR v 4 v 2 User Defined Function Parameters You can define a function that is similar to the parameter assignment but you cannot nest the functions more than two deep An expression can contain parameters that you did not define A function must have at least one argument and can have up to 20 and in many cases more than 20 arguments You can redefine functions The format of a function is funcnamel argl arg2 1 expressionl funcname2 argl arg2 expression2 off Parameter
29. HB 205 391 Index analysis spectrum 209 equations 206 errors 222 options 210 oscillator analysis 227 output 214 syntax 208 warnings 222 HB for HBLIN 267 HBAC 39 253 errors 257 example 39 output 255 281 output data files 256 syntax 254 warnings 257 HBLIN 265 268 limitations 266 output syntax 270 HBLSP 247 example 249 input syntax 248 limitations 248 output data files 251 271 output syntax 250 HBOSC options 232 HBOSC statement 227 hertz variable 143 hier delimiter configuration option configuration options hier delimiter 366 hierarchical designs flattened 51 hl file 271 hold time verification 380 hspice ini file 76 hspicerf command 9 hspicerf file 365 hspicerf test 366 html configuration option configuration options html 366 l IBIS buffers 176 392 ideal transformer transformer ideal 163 INCLUDE statement 50 67 68 76 77 individual element temperature 329 inductor coupled 162 frequency dependent 100 158 inductors AC choke 101 element 92 node names 92 163 164 power line 101 input data adding library data 69 for data driven analysis 64 files character case 44 compression 43 netlist 43 structure 50 table of components 51 netlist 52 netlist file 52 70 int x function 140 integer function 140 integer_node configuration option configuration options integer_node 366 internal nodes referencing 62 invoking hspicerf 9 IR drop checking 381 J JFETs elements 109 leng
30. L 1u W z Wid 2 mnl NodeList Model L 1u W Wid ENDS Invoke symbols in a design xl A Y1 Inv Bad No widths specified x2 A Y2 Inv Wid 1u Overrides illegal value for Width This simulation aborts on the x1 subcircuit instance because you never set the required Wid parameter on the subcircuit instance line The x2 subcircuit simulates correctly Additionally the instances of the Inv cell are subject to accidental interference because the Wid global parameter is exposed outside the domain of the library Anyone can specify an alternative value for the parameter in another section of the library or the circuit design This might prevent the simulation from catching the condition on x1 Example 2 In this example the name of a global parameter conflicts with the internal library parameter named Wid Another user might specify such a global parameter in a different library In this example the user of the library has specified a different meaning for the wid parameter to define an independent source Param Wid 5u Default Pulse Width for source vl Pulsed 0 Pulse Ov 5v Ou 0 1u 0 1u Wid 10u Subcircuit default definition SUBCKT Inv A Y Wid 0 Inherit illegals by default mpl NodeList Model L 1u W Wid 2 mnl NodeList Model L 1u W Wid Ends Invoke symbols in a design x1 A Y1 Inv Incorrect width x2 A Y2 Inv Wid 1u Incorrect Both x1 and x2 simulate with mpl 10u and mnl 5u instead
31. Multitone Harmonic Balance AC Analysis HBAC Reported performance log statistics are written to a lis file e Number of nodes e Number of FFT points e Number of equations e Memory in use e CPU time e Maximum Krylov iterations e Maximum Krylov dimension Target GMRES residual e GMRES residual e Actual Krylov iterations taken Frequency swept input frequency values Errors and Warnings The following error and warning messages are used when HSPICE encounters a problem with a HBAC analysis Error Messages HBAC frequency sweep includes negative frequencies HBAC allows only frequencies that are greater than or equal to zero No HB statement is specified error at parser HBAC requires an HB statement to generate the steady state solution Warning Messages More than one HBAC statement warning at parser HSPICE RF uses only the last HBAC statement in the netlist No HBAC sources are specified error at parser HBAC requires at least one HBAC source GMRES Convergence Failure When GMRES Generalized Minimum Residual reaches the maximum number of iterations and the residual is greater than the specified tolerance The HBAC analysis generates a warning HSPICE RF User Guide 257 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Multitone Nonlinear Steady State Analysis HBNOISE and then continue as if the data were valid This warning reports the following information Final GMRES R
32. Syntax Description OPTION SIM LA MAXR value OPTION SIM LA MINC value OPTION SIM LA MINMODE ONIOFF OPTION SIM LA TIME value OPTION SIM LA TOL value Maximum resistance for linear matrix reduction value is the maximum resistance preserved in the reduction SIM LA assumes that any resistor greater than value has an infinite resistance and drops the resistor after reduction finishes The default is 1615 ohms Minimum capacitance for linear matrix reduction value is the minimum capacitance preserved in the reduction After reduction completes SIM LA lumps any capacitor smaller than value to ground The default is 1e 16 farads Reduces the number of nodes instead of the number of elements Minimum time for which accuracy must be preserved value is the minimum switching time for which the PACT algorithm preserves accuracy HSPICE RF does not accurately represent waveforms that occur more rapidly than this time SIM LA TIME is simply the dual of SIM LA FREQ The default is equivalent to setting LA FREQ 1 GHz The default is 1ns Error tolerance for the PACT algorithm value is the error tolerance for the PACT algorithm is between 0 0 and 1 0 The default is 0 05 Example In this example the circuit has a typical risetime of 1ns Set the maximum frequency to 1 GHz or set the minimum switching time to 1ns OPTION SIM LA FREQ OPTION SIM LA TIME l1GHz ins However if spikes
33. kk kk kk kK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK Complex Signal Sources and Stimuli kK KK KK RR RR RR KK Vector Modulated RF Source kk kk KK KK leere Voltage and Current Source Elements aonan KK RR RR RR KK RIK SWEEPBLOCK in Sweep Analyses 00 0c KEK KK KK KK KK KK KK Input Syntax 144 147 147 150 151 151 151 154 158 159 160 162 164 165 174 175 175 176 177 180 180 181 184 186 187 188 189 190 190 190 191 192 194 200 201 8 Contents Using SWEEPBLOCK in a DC Parameter Sweep Using in Parameter Sweeps in TRAN AC and HB Analyses LIMITATIONS e sa t e HOUR REDUCE de EN RR RR Reter n ees oie eee ess ameet der NT Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance An AIVSIS sex weeds RI A PENES Harmonic Balance Equations kk KK KK eee Features Supported kk kk kk kk kK KK eee Input Syntax used xa ba pur ye dakae Add aed ac dn tunduEn d bien HB Analysis Spectrum kk kk kk kK teas HB Analysis Opti leg prix Harmonic Balance Output Measurements 2 0020000 Output Syntax ux wy tors er teen eR IN Q J Gee eee Calculating Power Measurements After HB Analyses Calculating for a Time Domain Output anosa KK KK KK KS O tput EXampl S 5 x 4x e n cece tees Using MEASURE with HB Analyses W WaY KK KK RR RR KK K gt HB O
34. lt TCl gt val gt lt lt TC2 gt val gt lt SCALE val gt lt IC val gt lt M val gt lt W val gt lt L val gt lt DTEMP val gt Cxxx nl n2 lt C gt equation lt CTYPE 0 1 gt above options Polynomial form Cxxx nl n2 POLY c0 c above options gt Parameter Description Cxxx Capacitor element name Must begin with C followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters n1 Positive terminal node name n2 Negative terminal node name mname Capacitance model name Elements use this name to reference a capacitor C capacitance Capacitance at room temperature a numeric value or a parameter in farads TC1 First order temperature coefficient for the capacitor See the Passive Device Models chapter in the HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual for temperature dependent relations TC2 Second order temperature coefficient for the capacitor HSPICE RF User Guide 85 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Parameter Description SCALE Element scale parameter scales capacitance by its value Default 1 0 IC Initial voltage across the capacitor in volts If you specify UIC in the TRAN statement HSPICE or HSPICE RF uses this value as the DC operating point voltage The IC statement overrides it M Multiplier used to simulate multiple parallel capacitors Default 1 0 W Capacitor width in meters Default 0 0 if you did not specify W in a capacitor model L Capacitor l
35. type nsteps start stopPOl type nsteps start StopSWEEPBLOCK freq freq2 freqn METHOD O default selects the Nonlinear Perturbation NLP algorithm which is used for low offset frequencies METHOD 1 selects the Periodic AC PAC algorithm which is used for high offset frequencies METHOD 2 selects the Broadband Phase Noise BPN algorithm which you can use to span low and high offset frequencies You can use METHOD to specify any single method See the section on Phasenoise Algorithms below for a more detailed discussion on using the METHOD parameter 235 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Phase Noise Analysis Parameter Description carrierindex listfreq listcount listfloor 236 Optional Specifies the harmonic index of the carrier at which HSPICE RF computes the phase noise The phase noise output is normalized to this carrier harmonic Default 1 Dumps the element phase noise value to the lis file You can specify which frequencies the element phase noise value dumps The frequencies must match the sweep_frequency values defined in the parameter_sweep otherwise they are ignored In the element phase noise output the elements that contribute the largest phase noise are dumped first The frequency values can be specified with the NONE or ALL keyword which either dumps no frequencies or every frequency defined in the parameter_sweep Frequency values must be enclosed in pare
36. type of pin capacitance to include when calculating the total capacitance for all nets in the SPEF file either no capacitance all input and output capacitances or only input capacitances Character used to divide levels of hierarchy in a circuit path name Must be one of the following characters For example X1 X2 means that X2 is a subcircuit of the X1 circuit Character used to separate the name of an instance and a pin in a concatenated instance pin name Must be one of these characters Jl Delimiter characters that precede and follow a bus bit or an arrayed instance number If these characters are not matching pairs HSPICE RF reports an error Valid bus delimiter prefix and suffix character pairs are brackets braces parentheses or angle brackets lt gt gt A positive number For example 10 PS means use time units of 10 picoseconds 5 NS means use time units of 5 nanoseconds A positive number For example 10 PF means capacitance units of 10 picofarads 5 FF means use capacitance units of 5 femtoseconds Positive number For example 10 OHM sets resistance units to 10 ohms 5 KOHM sets resistance units to 5 kilo ohms A positive number For example 10 HENRY means use inductance units of 10 henries 5 MH means use inductance units of 5 millihenries 2 UH means use inductance units of 2 micro henries Name used throughout a SPEF file To reduce file space you can map other names to
37. 0 DVTO 2 8937881 DVT1 0 6610934 DVT2 0 0446083 U0 421 8714618 UA 1 18967E 10 UB 1 621684E 18 UC 3 422111E 11 VSAT 1 145012E5 AO 1 119634 AGS 0 1918651 BO 1 800933E 6 Bl 5E 6 KETA 3 313177E 3 Al 0 A2 1 RDSW 984 149934 PRWG 1 133763E 3 PRWB 7 19717E 3 WR 1 WINT 9 590106E 8 LINT 1 719803E 8 XL 5E 8 XW 0 DWG 2 019736E 9 DWB 6 217095E 9 VOFF 0 1076921 NFACTOR 0 CIT 0 CDSC 2 4E 4 CDSCD 0 CDSCB 0 ETAO 0 0147171 ETAB 7 256296E 3 DSUB 0 3377074 PCLM 1 1535622 PDIBLC1 2 946624E 4 PDIBLC2 4 171891E 3 PDIBLCB 0 0497942 DROUT 0 0799917 PSCBE1 3 380501E9 PSCBE2 1 69587E 9 PVAG 0 4105571 DELTA 0 01 MOBMOD 1 PRT 0 UTE 1 5 KT1 0 11 KT1L 0 KT2 0 022 UA1 4 31E 9 UB1 7 61E 18 UC1 5 6E 11 AT 3 3E4 WL 0 WLN 1 WW 1 22182E 15 WWN 1 1657 WWL 0 LL 0 LLN 1 LW 0 LWN 1 LWL 0 CAPMOD 2 XPART 0 4 CGDO 3 73E 10 CGSO 3 73E 10 CGBO 1E 11 CJ 8 988141E 4 PB 0 8616985 MJ 0 3906381 CJSW 2 463277E 10 PBSW 0 5072799 MJSW 0 1331717 PVTHO 0 0143809 PRDSW 81 683425 WRDSW 107 8071189 PK2 1 210197E 3 WKETA 1 00008E 3 LKETA 6 1699E 3 PAGS 0 24968 The following is the BUT model file bjt inc used in oscillator example It is available in directory lt installdir gt demo hspicerf examples RF Wideband NPN Transistor die MODEL RF WB NPN NPN IS 1 32873E 015
38. 0 001 0 006 s 1x10P 5 51x105 4 j1 8 x 10 9 G s 0 001 1 x I0 5 4 0 001 j0 006 s 1 x 10 j1 8 x 10 9 You would input G1 1 0 FOSTER 2 0 0 001 1e 12 0 0004 0 1e10 0 0 001 0 006 1e8 1 8e10 Note In the case of a real poles half the residue value is entered because it s essentially applied twice In the above example the first pole residue pair is real but we still write it as A1 s p1 A1 s p1 therefore 0 0004 is entered rather than 0 0008 Complex Signal Sources and Stimuli To predict radio frequency integrated circuit RFIC performance some analyses require simulations that use representative RF signal sources Among the representative sources available in HSPICE RF is the complex modulated RF source Also known as the Vector Modulated source it allows digital modulation of an RF carrier using in phase and quadrature components created from a binary data stream HSPICE RF User Guide 191 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Complex Signal Sources and Stimuli Vector Modulated RF Source Digital RF waveforms are typically constructed by modulating an RF carrier with in phase I and quadrature Q components In HSPICE RF this is accomplished using the Vector Modulated RF VMRF signal source The VMHF signal source function is supported both for independent voltage and current sources V and elements and with controlled sources E F G and H elements
39. 01 HSPICE RF User Guide 87 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements 88 Linear Capacitors Cxxx nodel node2 lt modelname gt lt C value lt TCl val gt lt TC2 val gt lt W val gt lt L val gt lt DTEMP val gt lt M val gt lt SCALE val gt lt IC val gt Parameter Cxxx node1 and node2 Description Name of a capacitor Must begin with C followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters Names or numbers of connecting nodes value Nominal capacitance value in Farads modelname Name of the capacitor model C Capacitance in Farads at room temperature TC1 TC2 Specifies the temperature coefficient W Capacitor width L Capacitor length M Multiplier to simulate multiple parallel capacitors DTEMP Temperature difference between element and circuit SCALE Scaling factor IC Initial capacitor voltage Example Cbypass 1 0 10PF C1 2 3 CBX MODEL CBX C CB B 0 10P IC 4V CP X1 XA 1 0 0 1P In this example Cbypass is a straightforward 10 picofarad PF capacitor m C1 which calls the CBX model does not have a constant capacitance HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements CB is a 10 PF capacitor with an initial voltage of 4V across it CP is a 0 1 PF capacitor Frequency Dependent Capacitors You can specify frequency dependent capacitors using the C equation with the HERTZ keyword The HERTZ keyw
40. 03 SP1 Chapter 10 Power Dependent S Parameter Extraction Output Data Files 252 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Describes how to use harmonic balance based AC analysis as well as nonlinear steady state noise analysis Multitone Harmonic Balance AC Analysis HBAC You use the HBAC Harmonic Balance AC statement for analyzing linear behavior in large signal periodic systems The HBAC statement uses a periodic AC PAC algorithm to perform linear analysis of autonomous oscillator or nonautonomous driven circuits where the linear coefficients are modulated by a periodic steady state signal Multitone HBAC analysis extends single tone HBAC to quasi periodic systems with more than one periodic steady state tone One application of multitone HBAC is to more efficiently determine mixer conversion gain under the influence of a strong interfering signal than is possible by running a swept three tone HB simulation Prerequisites and Limitations The following prerequisites and limitations apply to HBAC Requires one and only one HBAC statement If you use multiple HBAC statements HSPICE RF uses only the last HBAC statement Requires one and only one HB statement Supports arbitrary number of tones Requires placing the parameter sweep in the HB statement Requires at least one HB source Requires at least one HBAC source HSPICE RF User Guide 2
41. 103e9 3 3 103e9 3 6 34 7e9 3 9 9 95e9 6 6 114e9 6 9 34 7e9 9 9 103e9 SHORTALL User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 103 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Alternatively the same element could be specified by using L ThreeNets al1l22a1b445 5 b1 77 8 8 c 1 RELUCTANCE FILE reluctance dat SHORTALL no IGNORE COUPLING no Where reluctance dat contains n 103e9 34 7e9 9 95e9 114e9 34 7e9 103e9 103e9 34 7e9 9 95e9 114e9 34 7e9 103e9 103e9 34 7e9 9 95e9 114e9 34 7e9 103e9 O O OY 1001020000 U1 OO U1 N 1 1 H9 J BER Toc RGR OR BA ox ok ok ok okRokRoxR kRxR RR 6 O OY OY Q Q 00 Q U1 U1 PO PO IN o S d HL ES The following shows the mapping between the port numbers and node pairs Ports 2 4 5 6 Sois pairs arty dra e n ora im des n term ave leen 104 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Active Elements Active Elements This section describes the active elements diodes and transistors Diode Element Geometric LEVEL 1 or Non Geometric LEVEL 3 form Dxxx nplus nminus mname lt lt AREA gt area gt lt lt PJ gt val gt WP val LP val WM val LM val OFF IC vd M val lt DTEMP val gt Dxxx nplus nminus mname W width lt L length gt lt WP val gt LP val WM val LM val OFF IC vd lt M val gt lt DTEMP val gt Fowler Nordheim LEVEL 2 form Dxxx nplus nminus mname W val
42. 27 FSPTS 40 9 e6 1 1e7 PHASENOISE V emitter DEC 10 10K 1MEG METHOD 0 CARRIERINDEX 1 print hbosc vm eml vp eml vr emitter vi emitter print hbosc vm emitter vp emitter P Rload print phasenoise phnoise probe phasenoise phnoise HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 5 CMOS GPS VCO probe hbosc v emitter v eml include bjt inc END After you run this netlist examine the osc printhbO file At the top is the oscillator frequency about 10 14 MHz and the PRINT HBOSC output The first 2 lines show that the eml node oscillates around 3V with an amplitude of about 2 85V The emitter node oscillates around 4V with an amplitude of about 4 27V Also examine the osc printpnO file which contains the phase noise results in text form You can view the osc hbO and osc pnO files in CosmosScope 1 2 To start CosmosScope type cscope Use the File gt Open gt Plotfiles dialog to open osc hbO Remember to set the file type filter to HSPICE RF HB hb From the signal manager double click on v emitter to see that node s spectrum Right click on the v emitter label in the chart and choose To Time Domain to create a time domain waveform To accept the defaults for range and interval click OK You should see an oscillating time domain waveform To run a transient simulation for comparison 1 2 Use the TRAN 1n 10u command Add ic 10n to the Lb
43. 6 r r local Example 4 In this example global variations to an instance parameter are applied by assigning the variation to an intermediate parameter before assigning it to each instance parameter Each resistor r1 through r3 receives the same random resistance value during each Monte Carlo run param r random agauss param r global r random rl 1 2 r r global r2 3 4 r r global r3 5 6 r r global Monte Carlo Parameter Distribution Each time you use a parameter Monte Carlo calculates a new random variable lf you do not specify a Monte Carlo distribution then HSPICE RF assumes the nominal value f you specify a Monte Carlo distribution for only one analysis HSPICE RF uses the nominal value for all other analyses You can assign a Monte Carlo distribution to all elements that share a common model The actual element value varies according to the element distribution If you assign a Monte Carlo distribution to a model keyword then all elements 340 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis that share the model use the same keyword value You can use this feature to create double element and model distributions For example the MOSFET channel length varies from transistor to transistor by a small amount that corresponds to the die distribution The die distribution is responsible for offset voltages in operational amplifiers and for the tendency
44. 92 Example 3 Capacitance based Capacitor option list node post r 1 2 100 r2 3 0 200 Vin 1 0 pulse 0 5v ins 2ns 2ns 10ns 20ns C12 3 c cos v 2 3 v 1 2 ctype 2 tran ins 100ns print tran i cl1 end Example 4 Charge based Capacitor option list node post r 1 2 100 r2 3 0 200 Vin 1 0 pulse 0 5v ins 2ns 2ns 10ns 20ns C123 g sin v 2 3 v 2 3 v 1 2 tran 1ns 100ns print tran i c1 end Inductors General form Lxxx n n2 lt L gt inductance mname lt lt TCl gt val gt TC2 val SCALE val IC val M val DTEMP val R val Lxxx n n2 L equation LTYPE val above options Polynomial form Lxxx n n2 POLY c0 cl above optlons Magnetic winding form Lxxx n n2 NT turns above options Parameter Description Lxxx Inductor element name Must begin with L followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters n1 Positive terminal node name n2 Negative terminal node name HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Parameter Description TC1 First order temperature coefficient for the inductor See the Passive Device Models chapter in the HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual for temperature dependent relations TC2 Second order temperature coefficient for the inductor SCALE Element scale parameter scales inductance by its value Default 1 0 IC Initial current through the ind
45. All diagonal entries of the reluctance matrix must be assigned a positive value The reluctance matrix should be positive definite HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Parameter Description FILE lt filename1 gt SHORTALL IGNORE_COUPLIN For the external file format the data files should contain three columns of data Each row should contain an r c val triplet separated by white space The r c and val values may be expressions surrounded by single quotes Multiple files may be specified to allow the reluctance data to be spread over several files if necessary SHORTALL yes all inductors in this model are converted to short circuits and all reluctance matrix values are ignored SHORTALL no default inductors are not converted to short circuits and reluctance matrix values are not ignored IGNORE COUPLING yes all off diagonal terms are G ignored that is set to zero IGNORE_COUPLING no default off diagonal terms are not ignored Example This example has 9 segments or ports with 12 nodes and can potentially generate a 9x9 reluctance matrix with 81 elements L ThreeNetsal1l22al1bD4455b1c7788c1 oco coco cock o cock cock ok o kok ok ok koc HSPICE RF no IGNORE COUPLING no RELUCTANCE 1 1 103e9 1 4 34 7e9 1 7 9 95e9 4 4 114e9 4 7 34 7e9 7 7 103e9 2 2 103e9 2 5 34 7e9 2 8 9 95e9 5 5 114e9 5 8 34 7e9 8 8
46. BF NF 1 00025E 000 VAF EG 1 11000E 000 XTI CJE 2 03216E 012 VJE MJE 2 90076E 001 TF XTF 3 89752E 001 VTF ITF 5 21078E 001 CJC VJC 3 40808E 001 MJC 42 SPICE MODEL 02000E 002 19033E 001 00000E 000 00000E 001 55790E 012 09308E 001 00353E 012 94223E 001 PpBPOOUUMH HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Describes the input netlist file and methods of entering data For descriptions of individual HSPICE commands referenced in this chapter see Chapter 3 RF Netlist Commands in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Heference Input Netlist File Guidelines HSPICE RF operates on an input netlist file and store results in either an output listing file or a graph data file An input file with the name design sp contains the following Design netlist subcircuits macros power supplies and so on Statement naming the library to use optional Specifies the type of analysis to run optional Specifies the type of output desired optional An input filename can be up to 1024 characters long The input netlist file cannot be in a packed or compressed format To generate input netlist and library input files HSPICE or HSPICE RF uses either a schematic netlister or a text editor Statements in the input netlist file can be in any order except that the first line is a title line and the last AL TER submodule must appea
47. Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis 346 Figure 36 Monte Carlo Distribution cap to cap element SE Cla Cib Cla Cib Cid C1c Cid N S run to run model You can approach this problem from physical or electrical levels The physical level relies on physical distributions such as oxide thickness and polysilicon line width control The electrical level relies on actual capacitor measurements Physical Approach 1 Since oxide thickness control is excellent for small areas on a single wafer you can use a local variation in polysilicon to control the variation in capacitance for adjacent cells Next define a local poly line width variation and a global model level poly line width variation In this example e The local polysilicon line width control for a line 10 m wide manufactured with process A is 0 02 m for a 1 sigma distribution e The global model level polysilicon line width control is much wider use 0 1 m for this example The global oxide thickness is 200 angstroms with a x5 angstrom variation at 1 sigma The cap element is square with local poly variation in both directions The cap model has two distributions e poly line width distribution e oxide thickness distribution The effective length is HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst C
48. DEFNRS DefaultZDEFNRS when you set the MOSFET model parameter ACM 0 or 1 Default 0 0 when you set ACM 2 or 3 RDC Additional drain resistance due to contact resistance in units of ohms This value overrides the RDC setting in the MOSFET model specification Default 0 0 RSC Additional source resistance due to contact resistance in units of ohms This value overrides the RSC setting in the MOSFET model specification Default 0 0 OFF Sets initial condition for this element to OFF in DC analysis Default ON This command does not work for depletion devices IC vds vgs Initial voltage across external drain and source vds gate and source vbs vgs and bulk and source terminals vbs Use these arguments with TRAN UIC IC statements override these values HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Active Elements Parameter Description M Multiplier to simulate multiple MOSFETs in parallel Affects all channel widths diode leakages capacitances and resistances Default 1 DTEMP The difference between the element temperature and the circuit temperature in degrees Celsius Default 0 0 GEO Source drain sharing selector fora MOSFET model parameter value of ACM 3 Default 0 0 DELVTO Zero bias threshold voltage shift Default 0 0 The only required fields are the drain gate and source nodes and the model name The nodes and model name must precede other fields in the netlist If you did not
49. Guide 377 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Using CHECK Statements Setting Global Hi Lo Levels Slew Rise and Fall Conditions Edge Timing Verification Setup and Hold Verification IR Drop Detection The results of these statements appear in a file with an err extension To prevent creating unwieldy files HSPICE RF reports only the first 10 violations for a particular check in the err file Setting Global Hi Lo Levels You use the CHECK GLOBAL LEVEL statement to globally set the desired high and low definitions for all CHECK statements For example CHECK GLOBAL LEVEL hi lo hi th lo th Values for hi lo and the thresholds are defined by using this statement For syntax and description of this statement see CHECK GLOBAL LEVEL in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Slew Rise and Fall Conditions You use the CHECK SLEW statement to verify that a slew rate occurs within the specified window of time For example CHECK SLEW min max nodel node2 hi lo hi th lo th Figure 46 SLEW Example 3 3 2 6 0 7 0 0 1ns t 3ns For syntax and description of this statement see CHECK SLEW in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference 378 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Using CHECK Statements You use the CHECK RISE statement to verify that a rise time occurs within the specified window of time For
50. Input Netlist File Composition 54 Comments and Line Continuation The first line of a netlist is always a comment regardless of its first character comments that are not the first line of the netlist require an asterisk as the first character in a line or a dollar sign directly in front of the comment anywhere on the line For example comment on a line by itself HSPICE statement comment following HSPICE input You can place comment statements anywhere in the circuit description HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition The dollar sign must be used for comments that do not begin in the first character position on a line for example for comments that follow simulator input on the same line If it is not the first nonblank character then the dollar sign must be preceded by either Whitespace Comma Valid numeric expression You can also place the dollar sign within node or element names For example RF 1K GAIN SHOULD BE 100 MAY THE FORCE BE WITH MY CIRCUIT VIN 10 PL O 0 5V 5NS 10v 50ns R12 1 0 1MEG FEED BACK PARAM a 1w comment a 1 w treated as a space and ignored PARAM a 1kScomment a 1e3 k is a scale factor A dollar sign is the preferred way to indicate comments because of the flexibility of its placement within the code Line continuations require a plus sign as the first character in the lin
51. L val lt WP val gt OFF IC vd lt M val gt Parameter Description Dxxx Diode element name Must begin with D followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters nplus Positive terminal anode node name The series resistor for the equivalent circuit is attached to this terminal nminus Negative terminal cathode node name mname Diode model name reference AREA Area of the diode unitless for LEVEL 1 diode and square meters for LEVEL 3 diode This affects saturation currents capacitances and resistances diode model parameters are IK IKR JS CJO and RS The SCALE option does not affect the area factor for the LEVEL 1 diode Default 1 0 Overrides AREA from the diode model If you do not specify the AREA HSPICE or HSPICE RF calculates it from the width and length HSPICE RF User Guide 105 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Active Elements 106 Parameter Description PJ Periphery of junction unitless for LEVEL 1 diode and meters for LEVEL 3 diode Overrides PJ from the diode model If you do not specify PJ HSPICE or HSPICE RF calculates it from the width and length specifications WP Width of polysilicon capacitor in meters for LEVEL 3 diode only Overrides WP in the diode model Default 0 0 LP Length of polysilicon capacitor in meters for LEVEL 3 diode only Overrides LP in the diode model Default 0 0 WM Width of metal capacitor in meters for LEVEL 3 diode only Overrides WM
52. NET net path total capacitance V routing confidence CONN P logical instance delimiter logical port physical port I B O C coordinate L par value S rising slew falling slew low threshold high threshold D cell type I physical instance delimiter logical pin physical node I B O C coordinate L par value S rising slew falling slew low threshold high threshold D cell type N net name delimiter net number coordinate CAP cap id nodel node2 capacitance RES res id nodel node2 resistance INDUC induc id nodel node2 inductance END HSPICE RF User Guide 299 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Table 24 SPEF Parameters Parameter Definition SPEF Specifies that the file is in SPEF format version Version number of the SPEF specification such as IEEE 1481 1998 Words that start with an asterisk are keywords Or For example NSIPS means choose either nanoseconds or picoseconds as the time units design_name Name of your circuit design date Date and time when a parasitic extraction tool such as Star RCXT generated the SPEF file vendor Name of the vendor such as Synopsys whose tools you used to generate the SPEF file optional program_name Name of the program such as Star RCXT that generated the SPEF file program_version Version number of the program that generated the SPEF file 300 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 C
53. NO gt lt NOISECALC 1 0 YES NO gt FILENAME file name DATAFORMAT ri ma db gt FREQSWEEP freq sweep POWERSWEEP power sweep Parameter Description NHARMS Number of harmonics in the HB analysis triggered by the HBLSP statement POWERUNIT Power unit Default is watt HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 10 Power Dependent S Parameter Extraction Input Syntax Parameter Description SSPCALC Extract small signal S parameters Default is O NO NOISECALC Perform small signal 2 port noise analysis Default is 0 NO FILENAME Output data p2d filename Default is the netlist name or the object name after the o command line option DATAFORMAT Format of the output data file Default is ma magnitude angle FREQSWEEP Frequency sweep specification A sweep of type LIN DEC OCT POI or SWEEPBLOCK Specify the nsteps start and stop times using the following syntax for each type of sweep LIN nsteps start stop DEC nsteps start stop OCT nsteps start stop POI nsteps freq values SWEEPBLOCK blockname This keyword must appear before the POWERSWEEP keyword POWERSWEEP Power sweep specification A sweep of type LIN DEC OCT POI or SWEEPBLOCK Specify the nsteps start and stop frequencies using the following syntax for each type of sweep LIN nsteps start stop DEC nsteps start stop OCT nsteps start stop POI nsteps power values SWEEPBLOCK blockname This keyword must follow the FRE
54. OUE gerek x2 XO aeaiia HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features POWER Analysis x2 OUE ees Total Power Subckt Name inv Instance Name Port Max A Min A Avg A mn mn mn mn mp mp mp mp Total Power o n Q 9 0 Q DA POWER Analysis The POWER statement in HSPICE RF creates a table which by default contains the measurements for AVG RMS MAX and MIN for every signal specified For example POWER signals lt REF vname FROM start time TO end time By default the scope of these measurements are set from 0 to the maximum timepoint specified in the TRAN statement For syntax and description of POWER statement see POWER in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Example 1 In this example no simulation start and stop time is specified for the x1 in signal so the simulation scope for this signal runs from the start Ops to the last tran time 100ps power xl in tran 4ps 100ps Example 2 You can use the FROM and TO times to specify a separate measurement start and stop time for each signal In this example The scope for simulating the x2 in signal is from 20ps to 80ps The scope for simulating the xO in signal is from 30ps to 70ps param myendtime 80ps power x2 in REF a123 from 20ps to 80ps power x0 in REF abc from 30ps to myendtime 10ps HSPICE RF User Guide 383 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features POWER
55. POST param Vtune 2 0 Failures vtune 1 param Cvalz0 2p First oscillator section Low Q resonator with Vdd at center tap of inductors Rla IP ri 100k S These R s set the Q Rib ri IN 100k L1 IP vdd 16 5nH L2 vdd IN 16 5nH Ccl IP gnd Cval I to Q Cc2 IN gnd Cval I to Q Differential fets M1 IP IN cs gnd NMOS 1 0 35u w 15u M2 IN IP cs gnd NMOS 1 0 35u w 15u Bias fet bias at Vdd too high Mb cs vdd gnd gnd NMOS 1 0 35u w 15u fets used as varactors Mtl vc IP vc gnd NMOS 1 0 35u w 2u M 50 Mt2 vc IN vc gnd NMOS 1 0 35u w 2u M 50 Second oscillator section Low Q resonator with Vdd at center tap of inductors Rla_b QP ri b 100k These R s set the Q R1b b ri b QN 100k L1 b QP vdd 16 5nH L2 b vdd QN 16 5nH Cc1 b QP gnd Cval Q to I Cc2_b QN gnd Cval Q to I Differential fets M1 b QP ON cs b gnd NMOS 1 0 35u w 15u M2 b QN QP cs b gnd NMOS 1 0 35u w 15u Bias fet bias at Vdd too high 2nd in parallel Mb b cs b vdd gnd gnd NMOS 1 0 35u w 15u HSPICE RF User Guide 31 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 5 CMOS GPS VCO 32 fets used as varactors Mt1 b vc QP vc gnd NMOS 1 0 35u w 2u M Mt2 b vc ON vc gnd NMOS 1 0 35u w 2u M Differentiators Coupling transistors param Cdiff 0 14p difMsize 50u vidiff dbias gnd 1 25 viqdiff vdcdif gnd 1 75 Midiffl dQP dbias gnd gnd NMOS 1 0 35u Midiff2 dQN dbias gnd gnd NMOS 120 35u Midiff3 dIN dbias gn
56. RF User Guide 359 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Simulating the Effects of Global and Local Variations with Monte Carlo 360 ln summary each subcircuit has its own parameter space therefore it is possible to put groups of identical components into a subcircuit and within each group all devices have the same parameter values but between the groups parameters are different When specifying variations on these parameters the effects of local variations between the groups are created Variations on a Model Parameter Using a Local Model in Subcircuit If a model is specified within a subcircuit then the specified parameter values apply only to the devices in the same subcircuit Therefore it is possible to calculate the value of a model parameter within the subcircuit for example as a function of geometry information When specifying variations on these parameters the effects of local variations between subcircuits are created If this method is used at the extreme with one device per subcircuit then each device has its own model This approach leads to a substantial overhead in the simulator and is therefore not recommended Indirect Variations on a Model Parameter In sections Variations Specified on Geometrical Instance Parameters and Variations Specified in the Context of Subcircuits variations on geometrical parameters were presented If we want to specify variations on a model parameter for
57. Syntax Output Syntaxe oet epe belek Pee ewe eh S E E k mao d 0 Output Data Files 1 uper Ere REPRE XR Errors and Warnings kasa ka kl h ka kal kk kk amp hi la l ya ee Multitone Nonlinear Steady State Analysis HBNOISE Supported FeatureS 0 kk kk kk kk kK res Input Syntax Output Syntax oi cota eR De etr EP AP ba Ut I bed Output Data Files see Ree RR b REX Measuring HBNOISE Analyses with MEASURE Errors and Warnings 000 kk kK kK KK KK KK KK KI KOK ee Frequency Translation S Parameter HBLIN Extraction HB Analysis Port Element HBLIN Arialysls 2 yalan RE eS ANNE DWA teed TANE r aaa ee Output Syntax xan ka nay sheer ee erdt W Pe c o del Output Data Files k kk kK kK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK Computing Transfer Functions HBXF WW KK KK eee KK Supported Features i 1n exse de x selk RAT EXER RE awed Input Syntax 244 245 246 247 247 248 248 250 250 251 253 253 253 254 255 256 257 258 258 259 261 262 263 264 265 267 267 268 270 271 271 272 273 12 13 14 Output Syntax Output Data Files References Envelope Analysis Envelope Simulation Envelope Analysis Comma Output Syntax Envelope Output Data File Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Standard Post Lay
58. Zo NL F m UL wit E and LC values taken from a U model HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines Lossy U Element Uxxx inl in2 lt in5 gt gt refin outl out2 lt out5 gt gt refout mname L val LUMPS val Parameter Description Uxxx Lossy U Element transmission line element name Must begin with U followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters inx Signal input node for the x transmission line in1 is required refin Ground reference for the input signal outx Signal output node for the x transmission line each input port must have a corresponding output port refout Ground reference for the output signal mname Model reference name for the U model lossy transmission line L Physical length of the transmission line in units of meters LUMPS Number of lumped parameter sections used to simulate the element In this syntax the number of ports on a single transmission line is limited to five in and five out One input and output port the ground references a model reference and a length are all required Example 1 The U1 transmission line connects the in node to the out node Ul in gnd out gnd umodel RG58 L 5 Both signal references are grounded umodel RG568 references the U model The transmission line is 5 meters long Example 2 The Ucable transmission line connects the in1 and in2 input nodes to the out1 and out2 output nodes Uca
59. and Device Models Manual the capacitance value is optional If you use an equation to specify capacitance the CTYPE parameter determines how HSPICE calculates the capacitance charge The calculation is different depending on whether the equation uses a self referential voltage that is the voltage across the capacitor whose capacitance is determined by the equation To avoid syntax conflicts if a capacitor model has the same name as a capacitance parameter HSPICE or HSPICE RF uses the model name Example 1 In the following example C1 assumes its capacitance value from the model not the parameter PARAMETER CAPXX 1 C1 1 2 CAPXX MODEL CAPXX C CAP 1 Example 2 In the following example the C1 capacitors connect from node 1 to node 2 with a capacitance of 20 picofarads C1 1 2 20p In this next example Cshunt refers to three capacitors in parallel connected from the node output to ground each with a capacitance of 100 femtofarads Cshunt output gnd C 100f M23 The Cload capacitor connects from the driver node to the output node The capacitance is determined by the voltage on the capcontrol node times 1E 6 The initial voltage across the capacitor is O volts Cload driver output C lu v capcontrol CTYPE 1 IC 0v The C99 capacitor connects from the in node to the out node The capacitance is determined by the polynomial C cO c1 v c2 v v where v is the voltage across the capacitor C99 in out POLY 2 0 0 5 0
60. and capacitance by its value Default 1 0 R Resistance value at room temperature This can be resistance a numeric value in ohms a parameter in ohms a function of any node voltages a function of branch currents any independent variables such as time hertz and temper HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Parameter Description M Multiplier to simulate parallel resistors For example for two parallel instances of a resistor set M 2 to multiply the number of resistors by 2 Default 1 0 AC Resistance for AC analysis Default Reff DTEMP Temperature difference between the element and the circuit in degrees Celsius Default 0 0 L Resistor length in meters Default 0 0 if you did not specify L in a resistor model W Resistor width Default 0 0 if you did not specify W in the model C Capacitance connected from node n2 to bulk Default 0 0 if you did not specify C in a resistor model user defined Can be a function of any node voltages element currents temperature equation frequency or time NOISE NOISE 0 do not evaluate resistor noise NOISE 1 evaluate resistor noise default Resistance can be a value in units of ohms or an equation Required parameters are the two nodes and the resistance or model name If you specify other parameters the node and model name must precede those parameters Other parameters can follow in any order If you specify a
61. as a special case of complex asterisk denotes the expression s complex conjugate Advantages of Foster Form Modeling The advantages of Foster canonical form modeling are models high order systems It can theoretically model systems having infinite poles without numerical problems equivalent to Laplace and Pole zero models popular method of recursive convolution uses this form G and E Element Syntax Transconductance G s form GXXX n n FOSTER in in k0 kl Re A1 Im A1 Re p1 Im p1 Re A2 Im A2 Re p2 Im p2 Re A3 Im A3 Re p3 Im p3 FP ats Gain E s form EXXX n n FOSTER in in KO kl Re A1 Im A1 Re p1 Im p1 Re A2 Im A2 Re p2 Im p2 Re A3 Im A3 Re p3 Im p3 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Complex Signal Sources and Stimuli In the above syntax parenthesis commas and slashes are separators they have the same meaning as a space A pole residue pair is represented by four numbers real and imaginary part of the residue then real and imaginary part of the pole You must make sure that Re pi O otherwise the simulations will certainly diverge Also it is a good idea to assure passivity of the model for an N port admittance matrix Y Re Y should be positive definite or the simulation is likely to diverge Example To represent a G s in the form 0 0008
62. at each port of the system To indicate the frequency band that the S parameters are extracted from it is necessary to specify a harmonic index for each P element Port Element Syntax Without SS_TONE Pxxx p n n ref lt PORT portnumber gt HBLIN H1 H2 HN 1 gt With SS_TONE Pxxx p n n ref PORT portnumber gt lt HBLIN Hl1 H2 1 HN gt Parameter Description n ref Reference node used when a mixed mode port is specified PORT The port number Numbered sequentially beginning with 1 with no shared port numbers HBLIN Integer vector that specifies the harmonic index corresponding to the tones defined in the HB command The 1 term corresponds to the small signal tone specified by SS TONE in the HB command If there is no SS TONE in the HB command the 1 term must be at the last entry of HBLIN vector HSPICE RF User Guide 267 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Frequency Translation S Parameter HBLIN Extraction 268 HBLIN Analysis You use the HBLIN statement to extract frequency translation S parameters and noise figures Input Syntax Without SS TONE HBLIN frequency sweep NOISECALC 1 0 yes no gt FILENAME file name DATAFORMAT ri ma db gt lt MIXEDMODE2PORT dd cc cd dc sd sc cs ds gt With SS_TONE HBLIN lt NOISECALC 1 0 yes no gt FILENAME file name gt lt DATAFOR
63. att Re Ag Py go A o Rei Ae cos ar jsin at Ret Va jV cos ar jsin ar Vpcos at V sin af Acos cos at Asin o sin o HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis Note that real imaginary and polar formats are related with the standard convention V jVj Ae Vg Acos Q V Asin A Va V V tan ed VR The result of HB analysis is a complex voltage current spectrum at each circuit node or specified branch Let a i be the real part and b i be the imaginary part of the complex voltage at the ith frequency index Conversion to a steady state time domain waveform is given by the Fourier series expansion v t a 0 a 1 cos 2x 1 b 1 sin 2x 1 1 a 2 cos 2x 2 1 b 2 sin 2x T2 t a 3 cos 2x 3 f b 3 sin 2x 3 f n a N cos 2x TN f b N sin 2x N f Where v t is the resulting time domain waveform N 1 is the total number of harmonics including DC in the frequency domain spectrum in the hb0 file the zero th data point represents DC a i is the real value of the ith data point i e the real component at the ith frequency b i is the imag value of the i th data point i e the imaginary component at the ith frequency i is the ith frequency value which is the DC term These frequencies need not be harmonically related The time domai
64. be 0 0 with the HBOSC PROBENODE voltage defined through its HROSCVPROBE property HB Simulation of Ring Oscillators Ring oscillators require a slightly different simulation approach in HB Since their oscillation is due to the inherent delay in the inverters of the ring they are best modeled in the time domain and not in the frequency domain Also ring oscillator waveforms frequently approach square waves which require a large number of harmonics to be described in the frequency domain An accurate initial guess is important if they are going to be simulated accurately with HB HSPICE RF HB oscillator analysis typically starts from the DC solution and looks for potential resonances in the linear portion of the circuit to determine the initial guess for the oscillation frequency However these resonances generally do not exist in ring oscillators which do not contain many linear elements HB analysis provides a second method of obtaining a good initial guess for the oscillation frequency which is specifically intended for ring oscillators Instead of starting from the results of a DC analysis this method starts from the result of a transient analysis This method also provides a good initial guess for all the voltages and currents in the circuit 230 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP 1 HBOSC Analysis Options Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Harmonic Balance for Oscillator Analysis To perform an HB analysis
65. begin with M followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters nd Drain terminal node name ng Gate terminal node name ns Source terminal node name nb Bulk terminal node name which is optional To set this argument in the MOSFET model use the BULK parameter mname MOSFET model name reference HSPICE RF User Guide 111 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Active Elements 112 Parameter Description L MOSFET channel length in meters This parameter overrides OPTION DEFL with a maximum value of 0 1m Default DEFL W MOSFET channel width in meters This parameter overrides OPTION DEFW DefaultZDEFW AD Drain diffusion area Overrides OPTION DEFAD Default DEFAD if you set the ACM 0 model parameter AS Source diffusion area Overrides OPTION DEFAS Default DEFAS if you set the ACM 0 model parameter PD Perimeter of drain junction including channel edge Overrides OPTION DEFPD Default DEFAD if you set the ACM 0 or 1 model parameter Default 0 0 if you set ACM 2 or 3 PS Perimeter of source junction including channel edge Overrides OPTION DEFPS Default DEFAS if you set the ACM 0 or 1 model parameter Default 0 0 if you set ACM 2 or 3 NRD Number of squares of drain diffusion for resistance calculations Overrides OPTION DEFNRD Default DEFNRD if you set ACM 0 or 1 model parameter Default 0 0 if you set ACM 2 or 3 NRS Number of squares of source diffusion for resistance calculations Overrides OPTION
66. case HSPICE RF offers two options Multi tone HB analysis specify the LO and RF base frequencies as two separate tones on the HB command Periodic AC analysis HBAC if one of the inputs is a small signal you can use a faster linear analysis to analyze its effect For example if a mixer s LO is a large signal but RF is a small signal a single tone HB analysis using the Lo frequency can be combined with HBAC in place of a 2 tone HB analysis HSPICE RF User Guide 37 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 6 Mixer 38 To demonstrate both techniques this example analyzes an ideal mixer built using behavioral elements It is based on demonstration netlist mix tran sp which is available in directory lt installdir gt demo hspicerf examples Ideal mixer example transient analysis OPTIONS POST vlo lo 0 1 0 sin 1 0 0 5 1 0g 0 0 90 rrfl r l xtf l1 0 gl 0 if cur 1 0 v lo v rf mixer element cl 0 if qz 1 0e 9 v lo v rf mixer element rout if ifg 1 0 vctrl ifg 0 0 0 hi out O vctrl 1 0 convert I to V rhi out 0 1 0 vrf rfl 0 sin 0 0 001 0 8GHz 0 0 114 tran 10p 10n opt sim accuracy 100 end This example uses behavioral controlled current and charge sources to simulate a mixer The Lo signal is driven by a 0 5 Volt sinusoid at 1 GHz and RF is driven by a 10mV signal at 800 MHz The mixer output is the voltage at node out v out Two tone HB Approach To analyze this circuit u
67. case 326 330 356 yield 326 arccos x function 139 arcsin x function 139 arctan x function 139 arithmetic operators 139 ASIC libraries 76 asin x function 139 Index atan x function 139 AUNIF keyword 339 average deviation 327 B node name in CSOS 63 backslash continuation character 138 Backward Euler algorithm 315 316 integration 315 316 Behavioral capacitors 90 Behavioral resistors 83 BJTs elements names 107 block elements 159 broadband phasenoise 238 broadband phasenoise algorithm 238 buffer 176 C C Element capacitor 88 154 capacitance element parameter 85 manufacturing variations 345 capacitor 154 charge based 156 element 85 88 154 frequency dependent 89 157 linear 88 models 85 cell characterization 326 charge based capacitor 156 CHECK EDGE statement 379 CHECK FALL statement 379 CHECK GLOBAL LEVEL statement 378 CHECK HOLD statement 380 CHECK IRDROP statement 381 CHECK RISE statement 379 CHECK SETUP statement 380 389 Index CHECK SLEW statement 378 choke elements 159 circuit description syntax 9 circuits description syntax 52 reusable 71 subcircuit numbers 62 temperature 329 See also subcircuits Colpitts oscillator 27 command PRINT ENV 281 command PROBE ENV 281 commands hspicerf 9 comment line netlist 54 comparing results 40 compression of input files 43 config file hspicerf 365 configuration file 365 example 368 continuation character parameter strings
68. commands SAVE and LOAD HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Chapter 1 HSPICE RF Features and Functionality HSPICE and HSPICE RF Differences Table 1 HSPICE Features Not in HSPICE RF Continued Feature See Options that activate unsupported features in HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference HSPICE RF FAST GSHDC GSHUNT LIMPTS OFF RESMIN TIMERES All version options Options ignored by HSPICE RF because they are not needed since they are replaced by automated algorithms ABSH ABSV ABSVAR BELV BKPSIZ CHGTOL CONVERGE CSHDC CVTOL DCFOR DCHOLD DCON DCSTEP DI DV DVDT FAST FS FT GMAX GRAMP GSHDC GSHUNT ICSWEEP IMAX IMIN ITL3 ITL5 ITLPZ LIMPTS LVLTIM MAXAMP MBYPASS NEWTOL RELH RELI RELQ RELV RELVAR TRTOL All matrix options All error options HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Refere
69. consumption Thistraditional flow flattens all nodes after extraction so it is more difficult to compare the delay before and after extraction u This traditional flow can also stress the limits of an extraction tool so reliability also becomes an issue HSPICE RF provides a flow that solves all of these problems HSPICE RF User Guide 283 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Star RCXT generates a hierarchical Layout Versus Schematic LVS ideal netlist and flat information about RC parasitics in a DSPF or standard parasitic exchange format SPEF file HSPICE RF uses the hybrid flat hierarchical approach to back annotate the RC parasitics from the DSPF or SPEF file into the hierarchical LVS ideal netlist Using the hierarchical LVS ideal netlist cuts simulation runtime and CPU memory usage Because HSPICE RF uses the hierarchical LVS ideal netlist as the top level netlist you can fully control the netlist For example You can set different modes to different blocks for better accuracy and speed trade off You can run power analysis based on the hierarchical LVS ideal netlist to determine the power consumption of each block If you use the hierarchical LVS ideal netlist you can reuse all post processing statements from the pre layout simulation for the post layout simulation This saves time and the capacity of the verification tool is not stressed so reliability is h
70. dialog Be sure to change the Files of Type filter to find the scO file To open a blank Smith chart click the Smith chart icon on the left side of the upper toolbar Using the signal manager select the S 1 1 and S 2 2 signals under the S Par heading from the gsmlna scO file You should see them plotted on the Smith chart To open a blank Polar chart click the Polar chart icon on the left side of the upper toolbar Now use the signal manager to select the S 2 1 signal under the S Par heading to plot the complex gain of the LNA Open a blank X Y plot Use the signal manager to plot K the Rollett stability factor and Gas the associated gain under the Gain Par heading and NFMIN the noise figure minimum under the Noise Par heading Example 2 Power Amplifier The HB command computes periodic steady state solutions of circuits This analysis uses the Harmonic Balance HB technique for computing such solutions in the frequency domain The circuit can be driven by a voltage power or current source or it may be an autonomous oscillator The HB algorithm represents the circuit s voltage and current waveforms as a Fourier series that is a series of sinusoidal waveforms To set up a periodic steady state analysis the HSPICE input netlist must contain A HB command to activate the analysis The HB command specifies the base frequency or frequencies also called tones for the analysis and the number of harmonics to
71. e 03 e 08 e 05 HSPICE RF User Guide 387 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Detecting and Reporting Surge Currents Signal Port Current Definition_ Dep Dep Name Name Parent Up Dn Max A Min A Avg A RMS A 259 XINV XI4 XRI INVERTER 227 4 1 1 754 1 494 3 101 3 007 N3 OUT e 03 e 03 e 09 e 05 274 XINV XIA4 XRI INVERTER 222 4 1 1 580 1 615 1 155 1 569 N4 OUT e 09 e 09 e 14 e 11 Detecting and Reporting Surge Currents The SURGE statement in HSPICE RF automatically detects and reports a current surge that exceeds the specified surge tolerance For example SURGE surge threshold surge width nodel lt node2 noden gt This statement reports any current surge that is greater than surge threshold for a duration of more than surge wiath For additional information see SURGE in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference 388 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Symbols IGND node 61 A abs x function 139 absolute power function 139 value function 139 AC choke inductors 101 AC statement 329 accuracy control 316 acos x function 139 AGAUSS keyword 339 algebraic expressions 138 algorithm linear acceleration 310 nonlinear perturbation 237 numerical integration 315 316 periodic AC 237 ALTER blocks 66 67 67 68 statement 67 69 amplifier 15 19 analysis data driven 326 327 Monte Carlo 327 335 335 356 oscillator 227 phase noise 233 statistical 330 356 Taguchi 326 temperature 326 328 worst
72. example the threshold of a MOS device then the approach explained in the previous section with one model per device in a subcircuit could be used However this is impractical because the netlist needs to be created to call each device as a subcircuit and because of the overhead Since variations are of interest only on a few model parameters an indirect method of varying model parameters can be used Some special instance parameters are available for this purpose For example for MOS devices the parameter delvtO defines a shift in threshold Referencing a parameter with a distribution as value for delvto0 creates the effect of local threshold variations A significant number of parameters of this type are available in HSPICE RF for BSIM3 and BSIM4 models The variations can be tailored for each device depending on its size for example A disadvantage of this method is that the netlist needs to be parameterized properly to get the correct variations The process of preparing a basic netlist for Monte Carlo simulations with this approach is tedious and error prone therefore it is best handled with scripts HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Simulating the Effects of Global and Local Variations with Monte Carlo Bsim3 supports the following instance parameters L w ad as pd ps nrd nrs rdc rsc off ic dtemp delvto geo sa sb sd nf stimod sa1 sa2 sa3 sa4 sa5 sa6 sa7
73. f1 f0 2 The f0 is the steady state fundamental tone and f1 is the input frequency 273 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Computing Transfer Functions HBXF Output Syntax This section describes the syntax for the HBXF PRINT and PROBE statements PRINT and PROBE Statements PRINT HBXF TYPE NODES ELEM PROBE HBXF TYPE NODES ELEM Parameter Description TYPE TYPE can be one of the following TFV existing source TFI placeholder value for the current source attached to the given node The transfer function is computed on the output variables and input current or voltage NODES ELEM NODES or ELEM can be one of the following Voltage type a single node name n1 ora pair of node names n1 n2 Current type an element name elemname Power type a resistor resistorname or port portname element name Output Data Files An HBXF calculation produces these output data files m Output from the PRINT statement is written to a printxf file e The output is in ohms siemens or undesignated units and the header in the output file is Z Y or GAIN m Output from the PROBE statement is written to a xf file Reported performance log statistics are written to a lis file e HBXF CPU time e HBXF peak memory usage 274 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses References Exa
74. from a HSPICE RF voltage or current waveform to reduce the size of the waveform file Eliminating Voltage Datapoints You use the SIM DELTAV option to determine the selection criteria for HSPICE HF voltage waveforms in WDB or NW format For example OPTION SIM DELTAV lt value gt During simulation HSPICE RF checks whether the value of the X signal at the ntimestep changes by more than the SIM DELTAV option from its previous value at the n 1 timestep If yes then HSPICE RF saves the new data point Otherwise this new data point is lost Typically such an algorithm yields a reduced file size with minimal resolution loss as long as you set an appropriate SIM DELTAV value If a value for the SIM DELTAV option is too large the waveform degrades Figure 25 Analog Compression Formats A e hd NW retains these data A points that are ON the line plotting 3 segments But NW and WDB both eliminate these data points WDB eliminates these data which are within DELTAV or DELTAI of the previous points plotting only ONE data point and are not ON the plotted waveform line segment for this line HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 14 Using HSPICE with HSPICE RF Compressing Analog Files For a additional information see OPTION SIM_DELTAV in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Eliminating Current Datapoints You use the SIM_DELTAT option to determine the selection criteria for HSPICE RF current wavefor
75. generates an error indicating that a resistor node is missing R1 1 2 1k Also in this example HSPICE issues a warning indicating that the value of resistor R1 is limited to 1e 5 and interprets the line as R1 2 1 without a defined value R1 2 1 1k The period is reserved for use as a separator between a subcircuit name and a node name subcircuitName nodeName If a node name contains a period the node will be considered a top level node unless there is a valid match to a subcircuit name and node name in the hierarchy The sorting order for operating point nodes is a Z T a Using Wildcards on Node Names You can use wildcards to match node names wildcard matches any single character For example 9 matches 92 9a 9A and 9 m x wildcard matches any string of zero or more characters For example e If your netlist includes a resistor named r1 and a voltage source named vin then PRINT i prints the current for both of these elements i r1 and i vin e And PRINT v o prints the voltages for all nodes whose names start with o if your netlist contains nodes named in and out this example prints only the v out voltage matches any character tht appears within the brackets For example 123 matches 1 2 or 3 A hyphen inside the brackets indicates a character range For example 0 9 is the same as 0123456789 and matches any digit For example the following prints
76. in degrees Celsius Default 0 0 Only drain gate and source nodes and model name fields are required Node and model names must precede other fields Example 1 In the J1 JFET element below Jl 1 2 3 model 1 The drain connects to node 1 The source connects to node 2 The gate connects to node 3 model 1 references the JFET model Example 2 In the following Jopamp1 JFET element Jopampl dl g3 s2 b 1stage AREA 100u The drain connects to the d1 node The source connects to the g3 node The gate connects to the s2 node HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Active Elements stage references the JFET model The area is 100 microns Example 3 In the Jdrive JFET element below Jdrive driver in output model jfet W 10u L 10u The drain connects to the driver node The source connects to the in node The gate connects to the output node model jfet references the JFET model The width is 10 microns The length is 10 microns MOSFETs Mxxx nd ng ns nb mname lt lt L gt length gt lt lt W gt width gt AD val AS val PD val PS val NRD val NRS val RDC val RSC val OFF IC vds vgs vbs M val lt DTEMP val gt GEO val lt DELVTO val gt OPTION WL Mxxx nd ng ns lt nb gt mname lt width gt lt length gt lt other_options gt Parameter Description Mxxx MOSFET element name Must
77. in the diode model Default 0 0 LM Length of metal capacitor in meters for LEVEL 3 diode only Overrides LM in the diode model Default 0 0 OFF Sets the initial condition for this element to OFF in DC analysis Default ON IC vd Initial voltage across the diode element Use this value when you specify the UIC option in the TRAN statement The IC statement overrides this value M Multiplier to simulate multiple diodes in parallel The M setting affects all currents capacitances and resistances Default 1 DTEMP The difference between the element temperature and the circuit temperature in degrees Celsius Default 0 0 W Width of the diode in meters LEVEL 3 diode model only L Length of the diode in meters LEVEL 3 diode model only You must specify two nodes and a model name If you specify other parameters the nodes and model name must be first and the other parameters can appear in any order Example 1 The D1 diode with anode and cathode connects to nodes 1 and 2 Diode1 specifies the diode model D1 1 2 diodel HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Active Elements Example 2 The Dprot diode with anode and cathode connects to both the output node and ground references the firstd diode model and specifies an area of 10 unitless for LEVEL 1 model The initial condition has the diode OFF Dprot output gnd firstd 10 OFF Example 3 The Ddrive diode with anode and cathode conn
78. inductance value is independent of temperature and scaling factors The choke acts as a short circuit for all DC analyses HSPICE RF calculates the DC current through the inductor In all other non DC analyses a DC current source of this value represents the choke that is HSPICE RF does not then allow di dt variations HSPICE RF User Guide 159 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Passive Elements 160 Ideal Transformers You can use the IDEAL keyword with the K element to designate ideal transformer coupling Syntax Kxxx Ij Lj k IDEAL IDEAL gt The IDEAL keyword replaces the coupling factor value This keyword activates the following equation set for non DC values which is presented here with multiple coupled inductors lj is the current into the first terminal of Ly vyl v2 y3 _ y4 _ JLI L2 JL3 JLA 0 il JL1 i2 JL2 i3 JL3 ia JL4 HSPICE RF can solve any i or v in terms of L ratios For two inductors non DC values vl _ y2 JLI JL2 0 il JL1 i2 JL2 v2 v E L1 ia fa L2 DC is treated as usual inductors are treated as short circuits DC ignores mutual coupling You can couple inductors that use the INFINITY keyword to IDEAL K elements All inductors involved must have the INFINITY value and for K IDEAL the ratios of all L values is unity Then for two L values v2 V i2 il Example 1 This example is a standard 5 pin i
79. inductor The resulting waveforms should be the same as those from HB oscillator analysis Example 5 CMOS GPS VCO This second oscillator analysis example involves two negative resistance oscillators coupled at 90 degrees MOS capacitors are used as varactors This VCO topology is common for GPS applications and produces quadrature LO outputs near 1550 MHz The purpose of this example is to generate the VCO HSPICE RF User Guide 29 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 5 CMOS GPS VCO 30 tuning curve output level and frequency as a function of tuning voltage as well as its phase noise characteristics as a function of tuning voltage As in previous examples the oscillator analysis is activated using the HBOSC command The TONE parameter sets an approximate oscillation frequency near 1550 MHz The NHARMS parameter sets the harmonic content to 11th order The PROBENODE parameters identify the drain pins across the first oscillator section as the pair of oscillating nodes This is a differential oscillator and the approximate value for this differential amplitude is 6 1 V The FSPTS parameters set the search frequency range between 1500 and 1600 MHz The SWEEP parameters set a tuning voltage sweep from 2 0 to 3 2 V The following example is based on demonstration netlist gpsvco sp which is available in directory lt installdir gt demo hspicerf examples This netlist simulates the osc
80. is described in detail in the CosmosScope User Guide The waveform calculator has no RF specific features Tools Measurement opens the Measurement Tool Three RF measurements have been added under the RF submenu of the measurement selection menu e 1db compression point 1DB CP e IP3 OIPS HSPICE RF User Guide 13 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 2 Getting Started Using the CosmosScope Waveform Display e Spurious free dynamic range SFDR Tools gt RF Tool opens the RF Tool which generates contour plots on Smith or Polar charts In HSPICE RF the plotfile must be a file with a sc extension that a LIN command generates HSPICE RF automatically finds the S parameter and noise parameter data in the sc file and uses it to generate noise gain and stability circles 14 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Provides a quick start tutorial for users new to HSPICE RF This tutorial assumes you are familiar with HSPICE and general HSPICE syntax but new to RF analysis features The most basic RF analysis features are presented here using simple examples Example 1 Low Noise Amplifier The LIN command simplifies the calculation of linear multi port transfer parameters and noise parameters In the LIN analysis Port P elements are used to specify port numbers and their characteristic impedances The analysis automatically computes the frequency dependent complex transfer coefficients between por
81. meas m delay trig v 2 val vref fall 1 targ v out val vref fall 1 meas m power rms power probe tran v in v 1 v 2 v 3 v 4 end Transient Sigma Sweep Results The plot in Figure 37 shows the family of transient analysis curves for the transient sweep of the sigma parameter from 3 to 3 from the file inv trO In the HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case and Monte Carlo Sweep Example sweep HSPICE RF uses the values of sigma to update the skew parameters which in turn modify the actual NMOS and PMOS models Operating Point Results in Transient Analysis If you want to get OP results after every Monte Carlo simulation in transient analysis you can add the option op ile to the netlist OP results will all output to the file dpO Figure 37 Sweep of Skew Parameters from 3 Sigma to 3 Sigma 3 Sigma Skew Results 0 0 100p 200p 300p 400p 500p tis To view the measured results plot the inv mtO output file The plot in Figure 38 shows the measured pair delay and the total dissipative power as a function of the parameter sigma HSPICE RF User Guide 349 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case and Monte Carlo Sweep Example 350 Figure 38 Sweep MOS Inverter Pair Delay and Power 3 Sigma to 3 Sigma Power and Delay as Function af Sigma 3 sigmar s power sigma 3 sigmat s delay sigma sig
82. netlists and start CosmosScope type hspicerf mix tran sp hspicerf mix hb sp hspicerf mix hbac sp cscope amp 2 Open the mix tran trO file choose File gt Open gt Plotfiles and select mix tran trO 3 To plot v out double click v out in the signal manager Open the mix hb hbO file choose File gt Open gt Plotfiles and select mix hb hbO You might need to change the Files of Type filter to HSPICERF HB hb 5 Plot v out by double clicking v out in the signal manager A histogram displays 6 Open the mix hbac hbO file choose File gt Open gt Plotfiles and select mix hbac hbO You might need to change the Files of Type filter to HSPICERF HBAC hb HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Device Model Cards 7 Plot v out by double clicking v out in the signal manager You should see a histogram similar to the one from mix hb hbO 8 Convert the HB and HBAC histograms to time domain For each of the two v out histogram signals right click on the v out label and choose To Time Domain Accept the default range and interval settings Two new time domain waveforms should appear 9 Overlay the three time domain plots Right click on each timedomain v out label and choose Stack Region Analog O The bottom panel should now display all three time domain signals All three are almost indistinguishable from each other You can also use HBAC to perfo
83. node Both signal references are grounded umod 1 references the U model The transmission line is 10 meters long HSPICE RF User Guide 117 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines Example 3 The Wnet1 element is a five conductor lossy transmission line wnet il i2 i3 i4 i5 gnd o1 gnd o3 gnd o5 gnd FSmodel board1 N 5 L 1m Where Theil i2 i3 i4 and i5 input nodes connect to the o1 o3 and o5 output nodes The i5 input and three outputs 01 o3 and 05 are all grounded board1 references the Field Solver model The transmission line is 1 millimeter long Example 4 S Model Example Wnetl il i2 gnd ol o2 gnd Smodel smod 1 nodemap ili20102 N 2 L 10m Where ini and in2 input nodes connect to the out1 and out2 output node Both signal references are grounded smod 1 references the S Model The transmission line is 10 meters long You can specify parameters in the W Element card in any order You can specify the number of signal conductors N after the node list You can also mix nodes and parameters in the W Element card You can specify only one of the RLGCfile FSmodel Umodel or Smodel models in a single W Element card Figure 11 shows node numbering for the element syntax 118 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines Figure 11 Terminal Node Numbering for the W Element N 1 c
84. node as an oscillating node and provides a guess value of 4 27 volts for the oscillation amplitude at the emitter node FSPTS 40 9e6 1 1e7 Causes an initial frequency search using 40 equally spaced points between 9 and 11 MHz Inthe PHASENOISE PRINT and PROBE commands HSPICE RF User Guide 27 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 4 Colpitts Oscillator 28 PHASENOISE V emitter dec 10 10k 1meg Runs phase noise analysis at the specified offset frequencies measured from the oscillation carrier frequency The frequency points specified here are on a logarithmic scale 10 points per decade 10 kHz to 1 MHz PROBE PHASENOISE PHNOISE and the similar PRINT command instruct HSPICE RF to output phase noise results to the osc pnO and osc printpno files Uses emitter resistor limiting to keep output sinusoidal Output can be taken at the emitter eml node kk Options for Oscillator Harmonic Balance Analysis OPTIONS post sim accuracy 100 hbsolver 0 Bias NPN transistor for 5V Vce 10mA Ic Emitter follower Colpitts design Vcc collector 0 9V Q1 collector base emitter emitter RF WB NPN Rel emitter eml 100 RLoad eml 0 300 Rb1 collector base 4300 Rb2 base 0 5600 Capacitive feedback network Ce 0 eml 100pF Cfb base eml 100pF Cbb base bb 470pF Lb bb 0 6uH Simulation control for automated oscillator analysis HBOSC tones 1 0e7 nharms 15 PROBENODE emitter 0 4
85. noise model supports both normal and two port noise analysis NOISE and LIN NOISECALC 1 Example 1 sl nl n2 n3 n ref mname smodel model smodel s n 3 fqmodel sfqmodel zo 50 fbase 25e6 fmax 1e9 Example 2 sl n n2 n3 n ref fqmodel sfqmodel zo 50 fbase 25e6 fmax 1e9 Examples 1 and 2 return the same result Example 3 sl nl n2 n3 n ref mname smodel zo 100 model smodel s n 3 fqmodel sfqmodel zo 50 fbase 25e6 fmax 1e9 In this example the characteristic impedance of each port is 100 ohms instead of 50 ohms as defined in smode1 because parameters defined in the S element statement have higher priority than those defined in the S model statement Example 4 sl nl n2 n3 n ref mname smodel model smodel s n 3 fqmodel sfqmodel zo 50 50 100 In this example the characteristic impedance of port1 and port2 are 50 ohms and the characteristic impedance of port3 is 100 ohms HSPICE RF User Guide 173 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Scattering Parameter Data Element 174 Example 5 sl nl n2 n3 n ref mname smodel model smodel s tstonefile expl s3p In this example the name of the tstone file expl s3p reveals that the network has three ports Example 6 sl nl n2 n3 n ref mname smodel model smodel s fqmodel sfqmodel tstonefile expl s3p citifilezexpl citiO In this example qmodel tstonefile and citifile are all declared HSPICE uses only the qmode1 ignores tstonefile and citifile and repor
86. occur in 0 1ns HSPICE will not accurately simulate them To capture the behavior of the spikes use OPTION SIM LA FREQ OPTION SIM LA TIME 312 l10GHz 0 1ns HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Linear Acceleration Note Higher frequencies smaller times increase accuracy but only up to the minimum time step used in HSPICE HSPICE RF User Guide 313 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Linear Acceleration 314 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 14 Using HSPICE with HSPICE RF Describes how various analysis features differ in HSPICE RF as compared to standard HSPICE This first section of this chapter describes topics related to transient analysis and the other section describe other differences between HSPICE and HSPICE RF RF Numerical Integration Algorithm Control In HSPICE RF you can select either the Backward Euler or Trapezoidal integration algorithm Each of these algorithms has its own advantages and disadvantages for specific circuit types For pre charging simulation or timing critical simulation the Trapezoidal algorithm usually improves accuracy You use the SIM ORDER option to control the amount of Backward Euler BE to mix with the Trapezoidal TRAP method for hybrid integration For example OPTION SIM ORDER x Setting SIM ORDER to its lowest value selects Backward Euler integration algorithm and setting it to its highest value sel
87. of a ring oscillator set the following options in your HSPICE RF netlist Table 18 HBOSC Analysis Options Option HBTRANINIT time HBTRANPTS lt npts gt HBTRANSTEP lt stepsize gt HBTRANFREQSEARCH 110 Description Tells HB to use transient analysis to initialize all state variables lt time gt is when the circuit has reached or is near steady state Default 0 lt npts gt specifies the number of points per period for converting the time domain data results from transient analysis into the frequency domain lt npts gt must be an integer greater than 0 The units are in nharms nh Default 4 nh This option is relevant only if you set OPTION HBTRANINIT stepsize specifies the step size for the transient analysis The default is 1 4 nh fO where nh is the nharms value and f0 is the oscillation frequency This option is relevant only if you set OPTION HBTRANINIT If HBTRANFREQSEARCH 1 default then HB analysis calculates the oscillation frequency from the transient analysis Otherwise HB analysis assumes that the period is 1 f where fis the frequency specified in the tones description Note You can specify either OPTION HBTRANPTS Or OPTION HBTRANSTEP but not both You must also either specify the initial conditions or add a PWL or PULSE source to start the oscillator for transient analysis This source should provide a HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1
88. or 2 and HERTZ is not used in the equation CONVOLUTION is turned off and the capacitor behaves conventionally The equation can be a function of temperature but it does not support variables of node voltage branch current or time If these variables exist in the expression and CONVOLUTION 1 or 2 then only their values at the operating point are considered in calculation CONVOLUTION Specifies the method used 0 default HERTZ 0 in time domain analysis 1or2 performs Inverse Fast Fourier Transformation IFFT linear convolution FBASE Base frequency to use for transient analysis This value becomes the base frequency point for Inverse Fast Fourier Transformation IFFT when CONVOLUTION 1 or 2 If you do not set this value the base frequency is a reciprocal value of the transient period FMAX Maximum frequency to use for transient analysis Used as the maximum frequency point for Inverse Fourier Transformation If you do not set this value the reciprocal value of RISETIME is taken Example C112 C 1e 6 HERTZ 1e16 CONVOLUTION 1 fbase 10 fmax 30meg HSPICE RF User Guide 157 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Passive Elements Frequency Dependent Inductors You can specify frequency dependent inductors using the L equation with the HERTZ keyword The HERTZ keyword represents the operating frequency In time domain analyses an expression with the HERTZ keyword behaves differently acc
89. order coupling coefficient is the product of the two first order coefficients which is not correct for many geometries Example 1 The Lin and Lout inductors are coupled with a coefficient of 0 9 K1 Lin Lout 0 9 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Example 2 The Lhigh and Llow inductors are coupled with a coefficient equal to the value of the COUPLE parameter Kxfmr Lhigh Llow K COUPLE The K1 mutual inductor couples L1 and L2 The K2 mutual inductor couples L2 and L3 Example 3 The coupling coefficients are 0 98 and 0 87 HSPICE or HSPICE RF automatically calculates the mutual inductance between L1 and L3 with a coefficient of 0 98 0 87 0 853 K1 L1 L2 0 98 K2 L2 L3 0 87 Ideal Transformer Kxxx Li Lj lt k IDEAL IDEAL Ideal transformers use the IDEAL keyword with the K element to designate ideal K transformer coupling This keyword activates the following equation set for non DC values which is presented here with multiple coupled inductors lj is the current into the first terminal of Lj V1 sqrt L1 V2 sqrt L2 V3 sqrt L3 V4A sqrt L4 Il sqrt L1 I2 sqrt L2 I3 sqrt L3 I4 sqrt L4 esie HSPICE can solve any or V in terms of L ratios DC is treated as expected inductors are treated as short circuits Mutual coupling is ignored for DC Inductors that use the INFINITY keyword can be coupled with IDEAL K elements In this situation al
90. power and ground nets or any other nets that do not correspond to the logical netlist If you use FULL CONNECTIVITY and MISSING NETS in the same SPEF file HSPICE RF reports an error NETLIST TYPE VERILOG NETLIST TYPE VHDL87 NETLIST TYPE VHDL93 or NETLIST TYPE EDIF Specifies the type of naming conventions used in the SPEF file If you specify more than one format in one SPEF file HSPICE RF reports an error ROUTING CONFIDENCE positive integer Specifies a default routing confidence value for all nets in the SPEF file ROUTING CONFIDENCE ENTRY positive integer character string Specifies one or more characters that represent additional routing confidence values which you can assign to nets in the SPEF file HSPICE RF User Guide 301 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Table 24 SPEF Parameters Continued Parameter Definition flow type continued divider delimiter bus prefix bus suffix time unit capacitance unit resistance unit inductance unit name index 302 NAME SCOPE LOCALIFLAT Specifies whether paths in the SPEF file are LOCAL relative to the current SPEF file or FLAT relative to the top level of your circuit design SLEW THRESHOLDS low high Specifies low and high default input slew thresholds for your circuit design as a percentage of the voltage level for the input pin PIN CAP NONEIINPUT OUTPUTIINPUT ONLY Specifies the
91. reports represents the location of an inductor RELUCTANCE Reluctance provided in units of inverse Henry H When present this keyword indicates that tokens between Lxxx and it are node names Only terms along and above the diagonal are specified for the reluctance matrix The simulator fills in the lower triangle to ensure symmetry If you specify a lower diagonal term the simulator converts that entry to the appropriate upper diagonal term n general the reluctance matrix is sparse and only non zero values in the matrix need be given Each matrix entry is represented by a triplet r c val Here rand care integers referring to a pair of inductors from the list of terminal nodes If there are 2 N terminal nodes there will be N inductors and the rand c values must be in the range 1 N The va value is a reluctance value for the r c matrix location f you supply multiple entries for the same r c location then only the first one will be used and a warning issued to indicate that some entries were ignored All diagonal entries of the reluctance matrix must be assigned a positive value RELUCTANCE FILE The data files should contain three columns of data Each row should contain an r c val triplet separated by white space The r c and val values may be expressions surrounded by single quotes Multiple files may be specified to allow the reluctance data to be spread over several files if necessary The files shoul
92. represent RC networks The result is a smaller matrix that maintains the original port behavior yet achieves significant savings in memory and computation Thus the SIM LA option is ideal for circuits with large numbers of resistors and capacitors such as clock trees power lines or substrate networks In general the RC elements are separated into their own network The nodes shared by both main circuit elements including PRINT PROBE and MEASURE statements and RC elements are the port nodes of the RC network All other RC nodes are internal nodes The currents flowing into the port nodes are a frequency dependent function of the voltages at those nodes The multiport admittance of a network represents this relationship The SIM LA option formulates matrices to represent multiport admittance Then to eliminate as many internal nodes as possible it reduces the size of these matrices while preserving the admittance otherwise known as port node behavior The amount of reduction depends on the fO upper frequency the threshold frequency where SIM LA preserves the admittance This is shown graphically in Figure 23 Figure 28 Multiport Admittance vs Frequency A admittance fo frequency HSPICE RF User Guide 309 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Linear Acceleration The SIM LA option is very effective for post layout simulation because of the volume of parasitic
93. resistor model see the Passive Device Models chapter in the HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual the resistance value is optional HSPICE RF Examples Some basic examples for HSPICE RF include R1 is a resistor whose resistance follows the voltage at node c R11 0 v c R2 is a resistor whose resistance is the sum of the absolute values of nodes c and d R2 10 abs v c abs v d R3 is a resistor whose resistance is the sum of the rconst parameter and 100 times tx1 for a total of 1100 ohms HSPICE RF User Guide 81 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements 82 PARAM rconst 100 tx1 10 R3 4 5 rconst tx1 100 Linear Resistors Rxxx nodel node2 lt modelname gt lt R gt value lt TCl val gt lt TC2 val gt lt W val gt lt L val gt lt M val gt lt C val gt lt DTEMP val gt lt SCALE val gt Parameter Description Rxxx Name of a resistor node1 and node2 Names or numbers of the connecting nodes modelname Name of the resistor model value Nominal resistance value in ohms R Resistance in ohms at room temperature TC1 TC2 Temperature coefficient W Resistor width L Resistor length M Parallel multiplier C Parasitic capacitance between node2 and the substrate DTEMP Temperature difference between element and circuit SCALE Scaling factor Example R112 10 0 Rload 1 GND RVAL param rx 100 R3 2 3 RX TC1 0 001 TC2 0 RP X1
94. sample When referencing the parameter on an instance the effect of a local variation is created When referencing the parameter on an expression for a second parameter and using the second parameter on an instance then the effect of a global variation is created HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Simulating the Effects of Global and Local Variations with Monte Carlo Variations Specified in the Context of Subcircuits The concept explained in the previous section applies also to subcircuits as instances and instances within subcircuits Here we again use the example of a physical resistor with variation of its width test4 sp uses a subcircuit for each resistor instead of the top level resistors in test3 sp On each subcircuit a parameter width is assigned a value by an expression which is the same for all of them This value is then passed into the subcircuit and the resistor width gets this value Because the expression is the same for all subcircuits the value of parameter width will be the same for all subcircuits thus it expresses a global variation Therefore all resistors have the same width and the terminal voltages are the same In test5 sp if a different width is used for the subcircuits then the expressions are treated separately get local variation assigned and different values are passed into the subcircuit In test5 sp the differences inside of the exp
95. samples This setup is useful for studying global variations test11 sp has option modmonte 1 added Now every resistor has a different value Note that option modmonte has no effect on any other approach presented here In summary assigning parameters with specified distributions to model parameters allows for investigating the effects of global or local variations but not both The possibility of selecting one or the other with a simple option is misleading in the sense that the underlying definitions for global and local variations are not the same for a realistic semiconductor technology HSPICE RF User Guide 361 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Simulating the Effects of Global and Local Variations with Monte Carlo 362 Variations Specified Using DEV and LOT The two limitations of the approach described in section Variations Specified on Model Parameters are resolved in this method by specifying global and local variations directly on a model parameter with the syntax parameterName parameterValue LOT distribution LotDist DEV distribution DevDist Where LOT keyword for global distribution DEV keyword for local distribution distribution is as explained in section Variations Specified on Geometrical Instance Parameters LotDist DevDist characteristic number for the distribution 3 sigma value for Gaussian distributions test12 sp has large global and small local variation sim
96. sb1 nodel node2 clr subckt elements R1 nodel node2 1K C1 clr nodel 1U ends gubcircuit instance X1 11120 sb1 PRINT X X1 nodel X X1 clr I X1 R1 To find the current flowing into node 11 of the x1 subcircuit instance this example uses the x variable HSPICE RF maps node 11 to the node1 external node as shown in the first part of the PRINT statement 372 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Generating Measurement Output Files The latter half of the PRINT statement illustrates that you can combine the X variable with I variables Example 2 In this example the x variable finds the current through the in node of the S1 subcircuit subckt S1 in out R1 in inp 1K C1 inp 0 lu R2 in out 1K PROBE X in ends Generating Measurement Output Files You can make all of the same measurements with the MEASURE statement in HSPICE RF as you can in HSPICE The results of the MEASURE statements appear in a file with one of the following filename extensions mti for measurements in transient analysis ms for measurements in DC analysis matt for measurements in AC analysis mb t for measurements in HB analysis mp for measurements in HBNOISE analysis For more information about MEASURE statements see the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Optimization Like HSPICE HSPICE RF employs an incremental optimization technique This techni
97. simulation Model reference temperature you can model different models at different temperatures Each model has a TREF temperature reference parameter Element junction temperature each resistor transistor or other element generates heat so an element is hotter than the ambient temperature Parttemperature at the system level each part has its own temperature System temperature a collection of parts form a system which has a local temperature Ambient temperature the ambient temperature is the air temperature of the system HSPICE RF User Guide 327 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Simulating Circuit and Model Temperatures 328 Figure 26 Part Junction Temperature Sets System Performance _ gt Ambient Temperature System Temperature Part Temperature source drain source drain gate gate F E Model Junction Temperature Part Junction Temperature HSPICE RF calculates temperatures as differences from the ambient temperature Tambient Asystem Apart Ajunction Tjunction Ids f Tjunction Tmodel Every element includes a DTEMP keyword which defines the difference between junction and ambient temperature Example The following example uses DTEMP in a MOSFET element statement M1 drain gate source bulk Model name W 10u L 1u DTEMP 20 Temperature Analysis You can specify three temperatures HSPICE
98. static values for a variety of quantities resistance source voltage rise time and so on You can also use them in sweep or statistical analysis For descriptions of individual HSPICE and HSPICE RF commands referenced in this chapter see Chapter 2 Netlist Commands and Chapter 3 RF Netlist Commands in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Using Parameters in Simulation PARAM Defining Parameters Parameters in HSPICE are names that you associate with numeric values See Assigning Parameters on page 135 You can use any of the methods described in Table 9 to define parameters HSPICE RF User Guide 133 Y 2006 03 SP1 Table 9 PARAM Statement Syntax Parameter Simple assignment Description PARAM lt SimpleParam gt 1e 12 Algebraic definition PARAM lt AlgebraicParam gt SimpleParam 8 2 SimpleParam excludes the output variable You can also use algebraic parameters in PRINT and PROBE statements For example PRINT AlgebraicParam par algebraic expression You can use the same syntax for PROBE statements See Using Algebraic Expressions on page 138 User defined function PARAM MyFunc x y gt Sqrt x x y y Character string definition PARAM lt paramname gt str string Subcircuit default SUBCKT lt SubName gt lt ParamDefName gt lt Value gt str string MACRO lt SubName gt lt ParamDefName gt lt Value gt str string
99. subcircuit node path specifies the subcircuit path and the subcircuit node name definition The node must be either an external node in a subcircuit definition or a global node X returns the total current flowing into a subcircuit branch including all lower subcircuit hierarchies XO returns only current flowing into a subcircuit branch minus any current flowing into lower subcircuit hierarchies Figure 45 on page 372 illustrates the difference between the X and XO variables The dotted line boxes represent subcircuits and the black circles are the external nodes The X X1 vc1 path returns the current of the X1subcircuit HSPICE RF User Guide 371 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Probing Subcircuit Currents through the vc1 node including the current to the X1 X1 and X1 X2 subcircuits as represented by the white black outlined arrows In contrast XO X1 vc2 returns only the current flowing through vc2 to the top level of the X1 subcircuit as shown by the black arrows Figure 45 Probing Subcircuit Currents VDD1 X X1 vc1 1 i X0 X1 vc2 X X2 vd2 ved vc2 T77 Vi vd2 77 X1 gt X2 Wa X1 X1 X1 X2 Example 1 In this example the first five lines constitute the definition of the sb1 subcircuit with external nodes named node1 node2 and clr The line beginning with X1 is an instance of sb1 with nodes named 11 references node1 12 references node2 O references clr Subckt
100. syntax and description of this control option see OPTION SIM TRAP in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference OPTION PURETP You use the PURETP option to turn off insertion of Backward Euler BE steps due to auto detection of numerical oscillations For the syntax and description of this control option see OPTION PURETP in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference OPTION SIM OSC DETECT TOL You use the SIM OSC DETECT TOL option to specify the tolerance for detecting numerical oscillations If HSPICE RF detects numerical oscillations it inserts Backward Euler BE steps Smaller values of this tolerance result in fewer BE steps For the syntax and description of this control option see OPTION SIM OSC DETECT TOL in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference RF Transient Analysis Output File Formats 318 The default output format for transient analysis in HSPICE RF is the same as in HSPICE the trO file format See Transient Analysis in the HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE RF supports these output formats which are described in this section Tabulated Data Output WDB Output Format XP Output Format NW Output Format m VCD Output Format turboWave Output Format tw HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP 1 Chapter 14 Using HSPICE with HSPICE RF RF Transient Analysis Output File Formats Undertow Output Format ut CSDF Output Format If your netlist includes an unsupport
101. t Tko Nt Ten HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines Preconditioning S Parameters Certain S parameters such as series inductor 2 port show a singularity when converting S to Y parameters To avoid this singularity the S element preconditions S matrices by adding kR e series resistance S kl 2 K S 2 k I ks R e is the reference impedance vector kis the preconditioning factor To compensate for this modification the S element adds a negative resistor kR e to the modified nodal analysis NMA matrix in actual circuit compensation To specify this preconditioning factor use the lt PREFAC val gt keyword in the S model statement The default preconditioning factor is 0 75 Figure 13 Preconditioning S Parameters preconditioning S gt kRref S TT NMA stamp kRref y w o T Y HSPICE RF User Guide 131 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines 132 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 6 Parameters and Functions Describes how to use parameters within HSPICE RF netlists Parameters are similar to the variables used in most programming languages Parameters hold a value that you assign when you create your circuit design or that the simulation calculates based on circuit solution values Parameters can store
102. the in and out nodes Pl in gnd port 1 z0 50 P2 out gnd port 2 z0 50 Computing scattering parameters requires zo reference impedance values The order of the port parameters in the P element determines the order of the S Y and Z parameters Unlike the NET command the LIN command does not require you to insert additional sources into the circuit To calculate the requested transfer parameters HSPICE automatically inserts these sources as needed at the port terminals You can define an unlimited number of ports HSPICE RF User Guide 179 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Steady State Voltage and Current Sources Using the Port Element for Mixed Mode Measurement You can use a port element with three terminals as the port element for measuring the mixed mode S parameters Except for the number of external terminals the syntax of the port element remains the same The LIN analysis function internally sets the necessary drive mode common differential of these mixed mode port elements For analyses other than the LIN analysis such as DC AC TRAN and so on the mixed mode P element acts as a differential driver that drives positive nodes with half of their specified voltage and the negative nodes with a negated half of the specified voltage Figure 17 on page 180 shows the block diagram of the mixed mode port element Figure 17 Mixed Mode Port Element P1 Port element
103. the DDL library devices are based on HSPICE circuit level models simulation automatically compensates for the effects of supply voltage loading and temperature HSPICE or HSPICE RF accesses DDL models in several ways HSPICE RF User Guide 75 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Using Subcircuits 76 The installation script creates an hspice ini initialization file HSPICE or HSPICE RF writes the search path for the DDL and vendor libraries into a OPTION SEARCH lib path statement This provides immediate access to all libraries for all users It also automatically includes the models in the input netlist If the input netlist references a model or subcircuit HSPICE or HSPICE RF searches the directory to which the DDLPATH environment variable points for a file with the same name as the reference name This file is an include file so its filename suffix is inc HSPICE installation sets the DDLPATH variable in the meta cfg configuration file Set OPTION SEARCH lib path in the input netlist Use this method to list the personal libraries to search HSPICE first searches the default libraries referenced in the hspice ini file then searches libraries in the order listed in the input file Directly include a specific model using the INCLUDE statement For example to use a model named T2N221 1 store the model in a file named T2N2211 inc and put the following statement in the input file INCLU
104. the S model statement The default pre conditioning factor is 0 75 Figure 16 Pre Conditioning S Parameters gt Preconditioning rg kRref Y i g lt NMA stamp Port Element 176 The port element identifies the ports used in LIN analysis Each port element requires a unique port number If your design uses N port elements your netlist must contain the sequential set of port numbers 1 through N For example in a design containing 512 ports you must number each port sequentially 1 to 512 Each port has an associated system impedance zo If you do not explicitly specify the system impedance the default is 50 ohms The port element behaves as either a noiseless impedance or a voltage source in series with the port impedance for all other analyses DC AC or TRAN You can use this element as a pure terminating resistance or as a voltage or power source You can use the RDC RAC RHB RHBAC and RTRAN values to override the port impedance value for a particular analysis HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Port Element Port Element Syntax Pxxx p n port portnumber Voltage or Power Information DC mag AC mag lt phase gt gt gt HBAC mag lt phase gt gt gt HB mag phase harm tone modharm lt modtone
105. the netlist The arg1 parameter can be an expression of HERTZ and bias When argi 2 the function will return v2 Power Supply Current and Voltage Noise Sources You can implement the power supply noise source with G and E elements The G element for the current noise source and the E element for the voltage noise source As noise elements they are two terminal elements that represent a noise source connected between two specified nodes Syntax Expression form Gxxx nodel node2 noise expression Exxx nodel node2 noise expression The G noise element represents a noise current source and the E noise element represents a noise voltage source The xxx parameter can be set with a value up to 1024 characters The node1 and node2 are the positive and negative nodes that connect to the noise source The noise expression can contain the bias frequency or other parameters HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Function Approximations for Distributed Devices Data form Gxxx nodel node2 noise data dataname Exxx nodel node2 noise data dataname data dataname pnamel pname2 freql noisel freq2 noise2 d xw enddata The data form defines a basic frequency noise table The DATA statement contains two parameters frequency and noise to specify the noise value at each frequency point The unit for frequency is hertz and the unit for noise is A Hz for G current noise source or V
106. the three primary methods for configuring libraries to achieve required parameter checking for default MOS transistor widths Table 13 Methods for Configuring Libraries Parameter Method Location Pros Cons Local On a SUBCKT Protects library from global definition line circuit parameter definitions unless you override it Single location for default values Global At the global level Works with all HSPICE An indiscreet user another and on SUBCKT versions vendor assignment or the definition lines intervening hierarchy can change the library Cannot override a global value at a lower level Special OPTION DEFW Simple to do Third party libraries or other statement sections of the design might depend on OPTION DEFW HSPICE RF User Guide 146 Y 2006 03 SP1 String Parameter HSPICE Only HSPICE uses a special delimiter to identify string and double parameter types The single quotes double quotes or curly brackets do not work for these kinds of delimiters Instead use the sp1 str string keyword for an sp1 parameter definition and use the str sp1 keyword for a string parameter instance Example The following sample netlist shows an example of how you can use these definitions for various commands keywords parameters and elements xibisl vccq vss out in IBIS IBIS FILE str filel ibs IBIS MODEL str modell xibis2 vccq vss out in IBIS IBIS FILE str file2 ibs IBIS MODEL st
107. to include another netlist as a subcircuit in the current netlist Node Naming Conventions Nodes are the points of connection between elements in the input netlist You can use either names or numbers to designate nodes Node numbers can be from 1 to 999999999999999 node number 0 is always ground HSPICE or HSPICE RF ignores letters that follow numbers in node names When the node name begins with a letter or a valid special character the node name can contain a maximum of 1024 characters In addition to letters and digits node names can include the following characters t T Au ly Lp Sey 4 Node names that begin with one or more numerical digits cannot contain brackets for example 123 r55 Whereas node names that begin with alphabetic character may contain brackets for example n123 r55 If you use braces in node names HSPICE or HSPICE RF changes them to brackets You cannot use the following characters in node names lt blank gt You should avoid using the dollar sign after a numerical digit in a node name because HSPICE assumes whatever follows the symbol is an in line comment see Comments and Line Continuation on page 54 for additional HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition information It can cause error and warning messages depending on where the node containing the is located For example HSPICE
108. to the output The noise_equation expression can involve node voltages and currents through voltage sources For the PAC phasenoise simulation to evaluate the frequency dependent noise the frequency dependent noise factor in the phasenoise must be expressed in between the parentheses For example gname nodel node2 noise frequency dependent noise bias dependent noise This is only true when the total noise can be expressed in this form and when the frequency dependent noise can be evaluated in the PAC phasenoise HSPICE RF User Guide 187 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Noise Sources 188 simulation You can also input the behavioral noise source as a noise table with the help of predefined Table function The Table function takes two formats Noise table can be input directly through the Table function For example gname nodel node2 noise Table argl f1 v1 f2 v2 u The ff v1 f2 v2 parameters describe the noise table When arg1 f1 the function returns v1 The arg1 can be an expression of either HERTZ bias or both For example argi HERTZ 1 0E 3 The noise table can be input through a DATA structure DATA dl Xx Y f1 v1 f2 v2 ENDDATA gname nodel node2 noise TABLE argl d1 The x y parameters in the DATA structure are two placeholder strings that can be set to whatever you prefer even if they are in conflict with other parameters in
109. use for each tone The HB command can specify base tones so that the circuit solution is represented as a multi dimensional Fourier series The number of terms in the series are determined by the number of harmonics more harmonics result in higher accuracy but also longer simulation times and higher memory usage One or more signal sources for driving the circuit in HB analysis if the circuit is driven In the case of autonomous oscillator analysis no signal source is required Signal sources are specified using the HB keyword on the voltage HSPICE RF User Guide 19 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 2 Power Amplifier or current source syntax Power sources are specified by setting the power switch on voltage current sources to 1 in this case the source value is treated as a power value in Watts instead of a voltage or current Optionally the netlist can also contain a set of control option for optimizing HB analysis performance The following example shows how to set up a Harmonic Balance analysis on an NMOS Class C Power Amplifier The example compares transient analysis results to Harmonic Balance results The following netlist performs both a transient and a Harmonic Balance analysis of the amplifier driven by a sinusoidal input waveform The accurate option is set to ensure sufficient number of time points for comparison with HB This example is included with the HSPICE RF distribution as pa sp and is a
110. variables and subcircuits in HSPICE This section does not apply to HSPICE HF HSPICE RF User Guide 67 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition 68 If the name of a new element MODEL statement or subcircuit definition is identical to the name of an original statement of the same type then the new statement replaces the old Add new statements in the input netlist file You can alter element and MODEL statements within a subcircuit definition You can also add a new element or MODEL statement to a subcircuit definition To modify the topology in subcircuit definitions put the element into libraries To add a library use LIB to delete use DEL LIB If a parameter name in a new PARAM statement in the ALTER module is identical to a previous parameter name then the new assigned value replaces the old value If you used parameter variable values for elements or model parameter values when you used ALTER use the PARAM statement to change these parameter values Do not use numerical values to redescribe elements or model parameters If you used an OPTION statement in an original input file or a AL TER block to turn on an option you can turn that option off Each ALTER simulation run prints only the actual altered input A special ALTER title identifies the run ALTER processing cannot revise LIB statements within a file that an INCLUDE statement call
111. variation rel variation sigma multiplier other analyses AUNIF and AGAUSS vary the nominal val by abs variation UNIF and GAUSS vary the nominal val by nominal val rel variation Specifies abs variation or rel variation at the sigma level For example if sigma 3 then the standard deviation is abs variation divided by 3 If you do not specify a multiplier the default is 1 HSPICE RF recalculates many times and saves the largest deviation The resulting parameter value might be greater than or less than nominal val The resulting distribution is bimodal Example 1 In this example each R has an unique variation param mc var agauss 0 1 3 20 swing param val 1000 1 mc_var v vin vin 0 dc 1 ac 1 r vin 0 1000 1 mc var r2 vin 0 1000 1 mc var HSPICE RF User Guide 339 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis Example 2 In this example each R has an identical variation param mc var agauss 0 1 3 20 swing param val 1l mc_var v vin vin 0 dc 1 ac 1 rl vin 0 1000 val r2 vin 0 1000 val Example 3 In this example local variations to an instance parameter are applied by assigning randomly generated variations directly to each instance parameter Each resistor r1 through r3 receives randomly different resistance values during each Monte Carlo run param r local agauss rl 12 r r local r2 3 4 r r local r3 5
112. vdd 0 3 3 OPTION POST END SIM DSPF With SIM LA Option The SIM DSPF option accelerates the simulation by more than 100 By using the SIM LA option at the same time you can further reduce the total CPU time models MODEL p pmos MODEL n nmos INCLUDE add4 dspf OPTION SIM DSPF add4 dspf OPTION SIM LA PACT VEC dspf adder vec TRAN 1n 5u vdd vdd 0 3 3 OPTION POST END HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation To expand only active nodes such as those that move include the SIM DSPF ACTIVE option in your netlist For example OPTION SIM DSPF ACTIVE active net filename This option is most effective when used with a large design for example over 5K transistors Smaller designs lose some of the performance gain due to internal overhead processing For syntax and description of SIM DSPF LA option see OPTION SIM DSPF LA in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference When you have included the appropriate control option run HSPICE RF using the ideal netlist The structure of a DSPF file is DSPF 1 0 DESIGN demo Date October 6 1998 SUBCKT name pins Net Section C1 R1 Instance Section ENDS HSPICE RF User Guide 287 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation 288 Selective Post Layout Flow Figure 21 Selective Post Layout Flow Extraction Tool
113. z RGA 1 1150 Pos ce ree 110 0 2 ge A PR oa pan A z 105 0 gt x Lo ga wh amp A R A a AB A M A o3 x nz c 100 0 z a eo 0905 ee A Ae 7 03 z A n A 5 850 Za wA A o Aa E E T ISP E amp ALS A z d 900 m b Veiis gt V Li Li Li I l LI Li I l L 1 LI I 1 A 1 l LI LI LI d MONT1 SV 118 375 a S a A RGAUSS 1 d BOUE A WT E a AA A i 1100 gj x Ri E A z 100 0 zd p z A F T A z 900 amp page SS uo ue og c IR NN d A PT ge ie ZA 4 AEG A A na zi 809998 i 1 15 P ana or or dor or oar or d oar a na l AX 0r ar or 4 2 1 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 MONTE CARLO LIN 342 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis Figure 33 Limit Functions May 15 2003 11 41 23 120 0 115 0 110 0 105 0 100 0 VOLT LIN RES OO AAR AA ANNA An And AO A o AA 80 0 Az 1 A huk A A 1 o1 AAT Aa bk l AASA IR ATA 20 0 30 0 40 0 MONTE CARLO LIN MONT1 SP TEST OF MONTE CARLO GAUSSIAN UNIFORM AND LIMIT FUNCTIONS A AA A A E ES T N EUN ee 50 0 60 0 MONT1 SVO LIMIT Major and Minor Distribution In MOS IC processes manufacturing tolerance parameters have both a major and a minor statistical distribution The major distribution is the wafer to wafer and run to run variation It determines electrical yield The minor di
114. 006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Multitone Harmonic Balance AC Analysis HBAC Output Syntax This section describes the syntax for the HBAC PRINT and PROBE statements These statements are similar to those used for HB analysis PRINT and PROBE Statements PRINT HB TYPE NODES ELEM INDICES PROBE HB TYPE NODES ELEM INDICES Parameter Description TYPE Specifies a harmonic type node or element TYPE can be one of the following Voltage type V voltage magnitude and phase in degrees VR real component VI imaginary component VM magnitude VP Phase in degrees VPD Phase in degrees VPR Phase in radians VDB dB units VDBM dB relative to 1 mV Current type current magnitude and phase in degrees IR real component I imaginary component IM magnitude IP Phase in degrees IPD Phase in degrees IPR Phase in radians IDB dB units IDBM dB relative to 1 mV Power type P Frequency type hertz index hertz index1 index2 You must specify the harmonic index for the hertz variable The frequency of the specified harmonics is dumped HSPICE RF User Guide 255 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Multitone Harmonic Balance AC Analysis HBAC 256 Parameter Description NODES ELEM INDICES NODES or ELEM can be one of the following Voltage type a single node name n1 or a pai
115. 00u 800u param Rs opt1 10 8 20 e Optimization analysis statement HB tones 2 25g 2 5g nharms 6 3 sweep Pin dbm 30 0 2 Sweep optimize optl results gain measure result to tune the parameters model optmod1 e Selecting an optimization model model optmod1 opt level 1 Bisection method itropt 40 relin 1e 4 relout 1e 6 accuracy settings e Measurement statements to tune the optimization parameters measure HB vif find vdb if 1 1 at 10e 6 measure HB vrf find vdb rf 0 1 at 10e 6 measure HB gain param vif vrf goal 2 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Optimization e Measurement statement to find the fundamental frequency from HB analysis measure HB frequency max FIND HERTZ 1 at 0 Optimizing AC DC and TRAN Analyses The HSPICE syntax is followed for optimizing AC DC and TRAN analyses The required statements are Optimization PARAM statement PARAM ParamName OPTxxx Init LoLim HiLim Optimizing TRAN statement TRAN tincrl tstopl tincr2 tstop2 tincrN tstopN gt SWEEP OPTIMIZE OPTxxx RESTULTS measname MODEL optmod Optimizing MODEL statement MODEL mname OPT LEVEL 0 1 Where e 0 specifies the Modified Levenberg Marquardt method You would use this setting with multiple optimization parameters and goals e 1 specifies the Bisection method You would use this setting with one optimization parameter
116. 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements 90 Example C112 C le 6 HERTZ 1el16 CONVOLUTION 1 fbase 10 fmax 30meg Behavioral Capacitors in HSPICE or HSPICE RF Cxxx n n2 C equation CTYPE 0 or 1 Parameter Description CTYPE Determines the calculation mode for elements that use capacitance equations Set this parameter carefully to ensure correct simulation results HSPICE RF extends the definition and values of CTYPE relative to HSPICE CTYPE O if C depends only on its own terminal voltages that is a function of V n1 n2 CTYPE 1 if C depends only on outside voltages or currents CTYPE 2 if C depends on both its own terminal and outside voltages This is the default for HSPICE RF HSPICE does not support CTYPE 2 You can specify the capacitor value as a function of any node voltage or branch current and any independent variables such as time hertz and temper Example C110 C 1e 9 V 10 CTYPE 1 V10 10 0 PWL O 1v t1 1v t2 4v DC Block Capacitors Cxxx nodel node2 lt C gt INFINITY IC val When the capacitance of a capacitor is infinity this element is called a DC block In HSPICE you specify an INFINITY value for such capacitors HPSICE does not support any other capacitor parameters for DC block elements because HSPICE assumes that an infinite capacitor value is independent of any scaling factors The DC block acts as an open circuit for all DC analyses HSPI
117. 06 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis This power value represents the power incident upon and delivered to the port element s load impedance Zo due to other power sources in the circuit and due to reflections of its own generated power If the port element is used as a load resistor no internal source the preceding equation reduces to that for the simple resistor If you used the port element as a power source with non zero available power i e a non zero Vg and it is terminated in a matched load Zo the port power measurement returns O W because no power is reflected You can request power measurements in the form of complete spectra or in the form of scalar quantities that represent power at a particular element To request a complete power spectrum use the following syntax PRINT HB P Elem PROBE HB P Elem To request a power value at a particular frequency tone use the following syntax PRINT HB P Elem nl lt n2 lt n3 lt gt gt gt PROBE HB P Elem nl lt n2 lt n3 lt gt gt gt The Elem is the name of either a Resistor R or Port P element and n1 n2 and n3 are integer indices used for selecting a particular frequency in the Harmonic Balance output spectrum Example 1 This example prints a table of the RMS power spectrum dissipated by resistor R1 PRINT HB P R1 Example 2 This example outputs the RMS power dissipated by resisto
118. 1 About This Manual Other Related Publications Note To use this feature the HSPICE documentation files the Index directory and the index pdx file must reside in the same directory This is the default installation for Synopsys documentation Also Adobe Acrobat must be invoked as a standalone application rather than as a plug in to your web browser Other Related Publications xvi For additional information about HSPICE see The HSPICE release notes available on SolvNet see Known Limitations and Resolved STARs below Documentation on the Web which provides PDF documents and is available through SolvNet at http solvnet synopsys com DocsOnWeb The Synopsys MediaDocs Shop from which you can order printed copies of Synopsys documents at http mediadocs synopsys com You might also want to refer to the documentation for the following related Synopsys products CosmosScope Aurora Raphael VCS Known Limitations and Resolved STARs You can find information about known problems and limitations and resolved Synopsys Technical Action Requests STARs in the HSPICE Release Notes in SolvNet To see the HSPICE Release Notes 1 Go to https solvnet synopsys com ReleaseNotes If prompted enter your user name and password If you do not have a Synopsys user name and password follow the instructions to register with SolvNet Click HSPICE then click the release you want in the list that appears at the bottom
119. 130 Frequency Table Model The frequency table model SP model is a generic model that you can use to describe frequency varying behavior Currently the S element and LIN command use this model For a description of this model see Small Signal Parameter Data Frequency Table Model in the HSPICE Signal Integrity User Guide Group Delay Handler in Time Domain Analysis The S element accepts a constant group delay matrix in time domain analysis You can also express a weak dependence of the delay matrix on the frequency as a combination of the constant delay matrix and the phase shift value at each frequency point To activate or deactivate this delay handler specify the DELAYHANDLE keyword in the S model statement The delay matrix is a constant matrix which HSPICE RF extracts using finite difference calculation at selected target frequency points HSPICE RF obtains the oi j delay matrix component as NS E MT oi j do 2n df fis the target frequency which you can set using DELAYFREQ val The default target frequency is the maximum frequency point dosi cp 99s 9sij is the phase of Sij After time domain analysis obtains the group delay matrix the following equation eliminates the delay amount from the frequency domain system transfer function JOT an Y mn o 7 Ymn o The convolution process then uses the following equation to calculate the delay l T ket kd ty Y kocty 7 Y NA Cra Tx 4 2
120. 138 continuation of line netlist 55 cos x function 139 cosh x function 139 Cosmos Scope 12 coupled inductor element 162 D DATA statement 64 data driven analysis 64 data driven analysis 326 327 db x function 140 DC block elements 159 DC statement 329 DDL 75 76 DDLPATH environment variable 76 decibel function 140 DEFW option 146 DEL LIB statement 50 in ALTER blocks 66 68 with ALTER 69 with LIB 69 390 with multiple ALTER statements 67 69 DELVTO model parameter 331 Detailed Standard Parasitic Format See DSPF deviation average 327 device model cards 41 diodes junction 106 models 105 polysilicon capacitor length 106 DSPF file structure 287 DSPF expansion 293 DTEMP parameter 328 329 E edge condition 379 element active BJTs 107 diodes 105 JFETs 109 MESFETs 109 MOSFETs 111 C capacitor 88 154 identifiers 47 L inductor 99 markers mutual inductors 95 names 61 parameters See element parameters 79 passive 151 capacitors 85 inductor 92 mutual inductor 95 resistors 79 R resistor 82 151 statements 55 75 temperature 329 templates function 141 transmission line 115 119 123 element parameters ALTER blocks 66 68 BJTs 107 108 capacitors 85 86 DTEMP 328 inductors 92 94 JFETs and MESFETs 109 110 linear inductors 92 162 164 MOSFETS 111 113 mutual inductors Kxxx 95 resistors 80 81 transmission lines T Element 120 U Element 123 W Element 115 116 elements coupled indu
121. 150 scope 143 144 150 simple 136 subcircuit 72 user defined 136 PARHIER option 147 passive element 151 path names 62 periodic AC algorithm 237 phase noise 233 PHASENOISE algorithms 237 PHOTO model parameter 344 PI linear acceleration algorithm 311 port element voltage matchload configuration option configuration options port element voltage matchload 367 pow x y function 139 power function 139 power amplifier 19 POWER statement 383 POWERDC statement 381 power line inductors 101 PRINT ENV command 281 printhl file 271 printls file 251 printss file 251 PROBE command 281 Probing Subcircuit currents 371 pwr x y function 139 Q quality assurance 326 R R Element resistor 82 151 rcells reusing 144 rcxt divider configuration option configuration options rcxt divider 367 reference temperature 64 329 reluctors 102 resistor 151 element 80 frequency dependent 153 395 Index length parameter 81 linear 82 model name 80 node to bulk capacitance 81 width parameter 81 restricting output 369 results 40 reusing simulation output 321 381 383 rise time example 379 verify 379 RSH model parameter 331 S S parameter extraction large signal 247 power dependent 247 small signal 247 saturable core elements 95 96 models 94 96 scale factors 48 SCALE parameter 80 schematic netlists 51 scope of parameters 144 SEARCH option 77 SETUP time verification 380 sgn x function 140 sign function 1
122. 2 p1 p2 balanced mixed mode P element available dd cd dc cc default dd case 3 p1 balanced p2 single ended available ds cs default ds case 4 p1 single p2 balanced available sd sc default sd Example 1 Single tone analysis with frequency translation In this example the 2 port S parameters from RF 1G del_f to IF del_f are extracted The LO signal is specified by normal voltage source Vlo The frequency on port 1 is in the RF band 1G del f and the frequency on port 2 is in the IF band del f The IF band is swept from 0 to 100 MHz The results are output to file ex1 s2p pl RFin gnd port 1 HBLIN 1 1 p2 IFout gnd port 2 HBLIN 0 1 Vlo LOin gnd DC 0 HB 2 5 0 11 HB tones 1G harms 5 HBLIN lin 5 0 100meg noisecalc no filename ex1 dataformat ma Example 2 Another single tone analysis with frequency translation example In this example the 3 port S parameters are extracted Port 3 provides the periodic large signal The frequency on port 1 is del f the frequency on port 2 is 1G 2 del f and the frequency on port 3 is 1G 1 del_f The small signal HSPICE RF User Guide 269 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Frequency Translation S Parameter HBLIN Extraction 270 frequency is swept from 0 to 100MHz HBNOISE calculation is required The results are output to file ex2 s3p pl 1 0 port 1 HBLIN 0 1 p2 2 0 port 2 HBLIN 2 1 p3 3 0 port 3 hb 0 5 0 1 1
123. 2 780 N3 OUT e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 386 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Y 2006 03 SP1 POWER Analysis Signal Port Current Definition_ Dep Dep Name Name Parent Up Dn Max A Min A Avg A RMS A 73 XINV XI1 XRI INVERTER 21 4 1 1 667 1 524 1 946 2 825 N4 OUT e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 88 XINV XI2 DUT STAGE 10 18 3 2 1 697 1 424 5 399 2 840 e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 95 XINV XI2 XRI INVERTER 91 4 1 1 702 1 526 1 915 2 807 N1 OUT e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 110 XINV XI2 XRI INVERTER 92 4 1 1 724 1 459 2 989 2 844 N2 OUT e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 125 XINV XI2 XRI INVERTER 93 4 1 1 677 1 514 1 321 2 823 N3 OUT e 03 e 03 e 09 e 05 140 XINV X12 XRI INVERTER 88 4 1 1 697 1 424 5 399 2 840 N4 OUT e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 155 XINV XI3 DUT STAGE 10 19 3 2 1 738 1 442 3 126 2 842 e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 162 XINV XI3 XRI INVERTER 158 4 1 1 700 1 514 2 076 2 824 N1 OUT e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 177 XINV XI3 XRI INVERTER 159 4 1 1 651 1 433 1 307 2 872 N2 OUT e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 192 XINV XI3 XRI INVERTER 160 4 1 1 842 1 498 1 608 2 845 N3 OUT e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 207 XINV XI3 XRI INVERTER 155 4 1 1 738 1 442 3 126 2 842 N4 OUT e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 222 XINV XI4 0UT STAGE 10 14 3 2 1 580 1 615 1 155 1 569 e 09 e 09 e 14 e 11 229 XINV XI4 XRI INVERTER 225 4 1 1 686 1 457 4 245 2 845 N1 OUT e 03 e 03 e 09 e 05 244 XINV XI4 XRI INVERTER 226 4 1 1 700 1 521 3 056 2 827 N2 OUT e 03
124. 4 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 3 4 5 5 6 7 7 8 9 15 16 17 18 0006 0792 3346 992 80116 0 0 0 80116 0 0 19 0 00125452 2 0 0789158 20 0 00336991 21 0 00668512 23 0 00294932 25 0 00259882 26 0 00184653 3 0 0789158 4 0 0796826 5 0 0796826 6 0 0789991 7 0 0789991 8 0 0793992 9 0 0789158 NL 1039 X 0 00871972 NL 1040 A 0 344453 NL 2039 A 0 343427 1 NE 794 13 66 1953 1 NE 794 2 0 311289 11 13 14 15 15 17 19 2 Ei 222422424 amp i El Ed Ed Bd NE 794 NE 794 794 794 794 794 794 794 12 0 311289 14 0 353289 19 0 365644 16 0 227289 20 0 239644 18 0 14 21 0 0511746 9 65 9153 20 NE 794 23 1 15117 21 NL 1039 X 3 01917 25 NE 794 26 0 166349 26 NL 1040 A 0 651175 3 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 10 65 9153 4 0 311289 17 66 5437 18 66 5437 6 0 311289 11 65 98853 12 65 9853 8 0 311289 16 66 3213 10 0 311289 NL 1039 X NE 794 25 1 00317 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Linear Acceleration 2904 NL 2039 A NE 794 23 0 171175 END Linear Acceleration Linear acceleration by using the SIM LA option accelerates the simulation of circuits that include large linear RC networks To achieve this acceleration HSPICE RF reduces all matrices that
125. 40 signed power function 139 silicon on sapphire devices 63 SIM ACCURACY option 316 SIM ACTIVE option 286 289 290 291 SIM ANALOG option 101 SIM DELTAI option 323 SIM DELTAV option 322 SIM DSPF option 286 315 316 322 SIM DSPF ACTIVE option 286 289 SIM DSPF INSERROR option 291 SIM DSPF LUMPCAPS option 291 SIM DSPF MAX ITER option 290 SIM DSPF RAIL option 290 SIM DSPF SCALEC option 290 SIM DSPF SCALER option 290 396 SIM DSPF VTOL option 289 SIM LA option 286 287 309 311 SIM LA FREQ option 311 SIM LA MAXR option 312 SIM LA MINC option 312 SIM LA MINMODE option 312 SIM LA TIME option 312 SIM LA TOL option 312 SIM ORDER option 315 SIM POSTAT option 370 SIM POSTDOWN option 371 SIM POSTSCOPE option 371 SIM POSTSKIP option 370 SIM POWER ANALYSIS option 384 SIM POWER TOP option 384 SIM POWERDC ACCURACY option 382 SIM POWERED HSPICE option 382 SIM POWERPOST option 384 SIM POWERSTART option 384 SIM RAIL option 101 SIM SPEF option 286 SIM SPEF ACTIVE option 289 SIM SPEF INSERROR option 291 SIM SPEF LUMPCAPS option 291 SIM SPEF MAX ITER option 290 SIM SPEF PARVALUE option 291 SIM SPEF RAIL option 290 SIM SPEF SCALEC option 290 SIM SPEF SCALER option 290 SIM SPEF VTOL option 289 simulation multiple runs 70 title 53 simulation engine 1 sin x function 139 sinh x function 139 skew file 334 parameters 330 skip nrd nrs configuration option configuration options skip nrd nrs 367 slew ra
126. 53 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Multitone Harmonic Balance AC Analysis HBAC 254 Supports unlimited number of HB and HBAC sources The requested maximum harmonic in a PROBE Or PRINT statement must be less than or equal to half the number of harmonics specified in harmonic balance that is max harm num hb harms 2 Input Syntax HBAC frequency sweep Parameter Description frequency sweep Frequency sweep range for the input signal also referred to as the input frequency band IFB or fin You can specify LIN DEC OCT POI or SWEEPBLOCK Specify the nsteps start and stop frequencies using the following syntax for each type of sweep LIN nsteps start stop DEC nsteps start stop OCT nsteps start stop POI nsteps freq values SWEEPBLOCK nsteps freq1 freq2 freqn DATA dataname HBAC Analysis Options The following options directly relate to a HBAC analysis and override the corresponding PAC options if specified in the netlist OPTION HBACTOL default 1x10 8 Range 1x10 14 to Infinity OPTION HBACKRYLOVDIM default 300 Range 1 to Infinity OPTION HBACKRYLOVITR default 1000 Range 1 to Infinity If these parameters are not specified in the netlist then the following conditions apply f HBACTOL HBTOL then HBACTOL HBTOL f HBACKRYLOVDIM lt HBKRYLOVDIM then HBACKRYLOVDIM HBKRYLOVDIM HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2
127. 8 INVXIFNTC IN 17 INVXIFNTC IN 16 0 25 102 0856444 804 1 73764 0 307175 65517 2 INVXIFNTC IN 4 6 95371 2 INVXIFNTC IN 5 50 9942 1184 A 0 403 TR 1000 A 0 9 IVXIFNTC IN NVXIFNTC IN NVXIFNTC IN NVXIFNTC IN NVXIFNTC IN D NET NE 794 1 98538 CONN I NL 1039 X O L O D INVX I NL 2039 A I L 0 343 I NL 1040 A I L 0 343 CAP 3387 3388 3389 3390 3391 3392 3393 NE 794 0 NE 794 10 NE 794 11 NE 794 13 NE 794 14 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 NE 794 1 0 0792492 0 0789158 0 0789991 NE 794 12 0 0 0 0789991 0792992 00093352 INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVX1FNTC IN 21 4 71035 175 23175 12 31 7256 4 11 9254 7 25 3618 6 23 3057 24 8 64717 8 7 46529 10 2 04729 10 10 8533 11 1 05164 307 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation 308 3394 3395 3396 3397 3398 3399 3400 3401 3402 3403 3404 3405 3406 3407 3408 3409 3410 3411 3412 3413 3414 RES 2879 2880 2881 2882 2883 2884 2885 2886 2887 2888 2889 2890 2891 2892 2893 2894 2895 2896 2897 2898 2899 2900 2901 2902 2903 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 794 NE 79
128. 81 223 INVXIFNTC IN 14 0 00246845 224 INVXIFNTC IN 15 0 00350198 225 INVXIFNTC IN 16 0 00226712 226 INVXIFNTC IN 17 0 0426184 227 INVXIFNTC IN 18 0 0209701 228 INVXIFNTC IN 2 0 0699292 229 INVXIFNTC IN 20 0 019987 230 INVXIFNTC IN 21 0 0110279 231 INVXIFNTC IN 24 0 0192603 232 INVXIFNTC IN 25 0 0141824 233 INVXIFNTC IN 3 0 0520437 234 INVXIFNTC IN 4 0 0527105 235 INVXIFNTC IN 5 0 1184749 236 INVXIFNTC IN 6 0 0468458 237 INVXIFNTC IN 7 0 0391578 238 INVXIFNTC IN 8 0 0113856 306 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 239 INVXIFNTC IN 9 0 0142528 240 NL 1000 A 0 344804 241 TR 000 A 0 34506 RES 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 T73 174 175 176 END INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN NVXIFNTC IN NVXIFNTC IN NVXIFNTC IN NVXIFNTC IN NVXIFNTC IN NVXIFNTC IN NVXIFNTC IN NVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN INVXIFNTC IN E I T L I I I I Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation INVXIFNTC IN 18 8 39117 INVXIFNTC IN 5 25 1397 11 12 13 14 14 15 15 17 NL 1000 A 0 INVXIFNTC IN 16 INVXIFNTC IN 24 INVXIFNTC IN 25 5 18 FL 1000 A 1 36317 INVXIFNTC IN 20 4 59517 INVXIFNTC IN 13 3 68
129. A O n1 Z0 V Th Z0 V n1 ref PI nl nl nl ref Zo 50 Steady State Voltage and Current Sources 180 The current source and V voltage source elements include extensions that allow you to use them as sources of steady state sinusoidal signals for HB and HBAC analyses When you use a power parameter to specify the available power you can also use these elements as power sources For a general description of the and V elements see Power Sources in the HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Steady State Voltage and Current Sources I and V Element Syntax VxxX pn Voltage or Power Information x dc mag ac mag lt phase gt gt gt HBAC mag lt phase gt gt gt hb mag phase harm tone modharm lt modtone gt gt gt gt gt gt gt transient waveform TRANFORHB 1 0 gt Power Switch KKKKKKKK lt power 0 1 w dbm lt z0 val gt rdc val lt rac val gt lt RHBAC val gt lt rhb val gt lt rtran val gt ett Ixxx pn Current or Power Information x dc mag ac mag lt phase gt gt gt HBAC mag lt phase gt gt gt hb mag phase harm tone modharm lt modtone gt gt gt gt gt gt gt transient waveform TRANFORHB 1 0 gt Power Switch kkkkkkxkk lt power 0 1 w dbm gt lt z0 val g
130. A X2 X5 B 5 MODEL RVAL R HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements In the example above R1 is a simple 100 linear resistor and Rload calls a resistor model named RVAL which is defined later in the netlist Note If a resistor calls a model then you do not need to specify a constant resistance as you do with R1 R3 takes its value from the RX parameter and uses the TC1 and TC2 temperature coefficients which become 0 001 and 0 respectively RP spans across different circuit hierarchies and is 0 50 Behavioral Resistors in HSPICE or HSPICE RF Rxxx nl n2 R equation Note The equation can be a function of any node voltage or branch current and any independent variables such as time hertz 0r temper HSPICE RF User Guide 83 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements 84 Example R1 A B R V A I VDD Frequency Dependent Resistors Rxxx nl n2 R equation lt CONVOLUTION 0 1 2 FBASE value FMAX value Parameter Description CONVOLUTION FBASE FMAX Indicates which method is used 0 Acts the same as the conventional method This is the default 1 Applies recursive convolution and if the rational function is not accurate enough it switches to linear convolution 2 Applies linear convolution Specifies the lower bound of the transient analysis frequency For CONVOLUTION 1 mode HSPICE starts sampli
131. AA NAE ANA o in k subckt BALUN3 in outi out2 Lo2 gnd outi L 1 Lol out2 gnd L 1 Lin in out2 L 1 K12 Lin Lol IDEAL K13 Lin Lo2 IDEAL K23 Lol Lo2 IDEAL ends Coupled Inductor Element This section describes the multiport syntax for coupled inductor elements This syntax extends the existing linear Lxxx and mutual Kxxx inductor elements Two syntax configurations are available areluctance format that is used by Star RCXT for inductance extraction an ideal transformer format that can be used to create balanced converter that is balun models in HSPICE RF Reluctance Format The element topology is specified on the L record Two forms are available an inline form and an external file reference form Syntax Lxxx nip nin nNp nNn RELUCTANCE r1 c1 vall r2 c2 val2 rm cm valm SHORTALL yes no IGNORE COUPLING yes no gt Lxxx nip nin nNp nNn RELUCTANCE FILE lt filenamel gt FILE filename2 lt SHORTALL yes no gt lt IGNORE_COUPLING yes no gt lt M val lt DTEMP val gt lt R vab Parameter Description Lxxx Inductor element name Must begin with L followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters 162 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Passive Elements Parameter Description n1p n1n nNp nNn Positive and negative terminal node names The number of terminals must be even Each pair of
132. ARN 2 Tone specified for V I source not specified in HB command HB WARN 3 HB convergence not achieved HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 223 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis References Table 17 HB Analysis Warning Messages File Description HB WARN 4 Source specifies both HB and transient description HB description will be used HB WARN 5 Source specifies exponential decay HB will ignore it HB WARN 6 Source specifies a non positive frequency HB WARN 7 Source does not fit the HB spectrum HB WARN 8 Source cannot be used with the TRANFORHB option HB WARN 9 Frequency not found from transient analysis References 224 1 2 3 S Maas Nonlinear Microwave Circuits Chapter 3 IEEE Press 1997 R Gilmore and M B Steer Nonlinear Circuit Analysis Using the Method of Harmonic Balance A Review of the Art Part I Introductory Concepts International Journal of Microwave and Millimeter wave Computer Aided Engineering Volume 1 No 1 pages 22 37 1991 R Gilmore and M B Steer Nonlinear Circuit Analysis Using the Method of Harmonic Balance A Review of the Art Part Il Advanced Concepts International Journal of Microwave and Millimeter wave Computer Aided Engineering Volume 1 No 2 pages 159 180 1991 4 V Rizzoli F Mastri F Sgallari G Spaletta Harmonic Balance Simulation 5 6 7 of Strongly Nonlinear Very Large Size Microwave Circuits b
133. Analysis 384 Setting Default Start and Stop Times In addition to using FROM and TO times in a POWER statement you can also use the SIM POWERSTART and SIM POWERSTOP options with POWER statements to specify default start and stop times for measuring signals during simulation These times apply to all signals that do not have their own defined FROM and TO measurement times For example OPTION SIM POWERSTART lt time gt OPTION SIM POWERSTOP time These options control the power measurement scope the default is for the entire run For syntax and description of these options see OPTION SIM POWERSTART or OPTION SIM POWERSTOP in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Controlling Power Analysis Waveform Dumps You use the SIM POWERPOST option to control power analysis waveform dumping For example OPTION SIM POWERPOST ON OFF Considering the potentially enormous number of signals there is no waveform dumping by default for the signals in the POWER statement Setting SIM_POWERPOST ON turns on power analysis waveform dumping Controlling Hierarchy Levels By default HSPICE RF performs power analysis on the top three levels of hierarchy You use the SIM_POWER_TOP option to control the number of hierarchy levels for power analysis For example OPTION SIM POWER TOP value By default power analysis is performed on the top levels of hierarchy SIM POWER ANALYSIS Option You use the SIM POWER ANALYSIS o
134. CE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case Analysis RF adds this value to vTo for the Level 3 model and adds or subtracts it from VFBO for the BSIM model Table 26 shows whether HSPICE RF adds or subtracts deviations from the average Table 26 Sigma Deviations Type Parameter Slow Fast NMOS XL RSH DELVTO TOX XW PMOS XL RSH DELVTO TOX XW HSPICE RF selects skew parameters based on the available historical data that it collects either during fabrication or electrical test For example HSPICE RF collects the XL skew parameter for poly CD during fabrication This parameter is usually the most important skew parameter for a MOS process Figure 27 is an example of data that historical records produce HSPICE RF User Guide 331 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case Analysis 332 Figure 27 Historical Records for Skew Parameters in a MOS Process Fab Database Run PolyCD 101 0 04u 102 0 06u 103 0 03u pop 3 sigma 2 sigma 1 sigma F Mean XL value Using Skew Parameters Figure 28 shows how to create a worst case corners library file for a CMOS process model Specify the physically measured parameter variations so that their proper minimum and maximum values are consistent with measured current IDS variations For example H
135. CE calculates the DC voltage across the nodes of the circuit In all other non DC analyses a DC voltage source of this value represents the DC block HSPICE does not allow dv dt variations HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Charge Conserved Capacitors Cxxx nodel node2 q expression HSPICE supports AC DC TRAN and PZ analyses for charge conserved capacitors The expression supports the following parameters and variables Parameters e node voltages e branch currents Variables e time temper hertz Note The hertz variable is not supported in transient analyses Parameters must be used directly in an equation HSPICE does not support parameters that represent an equation containing variables Error Handling If you use an unsupported parameter in an expression HSPICE issues an error message and aborts the simulation HSPICE ignores unsupported analysis types and then issues warning a message Limitations The following syntax does not support charge conserving capacitors Cxx nodel node2 C expression Capacitor equations are not implicitly converted to charge equations Example 1 Capacitance based Capacitor Cl a b C 2 Co 1 alpha V a b ctype 0 You can obtain Q by integrating C w r t V a b Example 2 Charge based Capacitor Cl a b Q 2 Co V a b 1 0 5 alpha V a b HSPICE RF User Guide 91 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements
136. CLUDE General include files Model and File Inclusion MODEL Element model descriptions LIB Library End of END Required statement end of netlist netlist Input Netlist File Composition The HSPICE RF circuit description syntax is compatible with the SPICE input netlist format Figure 5 shows the basic structure of an input netlist Figure 5 Basic Netlist Structure Title line First line is automatically a comment Comments all lines beginning with an asterisk Input control statements Netlist body description of circuit topology TU dba a MODEL statements OPTION statements OPTION with option statements PRINT and other output statements EL ULLA d Analysis statement such as POWER TRAN control statements END The following is an example of a simple netlist file called inv ckt in It shows a small inverter test case that measures the timing behavior of the inverter To create the circuit 1 Define the MOSFET models for the PMOS and NMOS transistors of the inverter 2 Insert the power supplies for both VDD and GND power rails 52 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition Insert the pulse source to the inverter input This circuit uses transient analysis and produces output graphical waveform data for the input and output ports of the inverter circuit Sample inverter circuit kkk k M
137. D time delay gt lt RISE r gt lt FALL f gt lt CROSS C gt MEASURE PHASENOISE result FIND out varl At Input Frequency Band value The previous measurement yields the result of a variable value at a specific input frequency band IFB point MEASURE PHASENOISE result FIND out varl WHEN out var2 out var3 The previous measurement yields the result at the input frequency point when out var2 out var3 MEASURE PHASENOISE result WHEN out var2 out var3 The previous measurement yields the input frequency point when out var2 out vara average RMS min max and peak to peak MEASURE PHASENOISE result RMS out var lt FROM IFB1 gt lt TO IFB2 gt This measurement yields the RMS of out var from frequency IFB1 to frequency IFB2 You can replace the lt RMS gt with AvG to find the average value of out var Similarly you can replace lt RMS gt with MIN MAX or PP to find the result of min max or pp integral evaluation MEASURE PHASENOISE result INTEGRAL out var lt FROM IFB1 gt lt TO IFB2 gt HSPICE RF User Guide 239 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Phase Noise Analysis 240 This measurement integrates the out var value from the IFB1 frequency to the IFB2 frequency derivative evaluation MEASURE PHASENOISE result DERIVATIVE out var AT IFB1 This measurement finds the derivative of out var at the IFB1 frequenc
138. DC vin 1 5 0 25 sweep MONTE val firstrun numi HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis 0 r DC vin 1 5 0 25 sweep MONTE list lt gt numl num2 lt num3 gt lt num5 num6 gt lt num7 gt lt gt AC Sweep AC dec 10 100 1meg sweep MONTE val firstrun numl or AC dec 10 100 1lmeg sweep MONTE list lt gt lt numl1 num2 gt lt num3 gt lt num5 num6 gt lt num7 gt lt gt TRAN Sweep TRAN 1n 10n sweep MONTE val lt firstrun num1 gt Or TRAN 1n 10n sweep MONTE list lt gt numl num2 lt num3 gt lt num5 num6 gt lt num7 gt lt gt The val value specifies the number of Monte Carlo iterations to perform A reasonable number is 30 The statistical significance of 30 iterations is quite high If the circuit operates correctly for all 30 iterations there is a 99 probability that over 8096 of all possible component values operate correctly The relative error of a quantity determined through Monte Carlo analysis is proportional to val The firstrun values specify the desired number of iterations HSPICE RF runs from num1 to num1 val 1 The number after firstrun can be a parameter You can write only one number after ist The colon represents from to Specifying only one number makes HSPICE RF runs only a the one specified point Example 1 In this example HSPICE RF runs from the 90th to 99th Monte Carlo iterat
139. DE path T2N2211 inc This method requires you to store each model in its own inc file so it is not generally useful However you can use it to debug new models when you test only a small number of models Vendor Libraries The vendor library is the interface between commercial parts and circuit or system simulation ASIC vendors provide comprehensive cells corresponding to inverters gates latches and output buffers Memory and microprocessor vendors supply input and output buffers Interface vendors supply complete cells for simple functions and output buffers to use in generic family output Analog vendors supply behavioral models To avoid name and parameter conflicts models in vendor cell libraries should be within the subcircuit definitions HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Using Subcircuits Figure 10 Vendor Library Usage X1 in out vdd vss buffer f OPTION search usr lib vendor usr lib vendor buffer f inc usr lib vendor skew dat macro buffer_f in out vdd vss lib usr lib vendor skew dat ff inc usr lib vendor buffer inc ib ff fast model param vendor xl 1u inc usr lib vendor model dat AS endl ff usr lib vendor buffer inc usr lib vendor model dat macro buffer in out vdd vss m1 out in vdd vdd nch w 10 l 1 model nch nmos level 28 xl vendor_x
140. Demand True Hspice TSUPREM 4 TymeWare VCS Express VCSi Venus Verification Portal VFormal VHDL Compiler VHDL System Simulator VirSim and VMC are trademarks of Synopsys Inc Service Marks sv MAP in SVP Caf and TAP in are service marks of Synopsys Inc SystemC is a trademark of the Open SystemC Initiative and is used under license ARM and AMBA are registered trademarks of ARM Limited All other product or company names may be trademarks of their respective owners Printed in the U S A HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 ii HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Inside This Manual Contents The HSPICE Documentation Set 00 000000000 RIK KIR KIRI ees Other Related Publications llle RR Conventions Customer Support HSPICE RF Features and Functionality HSPICE RF Overview lseeee rs HSPICE RF Features 0 0 0 0 0 e Ayan rs HSPICE and HSPICE RF Differences kk KEKE KK ee Getting Started Running HSPICE RF Netlist Overview Simulations cele Parametric Analysis Extensions lille Generating Output Files lille HSPICE RF Output File Types lslses lessen Using the CosmosScope Waveform Display KK RR KK KK HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 1 Low Noise Amplifier kK KK KK KK KK K R KK KK KK Example 2 Power Amplifier kk KK KK KK eee
141. Description funcname Specifies the function name This parameter must be distinct from array names and built in functions In subsequently defined functions all embedded functions must be previously defined arg1 arg2 Specifies variables used in the expression HSPICE RF User Guide 136 Y 2006 03 SP1 Parameter Description off Voids all user defined functions Example PARAM f a b POW a 2 a b g d SQRT d h e ze 1 2 9 3 Predefined Analysis Function HSPICE includes specialized analysis types such as Optimization and Monte Carlo that require a way to control the analysis Measurement Parameters MEASURE statements produce a measurement parameter The rules for measurement parameters are the same as for standard parameters except that measurement parameters are defined in a MEASURE statement not in a PARAM statement For a description of the MEASURE statement see Specifying User Defined Analysis EASURE on page 252 PRINT and PROBE Parameters PRINT and PROBE statements in HSPICE produce a print parameter The rules for print parameters are the same as the rules for standard parameters except that you define the parameter directly ina PRINT or PROBE statement not ina PARAM statement For more information about the PRINT or PROBE statements see Displaying Simulation Results on page 231 Multiply Parameter The most basic subcircuit parameter in HSPICE is the M multiply
142. E 7 NLX 1 579864E 7 DVTOW 0 DVT1W 0 DVT2W 0 DVTO 0 5334651 DVT1 0 7186877 DVT2 0 5 U0 289 1720829 UA 1 300598E 9 UB 2 308197E 18 UC 2 841618E 11 VSAT 1 482651E5 AO 1 6856991 AGS 0 2874763 BO 1 833193E 8 Bl lE 7 KETA 2 395348E 3 Al A2 0 4177975 RDSW 178 7751373 PRWG 0 3774172 PRWB 0 2 WR 1 WINT 0 LINT 1 888394E 8 XL 3E 8 XW 4E 8 DWG 1 213938E 8 DWB 4 613042E 9 VOFF 0 0981658 NFACTOR 1 2032376 CIT 0 CDSC 2 4E 4 CDSCD 0 CDSCB 0 ETAO 5 128492E 3 ETAB 6 18609E 4 DSUB 0 0463218 PCLM 1 91946 PDIBLC1 1 PDIBLC2 4 422611E 3 PDIBLCB 0 1 DROUT 0 9817908 PSCBE1 7 982649E10 PSCBE2 5 200359E 10 PVAG 9 314435E 3 DELTA 0 01 RSH 3 7 MOBMOD 1 PRT 0 UTE 1 5 KT1 0 11 KT1IL 0 KT2 0 022 UA1 4 31E 9 UB1 7 61E 18 UC1 5 6E 11 AT 3 3E4 WL 0 WLN 1 WW 0 WWN 1 WWL 0 LL 0 LLN 1 LW 0 LWN 1 LWL 0 CAPMOD 2 XPART 0 5 CGDO 5 62E 10 CGSO 5 62E 10 CGBO 1E 12 CJ 1 641005E 3 PB 0 99 MJ 0 4453094 CJSW 4 179682E 10 PBSW 0 99 MJSW 0 3413857 CJSWG 3 29E 10 PBSWG 0 99 MJSWG 0 3413857 CF 0 PVTHO 8 385037E 3 PRDSW 10 PK2 2 650965E 3 WKETA 7 293869E 3 LKETA 6 070221E 3 END HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 23 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 3 Amplifier IP3 24 First notice that we have defined variables that allow powe
143. ELAYFREQ INTERPOLATION HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Base frequency to use for transient analysis This value becomes the base frequency point for Inverse Fast Fourier Transformation IFFT If you do not set this value the base frequency is a reciprocal value of the transient period f you do not set this value the reciprocal value of RISETIME is taken See OPTION RISETIME in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference for more information f you set a frequency that is smaller than the reciprocal value of the transient then transient analysis performs circular convolution and uses the reciprocal value of FBASE as its base period Maximum frequency to use for transient analysis Used as the maximum frequency point for Inverse Fourier Transformation In almost all cases you do not need to specify a value for this parameter This parameter specifies the precondition factor keyword used for the precondition process of the S parameter A precondition is used to avoid an infinite admittance matrix The default is 0 75 which is good for most cases Delay handler for transmission line type parameters Set DELAYHANDLE to ON or 1 to turn on the delay handle set DELAYHANDLE to OFF or 0 to turn off the delay handle default If you set DELAYHANDLE OFF but DELAYFOQ is not zero HSPICE simulates the S element in delay mode Delay frequency for transmission line type parameters The default is FMAX If the D
144. ELAYHANDLE is set to OFF but DELAYFREQ is nonzero HSPICE still simulates the S element in delay mode The interpolation method STEP piecewise step SPLINE b spline curve fit LINEAR piecewise linear default 167 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Scattering Parameter Data Element Parameter Specifies INTDATTYP HIGHPASS LOWPASS MIXEDMODE DATATYPE 168 Data type for the linear interpolation of the complex data RI real imaginary based interpolation DBA dB angle based interpolation MA magnitude angle based interpolation default Method to extrapolate higher frequency points 0 cut off 1 use highest frequency point 2 perform linear extrapolation using the highest 2 points 3 apply the window function to gradually approach the cut off level default This option overrides EXTRAPOLATION in MODEL SP Method to extrapolate lower frequency points 0 cut off 1 use the magnitude of the lowest point 2 perform linear extrapolation using the magnitude of the lowest two points This option overrides EXTRAPOLATION in MODEL SP Set to 1 if the parameters are represented in the mixed mode A string used to determine the order of the indices of the mixed signal incident or reflected vector The string must be an array of a letter and a number Xn where X D to indicate a differential term C to indicate a common term S to indicate a single grounded term n the po
145. ER DC Analysis You use the POWERDC standby current statement to calculate the DC leakage current of a design hierarchy For example POWERDC keyword subckt namel HSPICE RF User Guide 381 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features POWER DC Analysis 382 This statement creates a table that lists the measurements of the AVG MAX and MIN values for the current of every instance in the subcircuit This table also lists the sum of the power of each port in the subcircuit You use the SIM POWERDC HSPICE option to increase the accuracy of operating point OP calculations Or for even higher accuracy in operating point calculations you use the SIM POWERDC ACCURACY option For syntax and description of this statement and options see POWERDC OPTION SIM POWERDC ACCURACY or OPTION SIM POWERDC HSPICE in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Power DC Analysis Output Format Leakage Current Result Subckt Name XXX Instance Name Port Max A Min A Avg A Total Power Max W Min W Avg W NOTE Power Sum Ii Vi Subckt Name XXX Instance Name Port Max A Min A Avg A Total Power Max W Min W Avg W Example global vdd vss powerdc all x1 inl midl inv x2 midl outil inv subckt inv in out mn out in vss vss nch mp vdd in out vdd pch ends end Output Leakage Current Result Subckt Name Top Level Instance Name Port Max A Min A Avg A x1 n CC kwa s x1
146. Example 3 Amplifier IP3 llli Example 4 Colpitts Oscillator llle Example 5 CMOS GPS VCO kk kk kk kk KK KK KK KK KK KK KK eres Example 6 Mixer Two tone HB Approach kk cee KK kk e HBAC Approach xiii xiv xvi xvii xvii 10 10 11 12 15 15 19 22 27 29 37 38 39 Contents 4 Comparing Results Ak kK kK KK KK KK KK KK KK eae Device Model Cards Input Netlist and Data Entry 20 0 0 KK KIRI K K KK K KIRR KIR Input Netlist File Guidelines llli mpu Line Format s sk kal kay w le e b edv und y k Lena eae Delimiters Node Identifiers Instance Names Hierarchy Paths Numbers Parameters and Expressions KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK Input Netlist File Olr ctire us ect Ease DM HM as cere Schematic Netlists 0 0 00 nc yaya k ne Ak dun SAL RII Input Netlist File Composition kk kk KK KK KK KK KK KK KK ee Title of Simulation XAK kK kK KK KK KK KK KK ee Comments and Line Continuation KK KK KK KS Element and Source Statements KK KK KER RR RR KK KK Defining Subcircuits J A kk kK kK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK Node Naming Conventions kK kk kk kK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK IK Element Instance and Subcircuit Naming Conventions Subcircuit Node Names kk kk kK kK KK KK KK KK KK ae Path Names of Subcircuit Nodes 0060 0c eee eee Ab
147. F User Guide 138 Y 2006 03 SP1 Built In Functions and Variables In addition to simple arithmetic operations you can use the built in functions listed in Table 11 and the variables listed in Table 10 on page 135 in HSPICE expressions Table 11 Synopsys HSPICE Built in Functions HSPICE Form Function Class Description sin x sine trig Returns the sine of x radians cos x cosine trig Returns the cosine of x radians tan x tangent trig Returns the tangent of x radians asin x arc sine trig Returns the inverse sine of x radians acos x arccosine _ trig Returns the inverse cosine of x radians atan x arctangent trig Returns the inverse tangent of x radians sinh x hyperbolic trig Returns the hyperbolic sine of x radians sine cosh x hyperbolic trig Returns the hyperbolic cosine of x radians cosine tanh x hyperbolic trig Returns the hyperbolic tangent of x radians tangent abs x absolute math Returns the absolute value of x Ixl value sqrt x square root math Returns the square root of the absolute value of x sqrt x sqrt xl pow X y absolute math Returns the value of x raised to the integer part of y power x integer part of y pwr X y signed math Returns the absolute value of x raised to the y power power with the sign of x sign of x IxlY HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 139 Table 11 Synopsys HSPICE Built in Fu
148. Frequency values used in AC or HBAC analyses Currently HSPICE supports the following types of sweeps inear sweeps sweeps a variable over an interval with a constant increment The syntax is one of the following e variable start stop increment e variable lin npoints start stop Logarithmic sweeps sweeps a variable over an interval To obtain each point this sweep multiplies the previous point by a constant factor You can specify the factor as a number of points per decade or octave as in HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements SWEEPBLOCK in Sweep Analyses e variable dec npoints start stop e variable oct npoints start stop Point sweeps a variable takes on specific values that you specify as a list The syntax is variable poi npoints pl p2 Data sweeps a DATA statement identifies the swept variables and their values The syntax is data dataname You can use the SWEEPBLOCK feature to combine linear logarithmic and point sweeps which creates more complicated sets of values over which a variable is swept The TRAN AC DC and HB commands can specify SWEEPBLOCK blockname as a sweep instead of LIN DEC OCT and so forth Also you can use SWEEPBLOCK for frequency sweeps with the AC HBAC PHASENOISE and HBNOISE commands All commands that can use SWEEPBLOCK must refer to the SWEEPBLOCK sweep type In addition you must specify SWEEPBLOCK as one of the synt
149. Greek letter pi Fora general multiport STM LA preserves the DC admittance between the ports and the total capacitance that connects the ports to ground All floating capacitances are lumped to ground Linear Acceleration Control Options Summary In addition to OPTION SIM LA other options are available to control the maximum resistance and minimum capacitance values to preserve and to limit the operating parameters of the PACT algorithm Table 25 contains a summary of these control options For the syntax and descriptions of these control options see the respective section in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Table 25 PACT Options Syntax Description OPTION SIM_LA PACT PI Activates linear matrix reduction and selects between four methods If you set the entire netlist to ANALOG mode linear matrix reduction does not occur OPTION SIM_LA_FREQ lt value gt Upper frequency where you need accuracy preserved value is the upper frequency for which the PACT algorithm preserves accuracy If va ue is 0 PACT drops all capacitors because only DC is of interest The maximum frequency required for accurate reduction depends on both the technology of the circuit and the time scale of interest In general the faster the circuit the higher the maximum frequency The default is 1GHz HSPICE RF User Guide 311 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Linear Acceleration Table 25 PACT Options Continued
150. HBLIN 1 1 HB tones 1G harms 5 HBLIN lin 5 0 100meg noisecalc yes filename ex2 Output Syntax This section describes the syntax for the HBLIN PRINT and PROBE statements PRINT and PROBE Statements PRINT HBLIN Smn Smn TYPE S m n S m n TYPE PROBE HBLIN Smn Smn TYPE S m n S m n TYPE PRINT HBLIN SXYmn SXYmn TYPE SXY m n SXY m n TYPE PROBE HBLIN SXYmn SXYmn TYPE SXY m n SXY m n TYPE PRINT HBLIN NF lt SSNF gt lt DSNF gt PROBE HBLIN NF SSNF lt DSNF gt Parameter Description Smn Smn TYPE I Complex 2 port parameters Where S m n S m n TYPE m 1or2 SXYmn SXYmn TYPE I n 1or2 SXY m n SXY m n TYPE X and Y are used for mixed mode S parameter output The values for X and Y can beD differential C common or S single end TYPE R M P PD D DB or DBM R real imaginary M magnitude P PD phase in degrees D DB decibels DBM decibels per 1 0e 3 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Computing Transfer Functions HBXF Parameter Description NF NF and SSNF both output a single side band noise SSNF figure as a function of the IFB points NF SSNF 10 Log SSF Single side band noise factor SSF Total Noise at output at OFB originating from all frequencies Load Noise originating from OFB Input Source Noise originating fro
151. HBNOISE PHASENOISE or HBTRAN measurements HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Using CHECK Statements Optimization With HB Measurements The required statements are Analysis statement HBOSC TONES fi f2 fn NHARMS hi h2 lt hn gt gt SWEEP parameter sweep OPTIMIZE OPTxxx RESULT measname MODEL mname Measure statement MEASURE HB measname FIND out_varl AT val GOAL val Optimization With HBNOISE PHASENOISE or HBTRAN Measurements The required statements are Analysis statement HBOSC TONES fi f2 fn NHARMS hi h2 lt hn gt gt SWEEP OPTIMIZE OPTxxx RESULT measname MODEL mname For example HBOSC tones 1g nharms 5 sweep x 1 5 1 optimize optl result yl y2 model m1 model m1 opt level 0 PHASENOISE dec 1 1k 1g meas phasenoise yl find phnoise at 10k goal 150dbc meas phasenoise y2 RMSJITTER phnoise units sec goal 1 0e 12 Measure statement MEASURE HBNOISE measname FIND out varl AT val GOAL val MEASURE PHASENOISE measname FIND out varl AT val GOAL val MEASURE HBTRAN measname FIND out varl AT val GOAL val Optimization with HBNOISE PHASENOISE or HBTRAN measurements must not be used in combination with HB measurement optimization as shown in Optimization With HB Measurements Using CHECK Statements The CHECK statements in HSPICE RF offer the following instrumentation HSPICE RF User
152. HSPICE RF User Guide Version Y 2006 03 SP1 June 2006 SYNOPSYS Copyright Notice and Proprietary Information Copyright 2006 Synopsys Inc All rights reserved This software and documentation contain confidential and proprietary information that is the property of Synopsys Inc The software and documentation are furnished under a license agreement and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the license agreement No part of the software and documentation may be reproduced transmitted or translated in any form or by any means electronic mechanical manual optical or otherwise without prior written permission of Synopsys Inc or as expressly provided by the license agreement Right to Copy Documentation The license agreement with Synopsys permits licensee to make copies of the documentation for its internal use only Each copy shall include all copyrights trademarks service marks and proprietary rights notices if any Licensee must assign sequential numbers to all copies These copies shall contain the following legend on the cover page This document is duplicated with the permission of Synopsys Inc for the exclusive use of and its employees This is copy number Destination Control Statement All technical data contained in this publication is subject to the export control laws of the United States of America Disclosure to nationals of other countries contrary to United States law is prohibited I
153. Hz for E voltage noise source Example The following netlist shows a 1000 ohm resistor g1 using a G element The ginoise element placed in parallel with the g1 resistor delivers the thermal noise expected from a resistor The r1 resistor is included for comparison The noise due to x1 should be the same as the noise due to g1noise Resistor implemented using g element vl 101 r 1 2 1k gl 1 2 cur v 1 2 0 001 ginoise 1 2 noise 4 1 3806266e 23 TEMPER 273 15 0 001 rout 2 0 1meg ac lin 1 100 100 noise v 2 v1 1 end Function Approximations for Distributed Devices High order rational function approximations constructed for distributed devices used at RF frequencies are obtained in the pole residue form also known as Foster canonical form The popular method of recursive convolution also uses this form HSPICE supports the pole residue form for its frequency dependent controlled sources G and E elements You can enter the pole residue form directly without first converting to another form HSPICE RF User Guide 189 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Function Approximations for Distributed Devices 190 Foster Pole Residue Form for Transconductance or Gain The Foster pole residue form for transconductance G s or gain E s has the form N A AF G s ko k s A S Pi s p i l Where ko k are real constants residues A and poles p are complex numbers or real
154. ION POST HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP 1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Phase Noise Analysis Element phase noise can also be analyzed through the PRINT and PROBE statements which the previous syntax shows A single phnoise keyword specifies the phase noise for the whole circuit and the phnoise element name specifies the phase noise value of the specified element Example 1 HBOSC TONE 900MEG NHARMS 9 PROBENODE gate gnd 0 65 PHASENOISE V gate gnd DEC 10 100 1 0e7 METHOD 0 CARRIERINDEX 1 use NLP algorithm This example performs an oscillator analysis searching for frequencies in the vicinity of 900 MHz followed by a phase noise analysis at frequency offsets from 100 Hz to 10 MHz Example 2 HBOSC TONE 2400MEG NHARMS 11 PROBENODE drainP drainN 1 0 FSPTS 20 2100MEG 2700MEG SWEEP Vtune 0 0 5 0 0 2 PHASENOISE V drainP drainN DEC 10 100 1 0e7 METHOD 1 CARRIERINDEX 1 Suse NLP algorithm This example performs a VCO analysis searching for frequencies in the vicinity of 2 4 GHz This example uses eleven harmonics and sweeps the VCO tuning voltage from 0 to 5 V HSPICE RF uses the nonlinear perturbation NLP algorithm to perform a phase noise analysis about the fundamental frequency for each tuning voltage value Phase Noise Analysis Options Table x lists the control options specific to PHASENOISE applications Table 20 PHASENOISE Analysis Options Parameter Description
155. If this is a resistor HSPICE RF uses it as a reference noise source to determine the noise figure If the resistance value is 0 the result is an infinite noise figure HSPICE RF User Guide 259 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Multitone Nonlinear Steady State Analysis HBNOISE Parameter Description parameter sweep Frequency sweep range for the input signal Also referred to as the input frequency band IFB or fin You can specify LIN DEC OCT POI SWEEPBLOCK DATA MONTE or OPTIMIZE sweeps Specify the nsteps start and stop frequencies using the following syntax for each type of sweep LIN nsteps start stop DEC nsteps start stop OCT nsteps start stop POI nsteps freq values SWEEPBLOCK nsteps freq1 freg2 freqn n1 n2 nk Index term defining the output frequency band OFB or fout 1 at which the noise is evaluated Generally fout ABS n1 f n2 f2 nk fk fin Where f1 f2 fk are the first through k th steady state tones determined from the harmonic balance solution n1 n2 nk are the associated harmonic multipliers fin is the IFB defined by parameter sweep The default index term is 1 1 1 1 For a single tone analysis the default mode is consistent with simulating a low side down conversion mixer where the RF signal is specified by the IFB and the noise is measured at a down converted frequency that the OFB specifies In general you ca
156. JSCC volume 33 number 3 March 1998 9 Y Saad Iterative Methods for Sparse Linear Systems PWS Publishing Company 1995 10 J Roychowdhury D Long and P Feldmann Cyclostationary Noise Analysis of Large RF Circuits with Multitone Excitations IEEE Journal of Solid State Circuits volume 33 pages 324 336 March 1998 HSPICE RF User Guide 275 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses References 276 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 12 Envelope Analysis Describes how to use envelope simulation Envelope Simulation Envelope simulation combines features of time and frequency domain analysis Harmonic Balance HB solves for a static set of phasors for all the circuit state variables as shown in this equation N v t ag b3 a cos t b sin ct i l In contrast envelope analysis finds a dynamic time dependent set of phasors as this equation shows N v t a Y a t cosw t b 1 sin o i 1 Thus in envelope simulation each signal is described by the evolving spectrum Envelope analysis is generally used on circuits excited by signals with significantly different timescales An HB simulation is performed at each point in time of the slower moving 7 timescale In this way for example a 2 tone HB simulation can be converted into a series of related 1 tone simulations where the transient analysis proceeds on the 7 timescale and 1 tone HB sim
157. KK KK KIRR eee Setup and Hold Verification 0 00 0c KK KK KK KK KK IR Drop Detection in ct te hat kenal S YR kla Wn al ke d POWER DC Analysis kk kk kk kk kK KK KK KK es Power DC Analysis Output Format WW KK KK RR RR KK KK KK POWER Analysis ax lela lessen Setting Default Start and Stop Times 00 0c eee Controlling Power Analysis Waveform Dumps 05 Controlling Hierarchy Levels 0 KK KK cece eee ee SIM POWER ANALYSIS Option 00000 00 cece eee ee Detecting and Reporting Surge Currents llli ell KEK KK KS 365 365 368 369 369 370 370 370 371 371 371 373 373 375 375 376 377 378 378 379 380 381 381 382 383 384 384 384 384 388 389 xi Contents xii About This Manual This manual contains detailed reference information application examples and design flow descriptions that show how HSPICE RF features can be used for RF circuit characterization The manual supplements the HSPICE user documentation by describing the additional features built on top of the standard HSPICE feature set that support the design of RF and high speed circuits Where necessary the manual describes differences that might exist between HSPICE RF and HSPICE Note This manual discusses only HSPICE RF features For information on other HSPICE applications see the other HSPICE manuals listed in The HSPICE Docu
158. L HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Controls when to recalculate the Jacobian matrix HBJREUSE O recalculates the Jacobian matrix at each iteration HBJREUSE 1 reuses the Jacobian matrix for several iterations if the error is sufficiently reduced The default is 0 if HBSOLVER 1 or 2 or 1 if HBSOLVER 0 Determines when to recalculate Jacobian matrix if HBJREUSE 1 The percentage by which HSPICE RF must reduce the error from the last iteration so you can use the Jacobian matrix for the next iteration Must be a real number between 0 and 1 The default is 0 05 Dimension of the Krylov subspace that the Krylov solver uses Must be an integer greater than zero Default is 40 The error tolerance for the Krylov solver Must be a real number greater than zero The default is 0 01 The line search factor If Newton iteration produces a new vector of HB unknowns with a higher error than the last iteration then scale the update step by HBLINESEARCHFAC and try again Must be a real number between 0 and 1 The default is 0 35 Specifies the maximum number of Newton Raphson iterations that the HB engine performs Analysis stops when the number of iterations reaches this value The default is 10000 Specifies a preconditioner to solve nonlinear circuits HBSOLVER O invokes the direct solver HBSOLVER 1 default invokes the matrix free Krylov solver HBSOLVER 2 invokes the two level hybrid time frequency dom
159. LSE PWL SFFM or SIN Multiple transient descriptions are not allowed HSPICE RF User Guide 177 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Port Element 178 Parameter Description lt TRANFORHB 011 gt DCOPEN lt z0 val gt 0 default The transient description is ignored if an HB value is given or a DC value is given If no DC or HB value is given and TRANFORHB 0 then HB analysis treats the source as a DC source and the DC source value is the time 0 value 1 HB analysis uses the transient description if its value is VMRF SIN PULSE PWL or LFSR If the type is a non repeating PWL source then the time infinity value is used as a DC analysis source value For example the following statement is treated as a DC source with value 1 for HB analysis v1 10 PWL 0 1n1 1u 1 TRANFORHB 1 In contrast the following statement is a OV DC source v1 10 PWL 0 1n 1 1u 1 TRANFORHB 0 The following statement is treated as a periodic source with a 1us period that uses PWL values v1 10 PWL 0 0 1n 1 0 999u 1 1u 0 R TRANFORHB 1 To override the global TRANFORHB option explicitly set TRANFORHB for a voltage or current source Switch for open DC connection when DC magis not set 0 default P element behaves as an impedance termination 1 P elementis considered an open circuit in DC operating point analysis DCOPEN 1 is mainly used in LIN analysis so the P element will not affect the self
160. Lines lt DELAYFREQ val gt lt INTERPOLATION STEP LINEAR SPLINE gt lt INTDATTYP RI MA DBA gt lt HIGHPASS value gt lt LOWPASS value gt lt MIXEDMODE 0 1 gt DATATYPE data string DTEMP val lt NOISE 1 0 gt S Element Syntax HSPICE RF Sxxx nd1 nd2 ndN ndR s model name S model Syntax HSPICE M 4 4 ODEL S model name S N dimension FOMODEL sp model name TSTONEFILE filename CITIFILE filename TYPE s yl Zo value vector valuel FBASE base frequency FMAX maximum frequency PRECFAC val DELAYHANDLE ON OFF gt lt DELAYFREQ val gt S Model Syntax HSPICE RF m 4 odel S model name S FOMODEL sp model name TSTONEFILE filename CITIFILE filename TYPE S Y zl FBASE base frequency FMAX max frequency lt Zo 50 vector value Zof ref model HIGHPASS 0 1 21 LOWPASS O 1 21 lt DELAYHANDLE 0 1 gt lt DELAYFREQ val gt Parameter Description nd 1 nd2 ndN Nodes of an S element see Figure 12 on page 129 Three kinds of definitions are present With no reference node ndRef the default reference node in this situation is GND Each node ndi i 1 N and GND construct one of the N ports of the S element With one reference node ndRef is defined Each node ndi i 1 N and the ndRef construct one of the N ports of the S element With an N reference node each port has its o
161. MAT ri ma db gt lt MIXEDMODE2PORT dd cc cd dc sd sc cs ds gt Parameter Description frequency_sweep Frequency sweep range for the input signal also referred to as the input frequency band IFB or fin You can specify LIN DEC OCT POI or SWEEPBLOCK Specify the nsteps start and stop frequencies using the following syntax for each type of sweep LIN nsteps start stop DEC nsteps start stop OCT nsteps start stop POI nsteps freq_values SWEEPBLOCK nsteps freq1 freq2 freqn DATA dataname NOISECALC Enables calculating the noise figure The default is no 0 FILENAME Specifies the output file name for the extracted S parameters or the object name after the o command line option The default is the netlist file name HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP 1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Frequency Translation S Parameter HBLIN Extraction Parameter Description DATAFORMAT Specifies the format of the output data file dataformat RI real imaginary dataformat MA magnitude phase This is the default format for Touchstone files dataformat DB DB magnitude phase MIXEDMODE2PORT Describes the mixed mode data map of output mixed mode S parameter matrix The availability and default value for this keyword depends on the first two port P element configuration as follows case 1 p1 p2 single ended standard mode P element available ss default ss case
162. MOD 2 XPART 0 5 CGDO 5 62E 10 CGSO 5 62E 10 CGBO 1E 12 CJ 1 641005E 3 PB 0 99 MJ 0 4453094 CJSW 4 179682E 10 PBSW 0 99 MJSW 0 3413857 CJSWG 3 29E 10 PBSWG 0 99 MJSWG 0 3413857 CF 0 PVTHO 8 385037E 3 PRDSW 10 PK2 2 650965E 3 WKETA 7 293869E 3 LKETA 6 070E 3 END A LIN analysis also includes the following LIN command LIN noisecalc 1 sparcalc 1 This invokes a LIN analysis and activates noise calculations and S parameter output files Two port elements Pl rfin gnd port 1 z0 50 dc 0 595 Specifies that an input port is assumed between terminals rfin and ground that it is has a 50 ohm termination and it has a built in DC bias of 0 595 V The output Second port is P2 rfo _vdd port 2 z0 255 This syntax specifies that the output port is between terminals rfo and _vdd and is being used as a pull up resistor with impedance of 255 ohms A PRINT command for plotting the output S parameters in dB and the noise figure minimum To run this netlist type the following command hspicerf gsmlna sp This produces two output files named gsmlna scO and gsmlna printacO containing the S parameter and noise parameter results and the requested PRINT data 18 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 2 Power Amplifier To view the output 1 2 Type cscope to invoke CosmosScope Open gsmlna scO in the File gt Open gt Plotfiles
163. Multi Terminal S Element Frequency Table Model kk kk kk kK KK KK KK KK K KRI KK KK eee Group Delay Handler in Time Domain Analysis lusu Preconditionin g S Parameters ke rm ER ER XL COR IK Parameters and Functions 0 0000 cc cece ee Using Parameters i n Simulation PARAM JX KK KK RR eee KK Defining Parameters a kal corram py kal a ak e Assigning Parameters kk kk kk kK kk KK KK KK KK ee KK kk User Defined Function Parameters kK KK KK RR KK KK Predefined An Measurement alysis FUNCION 4 3 saa a a k ku a a eee Parameters ue kw dn Wall y e Eee eas Ad PRINT and PROBE Parameters WW KK KERR KK KK Multiply Parameter xilan a liliis BR Using Algebraic Expressions llle eese Built In Functions and Variables eee IR Parameter Scoping and PASSING s e XAR aes pP ec m Hoe i Library Integrity j lt yes cssc n Selwa ek eR De a ends Reusing Cells 77 79 79 79 80 85 92 105 105 107 109 111 114 114 119 123 124 130 130 131 133 133 133 135 136 137 137 137 137 138 139 143 144 144 Contents vi Creating Parameters in a Library llli KK RR KK RR KK String Parameter HSPICE Only KK KK KK KK KK KK Parameter Defaults and Inheritance 00000 Parameter Passing Solutions llis eese Testbench Elements
164. N 0 1 2 lt FBASE value gt lt FMAX value gt gt Parameter Description Lxxx Inductor element name Must begin with L followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters ni n2 Positive and negative terminal node names equation The equation should be a function of HERTZ If CONVOLUTION is turned on when a HERTZ keyword is not used in the equation CONVOLUTION is automatically be turned off and the inductor behaves conventionally The equation can be a function of temperature but it does not support variables of node voltage branch current or time If these variables exist in the equation with CONVOLUTION turned on only their values at the operating point are considered in the calculation CONVOLUTION Indicates which method is used 0 default Acts the same as the conventional method 1 Applies recursive convolution and if the rational function is not accurate enough it switches to linear convolution 2 Applies linear convolution 100 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Parameter Description FBASE Specifies the lower bound of the transient analysis frequency For CONVOLUTION 1 mode HSPICE starts sampling at this frequency For CONVOLUTION 2 mode HSPICE uses this value as the base frequency point for Inverse Fourier Transformation For recursive convolution the default value is OHZ For linear convolution HSPICE uses the reciprocal of the tr
165. NTE keyword for a Monte Carlo analysis or the OPTIMIZE keyword for optimization Generating Output Files HSPICE RF generates a table of simulation outputs If the output is text the default the text is put into a lis file If you specify OPTION POST then HSPICE RF generates simulation output in a format suitable for a waveform display tool The default output format for transient analysis in HSPICE RF is the same as in HSPICE the trO file format For additional information see Standard Output Files in the HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide The Synopsys interactive waveform display tool CosmosScope can display both the text simulation results and binary output within the X window environment All output functions PRINT PROBE MEASURE and so on can use power output variables in the form p devicename just as in HSPICE You can also use the power keyword Larger output files from multi million transistor simulations might not be readable by some waveform viewers Options are available that enable you to limit the output file size See Limiting Output Data Size on page 369 for more information HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 HSPICE RF Output File Types Table 3 shows the output file extensions that HSPICE RF analyses produce The base file name of each output file is the same as the input netlist file s base name The at the end of each file extension represents the ALTER run from whi
166. OS models MODEL ni NMOS LEVEL 3 THETA 0 4 MODEL pl PMOS LEVEL 3 Define power supplies and sources VDD VDD 0 5 VPULSE VIN 0 PULSE 0 5 2N 2N 2N 98N 200N VGND GND 0 0 Actual circuit topology M1 VOUT VIN VDD VDD pl M2 VOUT VIN GND GND n Analysis statement TRAN 1n 300n Output control statements OPTION POST PROBE PROBE V VIN V VOUT END For a description of individual commands used in HSPICE RF netlists see Chapter 3 RF Netlist Commands in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Heference Title of Simulation You set the simulation title in the first line of the input file HSPICE or HSPICE RF always reads this line and uses it as the title of the simulation regardless of the line s contents The simulation prints the title verbatim in each section heading of the output listing file To set the title you can place a TITLE statement on the first line of the netlist However HSPICE or HSPICE RF does not require the TITLE syntax The first line of the input file is always the implicit title If any statement appears as the first line in a file simulation interprets it as a title and does not execute it An ALTER statement does not support use the TITLE statement To change a title for a ALTER statement place the title content in the ALTER statement itself HSPICE RF User Guide 53 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry
167. PARHIER GLOBAL and one with OPTION PARHIER LOCAL Then look for differences in the output HSPICE RF User Guide 150 Y 2006 03 SP1 7 Testbench Elements Describes the specialized elements supported by HSPICE RF for high frequency analysis and characterization In addition to the elements described in the HSP ICE Elements and Device Models Manual HSPICE RF also supports several specialized elements for high frequency analysis and characterization Behavioral Passive Elements HSPICE RF accepts equation based resistors and capacitors You can specify the value of a resistor or capacitor as an arbitrary equation that involves node voltages or variable parameters Unlike HSPICE you cannot use parameters to indirectly reference node voltages in HSPICE RF Resistors The following general input syntax is for a resistor Rxxx nodel node2 modelname R resistance lt TCl val gt lt TC2 val gt lt TC val lt W val gt lt L val gt lt Mi val gt lt C val gt lt DTEMP val gt lt SCALE val gt Rxxx nodel node2 lt R gt equation Parameter Description Rxxx Name of a resistor node1 and node2 Names of the connecting nodes HSPICE RF User Guide 151 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Passive Elements Parameter Description modelname Name of the resistor model value Minimal resistance value in ohms R Resistance in
168. PICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines Parameter Description DTEMP Temperature difference between the element and the circuit Expressed in C The default is 0 0 NOISE Activates thermal noise 1 default element generates thermal noise 0 element is considered noiseless a Circuit temperature is specified by using the TEMP statement or by sweeping the global TEMP variable in DC AC or TRAN statements When neither TEMP or TEMP is used circuit temperature is set by using OPTION TNOM The default for TNOM is 25 C unless you use OPTION SPICE which has a default of 27 C You can use the DTEMP parameter to specify the temperature of the element You can set all optional parameters except MNAME in both the S element and the S model statement Parameters in element statements have higher priorities You must specify either the FOMODEL TSTONEFILE or CITIFILE parameter in either the S model or the S element statement When used with the generic frequency domain model MODEL SP an S scattering element is a convenient way to describe a multi terminal network Figure 12 Terminal Node Notation N 1 terminal system vinc 1 vinc N 2 il IN vref 1 vref N 4 ndi O oO ndN Iv VIN ndR reference node HSPICE RF User Guide 129 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines
169. PWL description that either Starts at a low value that supports oscillation and ramps up to a final value startup simulation Starts at the DC value and ramps down to zero shutdown simulation In addition to solving for the state variables at each envelope time point the ENVOSC command also solves for the frequency This command is intended to HSPICE RF User Guide 279 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 12 Envelope Analysis Envelope Simulation 280 be applied to high Q oscillators that take a long time to reach steady state For these circuits standard transient analysis is too costly Low Q oscillators such as typical ring oscillators are more efficiently simulated with standard transient analysis Example envosc tone 250Meg nharms 10 env step 20n env stop 10u probenode v5 0 1 25 Fast Fourier Transform Form ENVFFT output var NP value lt FORMAT keyword gt WINDOW keyword lt ALFA value gt Parameter Description output var Any valid output variable NP The number of points to use in the FFT analysis NP must be a power of 2 If not a power of 2 then it is automatically adjusted to the closest higher number that is a power of 2 The default is 1024 FORMAT Specifies the output format NORM normalized magnitude UNORM unnormalized magnitude default WINDOW Specifies the window type to use RECT simple rectangular truncation window default BART Bartlett triangular window HANN Hanning w
170. QSWEEP keyword Note The FREQSWEEP and POWERSWEEP keywords must appear at the end of an HBLSP statement Example This example does 2 port single tone power dependent S parameter extraction without frequency translation Frequency sweep The fundamental tone is swept from 0 to 1G Power sweep The power input at port 1 is swept from 6 to 10 Watts Five harmonics are required for the HB analysis Large signal S parameters are extracted on the first harmonic HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 249 Chapter 10 Power Dependent S Parameter Extraction Output Syntax Five harmonics are required in the HBLSP triggered HB analysis The DC value in p1 statement is used to set DC bias which is used to perform small signal analyses Small signal S parameters are required extracted Small signal two port noise analysis is required The data will be output to the ex1 p2d file pl 1 0 port 1 dc 1v p2 2 0 port 2 hblsp nharms 5 powerunit watt sspcalc 1 noisecalc 1 filename ex1 freqsweep lin 5 0 1G powersweep lin 5 6 10 Output Syntax 250 This section describes the syntax for the HBLSP PRINT and PROBE statements These statements only support S and noise parameter outputs Node voltage branch current and all other parameters are not supported in HBLSP PRINT and PROBE statements PRINT and PROBE Statements PRINT HBLSP Smn Smn TYPE S m n S m n TYPE Small sign
171. SE FALL nodel lt node2 gt lt hi lo hi th low th gt CHECK HOLD ref RISE FALL duration RISE FALL nodel lt node2 gt lt hi lo hi th low th gt For a SETUP condition this is the minimum time before the triggering event during which the specified nodes cannot rise or fall Figure 49 SETUP Example v1 nodeA i HI thresh LO thresh LO 4 t gt 2ns For syntax and description of this statement see CHECK SETUP in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference For a HOLD condition this is minimum time required after the triggering event before the specified nodes can rise or fall 380 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features POWER DC Analysis Figure 50 HOLD Example vin nodeA _ HI _ HI thresh LO thresh LO gt t gt 2ns For syntax and description of this statement see CHECK HOLD in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference IR Drop Detection You use the CHECK IRDROP statement to verify that the IR drop does not exceed or does not fall below a specified value for a specified duration For example CHECK IRDROP volt val time nodel lt node2 gt lt hi lo hi th low th gt Figure 51 IR Drop Example i t lt 1ns For syntax and description of this statement see CHECK IRDROP in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference POW
172. SNF outputs a double side band noise figure as a function of the IFB points DSNF 10 Log DSF Double side band noise factor DSF Total Noise at output at the OFB originating from all frequencies Load Noise originating from the OFB Input Source Noise originating from the IFB and from the image of IFB Output Data Files An HBNOISE analysis produces these output data files Output from the PRINT statement is written to a printpn file Output from the PROBE statement is written to a pn file Both the printon and pn files output data against the input frequency band points Standard output information is written to a lis file e simulation time e HBNOISE linear solver method e HBNOISE simulation time e total simulation time 262 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Multitone Nonlinear Steady State Analysis HBNOISE Measuring HBNOISE Analyses with MEASURE Note A MEASURE HBNOISE statement cannot contain an expression that uses a HBNOISE variable as an argument Also you cannot use a MEASURE HBNOISE statement for error measurement and expression evaluation of HBNOISE The MEASURE HBNOISE syntax supports four types of measurements Find when MEASURE HBNOISE result FIND out vari At Input Frequency Band value The previous measurement yields the result of a variable value at a specific IFB point MEA
173. SPICE can generate a 3 sigma variation in IDS from a 2 sigma variation in physically measured parameters Figure 28 Worst Case Corners Library File for a CMOS Process Model pop SS Slow Corner Skew Parameters Extracted Skew Parameters TT Typical Corner Skew Parameters Gaussian FF Fast Corner Skew Parameters IDS The LIB library statement and the INCLUDE include file statement access the models and skew The library contains parameters that modify MODEL statements The following example of LIB features both HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case Analysis worst case and statistical distribution data by using model skew parameters In statistical distribution the median value is the default for all non Monte Carlo analysis Example LIB TT STYPICAL P CHANNEL AND N CHANNEL CMOS LIBRARY DATE 3 4 91 PROCESS 1 0U CMOS FAB22 STATISTICS COLLECTED 3 90 2 91 following distributions are 3 sigma ABSOLUTE GAUSSIAN PARAM polysilicon Critical Dimensions polycd agauss 0 0 06u 1 xl 2 polycd sigma 0 06u Active layer Critical Dimensions nactcd agauss 0 0 3u 1 xwn nactcd sigma 0 3u pactcd agauss 0 0 3u 1 xwp pactcd sigma 0 3u Gate Oxide Critical Dimensions 200 angstrom 10a at 1 sigma toxcd agauss 200 10 1 tox toxcd sigma 10 440 4 404 40 Ur Threshold voltage
174. SURE HBNOISE result FIND out varl WHEN out var2 out var3 The previous measurement yields the result at the input frequency point when out var2 out var3 MEASURE HBNOISE result WHEN out var2 out var3 The previous measurement yields the input frequency point when out var2 out vara Average RMS min max and peak to peak MEASURE HBNOISE result RMS out var lt FROM IFB1 gt lt TO IFB2 gt Integral evaluation MEASURE HBNOISE result INTEGRAL out_var lt FROM IFB1 gt lt TO IFB2 gt This measurement integrates the out_var value from the IFB1 frequency to the IFB2 frequency Derivative evaluation MEASURE HBNOISE result DERIVATIVE out var AT IFB1 This measurement finds the derivative of out var at the IFB1 frequency point HSPICE RF User Guide 263 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Multitone Nonlinear Steady State Analysis HBNOISE 264 Note MEASURE HBNOISE cannot contain an expression that uses an hbnoise variable as an argument You also cannot use MEASURE HBNOISE for error measurement and expression evaluation of HBNOISE The HSPICE RF optimization flow can read the measured data from a MEASURE HBNOISE analysis This flow can be combined in the HSPICE RF optimization routine with a MEASURE HBTR analysis see Using MEASURE with HB Analyses on page 219 and a MEASURE PHASENOISE analysis see Measuring PHASENOISE Analys
175. Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis 216 Power Delivered to a Port Element The port element can be either a source or sink for power You can use a special calculation that computes the power flowing into a port element even if the port element itself is the source of that power In the following figure is a port element connected to a circuit the port element may or may not include a voltage source Figure 18 Port Element Zo In ANN e Port icd Element Circuit Let V be the peak voltage across the terminals of the port element at frequency index n Let Il be the peak current into the 1st terminal of the port element at frequency index n Let Z be the impedance value of the z0 port element Then the power wave flowing into the terminals of the port element at frequency index n can be computed according to 1 Pin 2 V Zl a This power expression remains valid whether or not the port element includes an internal voltage source at the same frequency If the port element includes a voltage source at the same frequency you can use this power calculation to compute the magnitude of the related large signal scattering parameters If you expand the preceding formula the power delivered to a port element with real impedance Z is given by Val Zo uu js born 1 m er HSPICE RF User Guide Y 20
176. T option to limit the waveform output to only the nodes in the specified subcircuit instance For example OPTION SIM POSTAT instance This option can be used in conjunction with the SIM POSTTOP option and when present has precedence over the STM POSTSKIP option For additional information see OPTION SIM POSTAT in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference 370 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Probing Subcircuit Currents SIM POSTDOWN Option You use the SIM POSTDOWN option to include an instance and all children of that instance in the output For example OPTION SIM POSTDOWN instance It can be used in conjunction with the SIM POSTTOP option and when present has precedence over the SIM POSTSKIP option For additional information see OPTION SIM POSTDOWN in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference SIM POSTSCOPE Option You use the SIM POSTSCOPE option to specify the signal types to probe from within a scope For example OPTION SIM POSTSCOPE net port all For additional information see OPTION SIM POSTSCOPE in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Probing Subcircuit Currents To provide subcircuit power probing utilities HSPICE RF uses the X and XO extended output variables You can use these X variables in PROBE PRINT or MEASURE statements The following syntax is for the output variable X X subcircuit_node_path XO subcircuit node path
177. T 1 92e9 TARG P Rload 1 VAL 1 CROSS 2 1W oper range MEASURE HB ssGain DERIV P Rload 1 AT 1e 5 relative power gain at 10uW input MEASURE HB Gain3rd DERIV P Rload 3 AT 1e 5 3rd harmonic gain at 10uW input MEASURE HB PAE1W FIND P Rload 1 power P Vdc 0 WHEN P Rload 1 1 PAE at 1 Watt output Example 3 In this example the independent variable is again the power variable and the MEASURE values return results based on the power sweep This is a two tone sweep where both input frequency sources are at the same power level in Watts HARMONIC BALANCE two tone sweep for amplifier An IP3 calculation is made at 10uW in the sweep param freq1 1 91e9 freg2 1 91e9 power 1e 3 HB tones fregql freq2 nharms 6 6 sweep power DEC 10 1e 6 1e 3 MEASURE HB PfldBm FIND 10 LOG P Rload 1 0 1 e 3 AT 1e 5 P f1 at 10uW input MEASURE HB P2f1 f2dBm FIND 10 LOG P Rload 2 1 1 e 3 AT 1e 5 P 2f1 f2 at 10uW input MEASURE HB OIP3dBm PARAM 0 5 3 PfldBm P2f1 f2dBm MEASURE HB IIP3dBm PARAM OIP3dBm Pf 1dBm 20 0 MEASURE HB AM2PM DERIV VP outp outn 1 AT 1e 5 AM to PM Conversion in Deg Watt HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis HB Output Data Files If you do not specify an HB sweep then MEASURE assumes a single valued independent variable sweep You can apply the measurements to current voltage
178. This chapter describes how to do this as well as how to invoke HSPICE RF and redirect input and output Creating a Configuration File You can create a configuration file called hspicerf to customize your HSPICE RF simulation HSPICE RF first searches for hspicerf in your current working directory then in your home directory as defined by SHOME The configuration options listed in Table 27 are available for your use HSPICE RF User Guide 365 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Creating a Configuration File Table 27 Configuration File Options Keyword Description Example flush waveform ground floating node hier delimiter html integer node max waveform size 366 Flushes a waveform If you do not specify a percentage then the default value is 2096 Uses IC statements to set floating nodes in a circuit to ground You can select three options for grounding floating nodes lf set to 1 grounds only floating nodes gates bulk control nodes non rail bulk that are included in the IC set fsetto 2 adds unconnected terminals to this set If set to 3 uses IC statements to ground all floating nodes including dangling terminals Changes the delimiter for subcircuit hierarchies from to the specified symbol Stores all HSPICE RF output in HTML format Removes leading zeros from node names For example HSPICE RF considers 0002 and 2 to be the same node Without
179. U The preceding example specifies a MOSFET named M1 where drain node ADDR gate node SIG1 source node GND substrate nodes SBS The preceding element statement calls an associated model statement N1 The MOSFET dimensions are width 100 microns and length 10 microns Example 2 M1 ADDR SIG1 GND SBS N1 wi w 1141 The preceding example specifies a MOSFET named M1 where drain node ADDR gate node SIG1 source node GND Substrate nodes SBS The preceding element statement calls an associated model statement N1 MOSFET dimensions are algebraic expressions width w1 w and length 11 1 HSPICE RF User Guide 57 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition 58 Defining Subcircuits You can create a subcircuit description for a commonly used circuit and include one or more references to the subcircuit in your netlist Use SUBCKT and MACRO statements to define subcircuits within your HSPICE netlist or HSPICE RF u Use the ENDS statement to terminate a SUBCKT statement Use the EOM statement to terminate a MACRO statement UseX subcircuit name the subcircuit call statement to call a subcircuit that you previously defined in a MACRO or SUBCKT command in your netlist where subcircuit name is the element name of the subcircuit that you are calling This subcircuit element name can be up to 15 characters long Use the INCLUDE statement
180. Variations with Monte Carlo It is also possible to mix variations on instance parameters and model parameters in the same setup test16 sp has small instance parameter variations specified on width and relatively large model parameter variations on the sheet resistivity rsh The results show four different waveforms with a common behavior testi7 sp shows instance and model parameter variations as in the previous test case but option modmonte is set to 1 thus the model variations affect every device in a different way The results show completely independent behavior of all four resistors If an instance parameter or instance parameter variations and model parameter variations are specified on the same parameter then the instance parameter always overrides the model parameter Because only few parameters can be used in both domains this case is rather seldom but it needs to be considered to avoid unexpected results test18 sp has model variation specified on width with a parameter Two resistors have width also defined on instance The resistors with instance parameter do not vary at all The other two resistors vary independently as expected because option modmonte is set to 1 testi9 spis similar to test18 sp with option modmonte set to 0 The two resistors that do not have width defined on the instance line vary together test20 sp has DEV LOT specified Instance parameters override variations on selected resi
181. Waveform Display on page 12 HSPICE RF Features This section briefly introduces the features of both the simulation engine and the waveform display tool HSPICE RF supports most HSPICE capabilities and also includes Steady state frequency domain analyses for linear and nonlinear circuits High performance transient analysis for faster simulation of high speed digital and analog circuits Port wise automated AC analyses for S scattering parameters The LIN command invokes extraction of noise and linear transfer parameters of a multi port linear network Extracts the S parameter and generates the N port model This command is used in conjunction with the AC command to measure multiport S Y and Z parameters noise parameters stability and gain factors and matching coefficients Additionally it is used with the Port element which identifies the network ports and their impedances You can also use mixed mode with LIN The Port P element identifies ports used in LIN analysis multiport S Y or Z parameter and noise parameter extraction A port element behaves as a noiseless impedance or a voltage source in series with an impedance depending on the simulation being performed Different impedances can be specified for DC transient AC HB and HBAC analyses The S element describes a linear network using multi port S Y or Z parameters in the form of a frequency table These parameters can come from a LIN simulatio
182. X1 of the INV cell macro which consists of two MOSFETs named MN and MP X1 IN OUT VD_LOCAL VS LOCAL inv W 20 MACRO INV IN OUT VDD VSS W 10 L 1 DJUNC 0 MP OUT IN VDD VDD PCH W W L L DTEMP DJUNC MN OUT IN VSS VSS NCH W W 2 L L DTEMP DJUNC EOM Note To access the name of the MOSFET inside of the INV subcircuit that x1 calls the names are X1 MP and X1 MN So to print the current that flows through the MOSFETs use PRINTI X1 MP Hierarchical Parameters You can use two hierarchical parameters the M multiply parameter and the S scale parameter M Multiply Parameter The most basic HSPICE RF subcircuit parameter is the M multiply parameter This keyword is common to all elements including subcircuits except for voltage sources The M parameter multiplies the internal component values HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Using Subcircuits which in effect creates parallel copies of the element To simulate 32 output buffers switching simultaneously you need to place only one subcircuit for example X1 in out buffer M 32 Figure 8 How Hierarchical Multiply Works X1 in out inv M22 e M 8 J e lt mp out in vdd pch W 10 L 1 M 4 lt M 6 e E mn out in vss nch W 5 L 1 M 3 UNEXPANDED EXPANDED Multiply works hierarchically For a subcircuit within a subcircuit HSPICE RF multipli
183. a DC source and the DC source value is the time 0 value 1 HB analysis uses the transient description if its value is VMRF SIN PULSE PWL or LFSR If the type is a non repeating PWL source then the time infinity value is used as a DC source value For example the following statement is treated as a DC source with value 1 for HB vi 10 PWL 0 0 1n 1 1u 1 TRANFORHB 1 In contrast the following statement is a OV DC source vi 10 PWL 0 0 1n 11u 1 TRANFORHB 0 The following statement is treated as a periodic source with a 1us period that uses PWL values v1 10 PWL 0 0 1n 1 0 999u 1 1u 0 R TRANFORHB 1 To override the global TRANFORHB option explicitly set TRANFORHB for a V I source Example 1 This example shows an HB source for a single tone analysis hb tones 100MHz harms 7 I1 12 dc 1mA hb 3mA O 1 1 I1is a current source with a the following time domain description Il 1mA 3mA cos 2 pi 1 e8 t Example 2 This example shows HB sources used for a two tone analysis hb tones 1 e9 1 1e9 intmodmax 5 Vin lo 0 dc 0 hb 1 5 90 1 1 Vrf rf 0 dc 0 hb 0 2012 These sources have the following time domain descriptions Vin 1 5 cos 2 pi 1l e9 t 90 pi 180 V Vrf 0 2 cos 2 pi 1 1e9 t V HSPICE RF User Guide 183 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Steady State HB Sources Example 3 The following HB source uses a modtone and modharms hb tones 2 e9 1 9e9 harms 5 5 Vm input gnd dc 0 5 hb 0 2 0 11 12 Vm ha
184. ad of ignoring all parasitic information for this net HSPICE RF includes these options to connect a lumped capacitor with a value equal to the net capacitance to this net Default ON adds lumped capacitance ignores other net contents SIM DSPF INSERROR HSPICE RF supports options to skip the unmatched Or instance and continue the evaluation of the next instance SIM SPEF INSERROR The default is OFF ON skips unmatched instances and continues the evaluation SIM SPEF PARVALUE This option affects only values in a SPEF file that have triplet format float float float which this option interprets as best average worst In such cases f SIM SPEF PARVALUE 1 HSPICE RF uses best If SIM_SPEF_PARVALUE 2 default HSPICE RF uses average f SIM SPEF PARVALUE 3 HSPICE RF uses worst Unsupported SPEF Options HSPICE RF does not yet support the following IEEE 481 SPEF options Hierarchical SPEF definition multiple SPEF files connected with a hierarchical definition DEFINE and PDEFINE R NET and R PNET definition D PNET definition HSPICE RF User Guide 291 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Selective Extraction Flow Use the selective extraction flow if disk space is limited Especially use this option when simulating a full chip post layout design where block latency is high HSPICE RF feedbacks the active net information to Star RCXT to extract only the acti
185. ain solver The absolute error tolerance for determining convergence Must be a real number that is greater than zero The default is 1 e 9 211 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis 212 Table 15 HB Analysis Options Continued Option Description LOADHB LOADHB filename loads the state variable information contained in the specified file These values are used to initialize the HB simulation SAVEHB SAVEHD filename saves the final state that is the no sweep point or the steady state of the first sweep point variable values from a HB simulation in the specified file This file can be loaded as the starting point for another simulation by using a LOADHB option TRANFORHB TRANFORHB 1 forces HB to recognize V I sources that include SIN PULSE VMRF and PWL transient descriptions and to use them in analysis However if the source also has an HB description analysis uses the HB description instead TRANFORHB 0 forces HB to ignore transient descriptions of V I sources and to use only HB descriptions To override this option specify TRANFORHB in the source description Harmonic Balance Output Measurements This section explains the harmonic balance output measurements you receive after HSPICE runs an HB simulation Harmonic Balance Signal Representation The HB cosine sources can be interpreted in real imaginary and polar formats according to t Acos
186. al 2 port noise params PROBE HBLSP Smn Smn TYPE S m n S m n TYPE Small signal 2 port noise params Parameter Description Smn Smn TYPE Complex 2 port parameters Where S m n S m n TYPE m 1or2 n 1or2 TYPE R I M P PD D DB or DBM R real imaginary M magnitude P PD phase in degrees D DB decibels DBM decibels per 1 0e 3 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 10 Power Dependent S Parameter Extraction Output Data Files Parameter Description small signal 2 port noise G ASI NF I RN I YOPT GAMMA OPT NFMIN parameters VN2 ZCOR GN RHON YCOR ZOPT IN2 For a description of these parameters see Linear Network Parameter Analysis in the HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide Output Data Files An HBLSP analysis produces these output data files The large signal S parameters from the PRINT statement are written to a printls file The small signal S parameters from the PRINT statement are written to a printss file The large signal S parameters from the PROBE statement are written to a ls file The small signal S parameters from the PROBE statement are written to a ss file The extracted large and small signal S and noise parameters are written to a p2d file The large and small signal S parameters from the PROBE statement are viewable in CosmosScope HSPICE RF User Guide 251 Y 2006
187. al delay for timing simulation You can simultaneously vary any number of parameters and perform an unlimited number of analyses This analysis uses an ASCII file format so HSPICE RF can automatically generate parameter values This analysis can replace hundreds or thousands of HSPICE RF simulation runs Use yield analyses to modify DC operating points DC sweeps AC sweeps Transient analysis HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Simulating Circuit and Model Temperatures CosmosScope can generate scatter plots from the operating point analysis or a family of curve plots for DC AC and transient analysis Use MEASURE statements to save results for delay times power or any other characteristic extracted in a MEASURE statement HSPICE RF generates a table of results in an mt file in ASCII format You can analyze the numbers directly or read this file into CosmosScope to view the distributions Also if you use MEASURE statements in a Monte Carlo or data driven analysis then the HSPICE RF output file includes the following statistical results in the listing X Xa Xx Mean ea N x Mean x Mean Varian ariance Wo Sigma A Variance w Mean Ix Mean Deviation Average Deviatio Wo Simulating Circuit and Model Temperatures Temperature affects all electrical circuits Figure 26 shows the key temperature parameters associated with circuit
188. alysis except that the circuit is first linearized about a periodically varying operating point instead of a simple DC operating point After the linearization ihe S parameters between circuit ports that convert signals from one frequency band to another are calculated You use the HBLIN statement to extract frequency translation S parameters and noise figures Frequency translation S parameter describes the capability of a periodically linear time varying systems to shift signals in frequency The S parameters for a frequency translation system are similar to the S parameters of a linear time varying system it is defined as b w mat 7 S y i dy j p n W 70 The incident waves a w and reflected waves 5 w are defined by using these equations j Vi w nwo Zo 1 w nwg 2 440i Vi w nwg Zo 1 w nwo Ln 2 Zi Where wg is the fundamental frequency tone nisa signed integer j is the port number j w is the input wave at the frequency w nw on the ith port bj w is the reflected wave at the frequency w nw on the ith port HSPICE RF User Guide 265 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Frequency Translation S Parameter HBLIN Extraction 266 V w nw is the Fourier coefficient at the frequency w nw of the voltage at port i w wng is the Fourier coefficient at the frequency w nw of the current at port i
189. ame of the subcircuit containing this port Parent Identifies the parents of the Port Current Name Dep Up Depth count of Port Current Name from top of hierarchy HSPICE RF User Guide 385 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features POWER Analysis Column Description Dep Dn Depth count of Port Current Name from bottom of hierarchy Max A Maximum current flowing through the Port You can specify more than one local maximum current value Min A Minimum current flowing through the Port You can specify more than one local minimum current value Avg A Average current flowing through the Port RMS A Root Mean Square RMS current flowing through the Port Tabulated data increases your analysis capability based on the data generated in this format you can analyze Sub circuits that consume a maximum amount of power Leaf nodes that consume a maximum amount of power Parents power Example REF NEW FROM 0 000e 00 TO 5 000e 7 Signal Port Current Definition Dep Dep Name Name Parent Up Dn Max A Min A Avg A RMS A 14 XINV OUT STAGE_100 1 2 3 1 580 1 615 1 155e 1 569 e 09 e 09 14 e 11 21 XINV XI1 DUT STAGE 10 17 3 2 1 667 1 524 1 946 2 825 e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 28 XINV XI1 XRI INVERTER 24 4 1 7 981 8 409 1 730 2 008 N1 OUT e 04 e 04 e 08 e 05 43 XINV XI1 XRI INVERTER 25 4 1 1 426 1 314 1 110 2 584 N2 OUT e 03 e 03 e 08 e 05 58 XINV XI1 XRI INVERTER 26 4 1 1 670 1 500 1 257
190. amples and additional HSPICE user information Provides reference information for HSPICE commands Describes standard models you can use when simulating your circuit designs in HSPICE including passive devices diodes JFET and MESFET devices and BJT devices Describes standard MOSFET models you can use when simulating your circuit designs in HSPICE Describes a special set of analysis and design capabilities added to HSPICE to support RF and high speed circuit design Describes the AvanWaves tool which you can use to display waveforms generated during HSPICE circuit design simulation Provides key reference information for using HSPICE including syntax and descriptions for commands options parameters elements and more Provides key reference information for using HSPICE device models including passive devices diodes JFET and MESFET devices and BJT devices Searching Across the HSPICE Documentation Set Synopsys includes an index with your HSPICE documentation that lets you search the entire HSPICE documentation set for a particular topic or keyword In a single operation you can instantly generate a list of hits that are hyperlinked to the occurrences of your search term For information on how to perform searches across multiple PDF documents see the HSPICE release notes available on SolvNet at http solvnet synopsys com ReleaseNotes or the Adobe Reader online help HSPICE RF User Guide XV Y 2006 03 SP
191. ance When plotting the simulation results v1 v2 v3 and v4 from the meas file the waveforms overlay perfectly This type of setup is typically used to model global variations which means variations that affect all devices the same way tiest2 sp has a distribution parameter defined called locwidth This parameter is used to define the width of the physical resistors r1 r2 r3 and r4 with model resistor Since the parameter has its own distribution defined its value will be different for each reference and of course for each Monte Carlo sample Therefore the resistors will always have different values and the voltages will be different This type of setup is typically used to model local variations which means variations that affect devices in a different way test3 sphastwo kinds of distributions defined globw globwidth as in the first example and locwidth as in the second example The sum of the two is used to define the width of the resistors Therefore the resistors will always have different widths a common variation due to globwidth and a separate variation due to locwidth In the example the distribution for locwidth was chosen as narrower than for globwidth When overlaying the measurement results the large common variation can easily be seen however all voltages are different In summary each reference to a parameter with a specified distribution causes a new random variable to be generated for each Monte Carlo
192. and Local Variations with Monte Carlo Monte Carlo analysis is dependent on a method to describe variability Four different approaches are available in HSPICE RF specify distributions on parameters and apply these to instance parameters specify distributions on parameters and apply these to model parameters specify distributions on model parameters using DEV LOT construct specify distributions on model parameters in a variation block While the first three methods are still supported in HSPICE RF the method based on the variation block emphasized here for improvements and future developments The variation block is described in Chapter 14 Variation Block and Monte Carlo analysis controlled by the variation block is described in Chapter 15 Monte Carlo Analysis In the following sections the first three methods are described The description relies on test cases which can be found in the tar file monte test tar in directory lt installdir gt demo hspice apps Variations Specified on Geometrical Instance Parameters This method consists of defining parameters with variation using the distribution functions UNIF AUINF GAUSS AGAUSS and LIMIT These parameters are then used to generate dependent parameters or in the place of instance parameters In a Monte Carlo simulation at the beginning of each sample new random values are calculated for these parameters For each reference a new random value is generated however no ne
193. and phase Specify the frequency in the HBAC command Change the HB command to single tone HB tones 1g nharms 6 HBAC takes care of the second tone Adda HBAC command HBAC lin 1 0 8g 0 8g This command runs an analysis at a single frequency point 0 8 GHz In general HBAC analysis can sweep the RF frequency over a range of values The following is the complete mix hbac sp netlist for HBAC analysis of this simple mixer This netlist also contains commands for performing periodic noise analysis It is available in directory lt installdir gt demo hspicerf examples Ideal mixer example HBAC analysis OPTIONS POST vlo lo 0 1 0 sin 1 0 0 5 1 0g 0 0 90 HB 0 5 011 rrfl rfl rf 1 0 gl 0 if curz 1 0 v lo v rf mixer element cl 0 if g 1 0e 9 v lo v rf mixer element rout if ifg 1 0 vctrl ifg 0 0 0 hi out O vctrl 1 0 convert I to V HSPICE RF User Guide 39 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 6 Mixer 40 rhi out 0 1 0 vrf rfl 0 sin 0 0 001 0 8GHz 0 0 114 HBAC 0 001 24 opt sim accuracy 100 hb tones 1g nharms 6 hbac lin 1 0 8g 0 8g Noise analysis hbnoise v out rrfl lin 40 0 1g 4g print hbnoise onoise nf probe hbnoise onoise nf end Comparing Results After running all three netlists above you will have generated 3 output files mix tran trO mix hb hbO mix hbac hbO You can compare the results of the 3 analyses in CosmosScope 1 To run the
194. and power waveforms The independent variable for measurements is the swept variable such as power not the frequency axis corresponding to a single HB steady state point HSPICE RF also supports the MEASURE HBTRAN HBTR syntax Similar to the PROBE and PRINT HBTR statements in the section Calculating for a Time Domain Output on page 218 a MEASURE HBTR statement is applied on the signals obtained in the same way Moreover like a MEASURE statement in transient analysis the independent variable in a MEASURE HBTR statement is time HSPICE RF optimization can read the data from MEASURE HB and MEASURE HBTR statements The optimization syntax in HSPICE RF is identical to that in the HSPICE for details see Statistical Analysis and Optimization in the HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide Due to the difference in the independent variable between the MEASURE HB and MEASURE HBTR statements these two types of measurements cannot be mixed in a HSPICE RF optimization But a MEASURE HBTR statement can be combined with a MEASURE PHASENOISE statement see Measuring PHASENOISE Analyses with MEASURE on page 239 and a MEASURE HBNOISE statement see Measuring HBNOISE Analyses with MEASURE on page 263 in a HSPICE RF optimization flow HB Output Data Files The results of an HB analysis are complex spectral components at each frequency point The a i is the real part and b i is the imaginary part of the complex vo
195. ansient period FMAX Specifies the possible maximum frequency of interest The default value is the frequency point where the function reaches close enough to infinity value assuming that the monotonous function is approaching the infinity value and that it is taken at 10THz Example L1 1 2 L 0 5n 0 5n 1 HERTZ 1e8 CONVOLUTION 1 fbase 10 fmax 30meg AC Choke Inductors Syntax Lxxx nodel node2 L INFINITY IC val When the inductance of an inductor is infinity this element is called an AC choke In HSPICE you specify an INFINITY value for inductors HSPICE does not support any other inductor parameters because it assumes that the infinite inductance value is independent of temperature and scaling factors The AC choke acts as a short circuit for all DC analyses and HSPICE calculates the DC current through the inductor In all other non DC analyses a DC current source of this value represents the choke HSPICE does not allow di dt variations To properly simulate power line inductors with HSPICE RF either set them to analog mode or invoke the SIM RAIL option OPTION SIM ANALOG L1 Or OPTION SIM RATL ON HSPICE RF User Guide 101 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Reluctors Syntax Reluctance Inline Form Lxxx nlp nin nNp nNn RELUCTANCE rl c1 vall r2 c2 val2 rm cm valm SHORTALL yes no IGNORE COUPLING yes no Reluctance External File F
196. ant DC source In AC analysis the source is a short or an open unless you specify an AC value n HB analysis you must specify OPTION TRANFORHB on the source statement line The TRANFORHB option supports the VMHF signal source as well as the SIN PULSE and PWL sources The VMRF quadrature signal source typically involves an HF carrier signal that is modulated with a baseband signal on a much different time scale You must set source and simulation control parameters appropriately to avoid time consuming simulations in both the time and frequency domains HSPICE RF User Guide 197 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Complex Signal Sources and Stimuli 198 E F G and H Element Statements For E F G and H elements you can use the VMRF function to modulate I t and Q t signals with a RF carrier signal The and Q signal are driven by PWL sources that might be generated by an external tool such as MATLAB The PWL source accepts a text file containing time and voltage or current pairs When the VMRF function is used with controlled sources it is anticipated that the in phase I and quadrature Q signals are not digital but continuous time analog signals The VMRF function therefore includes no filtering and merely serves to create the complex modulation on the RF carrier Exxx n n lt VCVS gt VMRF lt gt Iin Iin Qin Qin FREQ fc PHASE ph lt SCALE A gt lt gt Fxxx n n lt CCCS gt VMRF
197. applications Although the HSPICE and HSPICE RF simulators share a common set of device models and simulation capabilities HSPICE RF includes several modeling simulation and measurement additions that augment the ultimate accuracy analog circuit simulation capabilities of HSPICE Note This manual describes the additional features and capabilities of HSPICE RF Where necessary the manual describes differences between HSPICE RF and HSPICE For information about standard HSPICE device models syntax and simulation control you can refer to one of the other HSPICE manuals in the HSPICE documentation set listed in The HSPICE Documentation Set on page xiv HSPICE RF Overview HSPICE RF consists of The hspicerf simulation engine The CosmosScope cscope waveform display tool The hspicerf simulation engine contains extensions to HSPICE for RF design These extensions are in the form of new analysis commands and new elements The hspicerf simulation engine processes command and element syntax for new RF simulation features but also accepts standard HSPICE netlist files as input HSPICE RF User Guide 1 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 1 HSPICE RF Features and Functionality HSPICE RF Overview The CosmosScope waveform display tool has been enhanced with special features for reading and analyzing data created by the HSPICE RF simulation engine For a basic overview on how to use CosmosScope to view HSPICE RF output see Using the CosmosScope
198. aram lv2 xInv0O Mp1 lv2 is the template for measure tran Widl param lv2 xInvl1 Mp1 the channel width lv2 xInv1 Mp1 ENDS Simulating this netlist produces the following results in the listing file wid0 1 0000E 06 widl 1 0000E 06 If you change the OPTION PARHIER parameter scoping option to LOCAL xInvO a yO Inv not override param DefPwid 2u xlInvO Mpl width 2u xInvl a yl Inv DefPwid 5u override param DefPwid 2u xlInvl Mpl width 5u measure tran WidO param lv2 xInv0O Mp1 override the measure tran Widl param lv2 xInvl1 Mp1 global PARAM HSPICE RF User Guide 148 Y 2006 03 SP1 Simulation produces the following results in the listing file wid0 2 0000E 06 widl 5 0000E 06 Parameter Passing Figure 14 on page 149 shows a flat representation of a hierarchical circuit which contains three resistors Each of the three resistors obtains its simulation time resistance from the Val parameter The netlist defines the Val parameter in four places with three different values Figure 14 Hierarchical Parameter Passing Problem TEST OF PARHIER OPTION list node post 2 ingold 2 Sub1 Sub2 Sub3 parhier lt Local Global gt PARAM Val 1 xl n0 0 Subl SubCkt Sub1 n1 n2 Val 1 r n n2 Val M r1 r2 r3 x2 n n2 Sub2 Ends Subl SubCkt Sub2 n1 n2 Val 2 1V r2 n1 n2 Val x3 nl n2 Sub3 Ends Sub2 SubCkt Sub3 n1 n2 Val 3 r3 n1 n2 Val Ends Sub3 OP END
199. arameters and noise parameters AC DEC 50 100MEG 5G LIN noisecalc 1 sparcalc 1 PRINT S11 DB S21 DB S12 DB S22 DB NFMIN kk Approximate parameters for TSMC 0 25 Process MOSIS run T17B k MODEL CMOSN NMOS LEVEL 49 VERSTION ROCA TNOM 27 TOX 5 8E 9 TXJ 1E 7 NCH 2 23549E17 VTHO 0 3819327 K1 0 477867 K2 2 422759E 3 K3 1E 3 K3B 2 1606637 WO 1E 7 NLX 1 57986E 7 DVTOW 0 DVT1LW 2e DVT2W 0 DVTO 0 5334651 DVT1 0 7186877 DVT2 0 5 U0 289 1720829 UA 1 300598E 9 UB 2 3082E 18 UC 2 841618E 11 VSAT 1 482651E5 AO 1 6856991 AGS 0 2874763 BO 1 833193E 8 B1 1E 7 KETA 2 395348E 3 Al 0 A2 0 4177975 RDSW 178 7751373 PRWG 0 3774172 PRWB 0 2 WR EL WINT 0 LINT 1 88839E 8 XL 3E 8 XW 4E 8 DWG 1 2139E 8 DWB 4 613042E 9 VOFF 0 0981658 NFACTOR 1 2032376 CIT a CDSC 2 4E 4 CDSCD 0 CDSCB 0 ETAO 5 128492E 3 ETAB 6 18609E 4 DSUB 0 0463218 PCLM 1 91946 PDIBLC1 zi PDIBLC2 4 422611E 3 PDIBLCB 0 1 DROUT 0 9817908 PSCBE1 7 982649E10 PSCBE2 5 200359E 10 PVAG 9 31443E 3 DELTA 0 01 RSH an WT MOBMOD zc PRT 0 UTE 1 5 KT1 0 11 KT1L zu KT2 z 0022 UAL 4 31E 9 HSPICE RF User Guide 17 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 1 Low Noise Amplifier UB1 7 61E 18 UC1 5 6E 11 AT 3 3E4 WL 0 WLN 1 WW 0 WWN 1 WWL 0 LL 0 LLN 1 LW 0 LWN 1 LWL 0 CAP
200. ariable over the values contained in the SWEEPBLOCK Example dc vinl 0 5 0 1 vin2 sweepblock vin2vals Using in Parameter Sweeps in TRAN AC and HB Analyses To use the sweepblock in parameter sweeps on TRAN AC and HB commands and any other commands that allow parameter sweeps use the following syntax variable sweepblock swblockname Example 1 tran 1n 100n sweep rout sweepblock rvals AC and HBAC analysis frequency sweeps can use sweepblock swblockname to specify the frequency values Example 2 ac sweepblock freqsweep HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements References Limitations You cannot use recursive SWEEPBLOCK specifications That is a SWEEPBLOCK command cannot refer to another SWEEPBLOCK to build its list of values You cannot include data sweeps in a SWEEPBLOCK statement References 1 L J Greenstein and M Shafi Microwave Digital Radio IEEE Press 1988 2 N Sheikholeslami and P Kabal A Family of Nyquist Filters Based on Generalized Raised Cosine Spectra Proceedings of the 19th Biennial Symposium on Communications Kingston Ontario pages 131 135 June 1998 HSPICE RF User Guide 203 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements References 204 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Describes how to use harmonic balance analysis for frequency driven steady state analysis HSPICE RF provi
201. ase and Monte Carlo Sweep Example Leff Ldrawn 2 DEL The model poly distribution is half the physical per side values Cla 1 0 CMOD W ELPOLY L ELPOLY Clb 1 0 CMOD W ELPOLY L ELPOLY C1C 1 0 CMOD W ELPOLY L ELPOLY CID 1 0 CMOD W ELPOLY L ELPOLY 10U POLYWIDTH 0 05U 1SIGMA CAP MODEL USES 2 MODPOLY 05u 1 sigma 5angstrom oxide thickness AT 1SIGMA PARAM ELPOLY AGAUSS 10U 0 02U 1 MODPOLY AGAUSS 0 05U 1 POLYCAP AGAUSS 200e 10 5e 10 1 MODEL CMOD C THICK POLYCAP DEL MODPOLY Electrical Approach The electrical approach assumes no physical interpretation but requires a local element distribution and a global model distribution In this example You can match the capacitors to 1 for the 2 sigma population The process can maintain a 10 variation from run to run for a 2 sigma distribution Cla 1 0 CMOD SCALE ELCAP C1b 1 0 CMOD SCALE ELCAP C1C 10 CMOD SCALE ELCAP CID 10 CMOD SCALE ELCAP PARAM ELCAP Gauss 1 01 2 1 at 2 sigma MODCAP Gauss 25p 1 2 10 at 2 sigma MODEL CMOD C CAP MODCAP Worst Case and Monte Carlo Sweep Example The following example measures the delay and the power consumption of two inverters Additional inverters buffer the input and load the output This netlist contains commands for two sets of transient analysis parameter sweep from 3 to 3 sigma and a Monte Carlo analysis It creates one set of output files mtO and trO for the sigma sweep and one set m
202. at The results of envelope simulations are written to ev data files by the PROBE statement The format of an ev data file is equivalent to an hb data file with the addition of one fundamental parameter sweep that represents the slowly varying time envelope variation t of the Fourier coefficients and frequencies You can recognize this swept parameter in the ev file by the keyword env time Each row in the tabulated data of an ev file includes values for identifying frequency information the complex data for the output variables and information on the envelope time sweep For example the header for a data file HSPICE RF User Guide 281 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 12 Envelope Analysis Envelope Simulation dump for output variables v in and v out that follow a 2 tone envelope analysis have entries for hertz v in v out nO 0 nl f1 sweep env time S amp H Which result in data blocks with floating point values following env time 0 0 alo v in 1 ali v in 0 v in b 0 v out b 0 v out no fO n f1 b 1 v in a a 1 v out b 1 v out no 0 n f1 f N a N v in bIN v in a N v out bIN v out no 0 n f1 env_time 1 0 alo v in b 0 v in a 0 v out b 0 v out no fO n1 f1 f 1 a 1 v in b 1 v in a i v out b 1 v out no fo n1 f1 N a IN v in bIN v in a N v out bIN v out no
203. ated so the HSPICE input netlist often does not require the following AC signal sources The LIN command computes transfer parameters between the ports with no additional AC sources needed DC sources You can analyze a purely passive circuit without adding sources of any kind The following tutorial example shows how to set up a LIN analysis for an NMOS low noise amplifier circuit This netlist is shipped with the HSPICE RF distribution as gsmlna sp and is available in directory lt installdir gt demo hspicerf examples NMOS 0 25um Cascode LNA for GSM applications setup for s parameter and noise parameter measurements temp 27 options post 2 param Vdd 2 3 global gnd kk Cascode LNA tuned for operation near 1 GHz kk M1 n4 n3 n5 n5 CMOSN l 0 25u w 7 5u as 15p ad 15p ps 19u pd 19u m 80 M2 n6 n1 n4 n4 CMOSN 1 0 25u w 7 5u as 15p ad 15p ps 19u pd 19u m 80 16 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 1 Low Noise Amplifier M3 rfo n6 gnd gnd CMOSN 1 0 25u w 7 5u as 15p ad 15p S 19u pd 19u m 40 r vdd n6 400 11 n5 gnd 1 0 9nH 12 rfin n3 1 13nH vvb nl gnd dc 1 19 bias for common base device vvdd vdd gnd dc vdd rfb rfo n6 120 feedback kk 50 Ohm input port incl bias 255 Ohm output port kk P1 rfin gnd port 1 z0 50 dc 0 595 input port includes DC bias P2 rfo vdd port 2 z0 255 port doubles as pull up resistor k Measure s p
204. ax types allowed for frequency sweeps with the HBAC PHASENOISE and HBNOISE commands Input Syntax The SWEEPBLOCK feature creates a sweep whose set of values is the union of a set of linear logarithmic and point sweeps To specify the set of values in the SWEEPBLOCK use the SWEEPBLOCK command This command also assigns a name to the SWEEPBLOCK For example SWEEPBLOCK swblockname sweepspec sweepspec sweepspec 111 You can use SWEEPBLOCK to specify DC sweeps parameter sweeps AC and HBAC frequency sweeps or wherever HSPICE accepts sweeps You can specify an unlimited number of sweepspec parameters Each sweepspec can specify a linear logarithmic or point sweep by using one of the following forms start stop increment lin npoints start stop dec npoints start stop HSPICE RF User Guide 201 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements SWEEPBLOCK in Sweep Analyses 202 oct npoints start stop poi npoints pl p2 Example The following example specifies a logarithmic sweep from 1 to 1e9 with more resolution from 166 to 1e7 Sweepblock freqsweep dec 10 1 1g dec 1000 1meg 10meg Using SWEEPBLOCK in a DC Parameter Sweep To use the sweepblock in a DC parameter sweep use the following syntax DC sweepspec sweepspec sweepspecl Each sweepspec can be a linear logarithmic point or data sweep or it can be in the form variable SWEEPBLOCK swblockname The SWEEPBLOCK syntax sweeps the specified v
205. ble inl in2 gnd outi out2 gnd twistpr L 10 HSPICE RF User Guide 123 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines 124 Both signal references are grounded twistpr references the U model The transmission line is 10 meters long Example 3 The Unet1 element is a five conductor lossy transmission line Unetl il i2 i3 i4 i5 gnd o1 gnd o3 gnd o5 gnd Umodell L 1m Theil i2 i3 i4 and i5 input nodes connect to the o1 03 and o5 output nodes The i5 input and the three outputs 01 03 and 05 are all grounded m Umodel1 references the U model The transmission line is 1 millimeter long Frequency Dependent Multi Terminal S Element The S element uses the following parameters to define a frequency dependent multi terminal network S scattering Y admittance m Z impedance You can use an S element in the following types of analyses DC AC Transient Small Signal For a description of the S parameter and SP model analysis see the S Parameter Modeling Using the S Element chapter in the HSPICE Signal Integrity Guide S Element Syntax HSPICE Sxxx nd nd2 ndN ndRef MNAME Smodel name lt FQMODEL sp model name TYPE s y Zo value vector value l FBASE base frequency FMAX maximum frequency PRECFAC val DELAYHANDLE 1 0 ON OFF gt HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission
206. blockl The following statement block in braces is optional and you can repeat it multiple times elseif condition2 statement block2 mat The following statement block in brackets is optional and you cannot repeat it else statement block3 gt r H endif nan IF ELSEIF or ELSE condition statement complex Boolean expressions must not be ambiguous For example change a b amp amp c gt d to a b amp amp c gt d nan IF ELSEIF or ELSE statement block you can include most valid HSPICE or HSPICE RF analysis and output statements The exceptions are e END ALTER GLOBAL DEL LIB MALIAS ALIAS LIST NOLIST and CONNECT statements HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Using Subcircuits e search d_ibis d_imic d_lv56 biasfi modsrh cmiflag nxx and brief options You can include IF ELSEIF ELSE statements in subcircuits and subcircuits in IF ELSEIF ELSE statements You can use IF ELSEIF ELSE blocks to select different submodules to structure the netlist using INC LIB and VEC statements If two or more models in an IF ELSE block have the same model name and model type they must also be the same revision level Parameters in an IF ELSE block do not affect the parameter value within the condition expression HSPICE or HSPICE RF updates the parameter value only after it selects the IF ELSE block
207. breviated Subcircuit Node Names kK cee eee Automatic Node Name Generation liliis Global Node Names n u kk kk kk KK KK KK KK eee Circuit Temperature 0 0000 c KK KK KK KK KK KK KI KK KK K KK KK KIIR Data Driven Analysis s 243414 gt eya yk 2k nal 2 0 eee eee Library Calls and Definitions kK KK KK KK KK KK KK Defining Parameters kk llli Deleting a Library l i Ending a Netlist Condition Controlled Netlists IF ELSE AWK KK KK KK KK KK Using Subcircuits Hierarchical Parameters see RR DDL Library ACCess secre RE EE a a Deda AREE Vendor Libraries 40 41 43 43 44 46 46 46 48 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 58 58 61 61 62 62 63 63 64 64 65 65 69 70 70 71 72 75 76 Contents Subcircuit Library Structure kk liliis Elements Passive Elements Values for Elements 40 A uode lm RE LEER aree beim erue Resistor Elements in a HSPICE or HSPICE RF Netlist Capacitors Inductors Active Elements Diode Element 2 P eee eee eee Bipolar Junction Transistor BUT Element 200005 JFETs and MESFETs xe as a eyal E a eee eae MOSFETS Transmission Lines W Element Lossless T El SOMONE scere wate be wanda le de e ea tet ne Lossy U Elem nt s i oss agate Paw eee Poe be WAVE W K man a Frequency De pendent
208. c Netlists HSPICE RF typically use netlisters to generate circuits from schematics and accept either hierarchical or flat netlists The process of creating a schematic involves Symbol creation with a symbol editor Circuit encapsulation Property creation Symbol placement m Symbol property definition Wire routing and definition Table7 Input Netlist File Sections Sections Examples Definition Title TITLE The first line in the netlist is the title of the input netlist file optional in HSPICE RF Set up OPTION IC or NODESET Sets conditions for simulation PARAM GLOBAL Initial values in circuit and subcircuit Set parameter values in the netlist Set node name globally in netlist Sources Sources and digital inputs Sets input stimuli I or V element Netlist Circuit elements Circuit for simulation SUBKCT ENDS or Subcircuit definitions MACRO EOM Analysis DC TRAN AC and so on Statements to perform analyses SAVE and LOAD Save and load operating point information DATA Create table for data driven analysis TEMP Set temperature analysis Output PRINT PROBE Statements to output variables MEASURE Statement to evaluate and report user HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 defined functions of a circuit 51 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition Table7 Input Netlist File Sections Continued Sections Examples Definition Library IN
209. c1 i c2 i i where i is the current through the inductor The inductor also has a specified DC resistance of 10 ohms L99 in out POLY 4 0 0 35 0 01 R 10 Example 5 The L inductor connects from node 1 to node as a magnetic winding element with 10 turns of wire L12 NT 10 Mutual Inductors General form Kxxx Lyyy Lzzz K coupling coupling Mutual core form Kaaa Lbbb Lccc Lddd mname lt MAG magnetization gt Parameter Description Kxxx Mutual inductor element name Must begin with K followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters Lyyy Name of the first of two coupled inductors Lzzz Name of the second of two coupled inductors K coupling Coefficient of mutual coupling K is a unitless number with magnitude gt 0 and lt 1 If K is negative the direction of coupling reverses This is equivalent to reversing the polarity of either of the coupled inductors Use the K coupling syntax when using a parameter value or an equation and the keyword k can be omitted Kaaa Saturable core element name Must begin with K followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters HSPICE RF User Guide 95 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements 96 Parameter Description Lbbb Lccc Lddd Names of the windings about the Kaaa core One winding element is required and each winding element must use the magnetic winding syntax All winding elements with the same magnetic core model should b
210. cell that drives the port If you do not know the cell type use the reserved word UNKNOWN DRIVER as the cell type Physical name of an input output or bidirectional port Logical name of a subcircuit in your design name circuit design You can specify more than one logical instance Whenever you specify a logical instance name you must set NAME SCOPE to FLAT If you connect a logical net to a physical port HSPICE RF reports an error 303 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Table 24 SPEF Parameters Continued Parameter Definition physical instance routing confidence logical pin physical node net name cap id res id induc id node1 node2 304 Physical name of a subcircuit in your design_name circuit design You can specify more than one physical_instance Whenever you specify a physical instance name you must set NAME_SCOPE to FLAT If you connect a physical net to a logical port HSPICE RF reports an error One of the following positive integers 10 Statistical wire load model 20 Physical wire load model 30 Physical partitions with locations no cell placement 40 Estimated cell placement with Steiner tree based route 50 Estimated cell placement with global route 60 Final cell placement with Steiner route 70 Final cell placement with global route 80 Final cell placement final route 2d extraction 90 Final cell placement final route 2 5d ext
211. cess SolvNet 1 Goto the SolvNet Web page at http solvnet synopsys com 2 If prompted enter your user name and password If you do not have a Synopsys user name and password follow the instructions to register with SolvNet If you need help using SolvNet click Help on the SolvNet menu bar Contacting the Synopsys Technical Support Center If you have problems questions or suggestions you can contact the Synopsys Technical Support Center in the following ways Open a call to your local support center from the Web by going to http solvnet synopsys com EnterACall Synopsys user name and password required Send an e mail message to your local support center e E mail support center synopsys com from within North America e Find other local support center e mail addresses at http www synopsys com support support ctr Telephone your local support center e Call 800 245 8005 from within the continental United States e Call 650 584 4200 from Canada e Find other local support center telephone numbers at http www synopsys com support support ctr HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 1 HSPICE RF Features and Functionality Introduces HSPICE RF features and functionality HSPICE RF is a special set of analysis and design capabilities that support the design of RF and high speed circuits This functionality built on top of the standard HSPICE feature set is also useful for analog and signal integrity
212. ch the file came Chapter 2 Getting Started Generating Output Files In general text output from PRINT commands is intended to be read by humans while binary output from PROBE or OPTION POST is intended to be read by the CosmosScope waveform display tool Table 3 HSPICE RF Output File Types Command Text Output Output for CosmosScope AC analysis AC printac ac AC noise analysis NOISE printac ac DC sweep DC printsw Swit Envelope analysis ENV printev ev Envelope FFT ENVFFT printevst evit Harmonic Balance HB printhb hb Harmonic Balance AC printhb hb HBAC HBLIN analysis HBLSP large signal HBLSP small signal HBAC noise HBNOISE Harmonic Balance OSC HBOSC HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 PRINT output printhl S param output SnP PRINT output printls S param output p2d PRINT output printss S noise output S2P printpn printhb PROBE output hl S paramr output SnP PROBE output ls S param output p2d PROBE output ss S noise output S2P pn hb Chapter 2 Getting Started Using the CosmosScope Waveform Display Table 3 HSPICE RF Output File Types Command Text Output Output for CosmosScope Harmonic Balance TRAN printhr hr HBTRAN Transfer Functions HBXF _ printxf XB Oscillator startup printev ev ENVOSC LIN analysis PRINT output printac PROBE o
213. cher ECL Compiler ECO Compiler EDAnavigator Encore Encore PQ Evaccess ExpressModel Floorplan Manager Formal Model Checker FoundryModel FPGA Compiler Il FPGA Express Frame Compiler Galaxy Gatran HANEX HDL Advisor HDL Compiler Hercules Hercules Explorer Hercules ll Hierarchical Optimization Technology High Performance Option HotPlace HSIMPlus HSPICE Link iN Tandem Integrator Interactive Waveform Viewer i Virtual Stepper Jupiter Jupiter DP JupiterXT JupiterXT ASIC JVXtreme Liberty Libra Passport Library Compiler Libra Visa Magellan Mars Mars Rail Mars Xtalk Medici Metacapture Metacircuit Metamanager Metamixsim Milkyway ModelSource Module Compiler MS 3200 MS 3400 Nova Product Family Nova ExploreRTL Nova Trans Nova VeriLint Nova VHDLlint Optimum Silicon Orion ec Parasitic View Passport Planet Planet PL Planet RTL Polaris Polaris CBS Polaris MT Power Compiler PowerCODE PowerGate ProFPGA ProGen Prospector Protocol Compiler PSMGen Raphael Raphael NES RoadRunner RTL Analyzer Saturn ScanBand Schematic Compiler Scirocco Scirocco i Shadow Debugger Silicon Blueprint Silicon Early Access SinglePass SoC Smart Extraction SmartLicense SmartModel Library Softwire Source Level Design Star Star DC Star MS Star MTB Star Power Star Rail Star RC Star RCXT Star Sim Star SimXT Star Time Star XP SWIFT Taurus TimeSlice TimeTracker Timing Annotator TopoPlace TopoRoute Trace On
214. circuit call node1 Node names identify the nodes that connect to the element The node name begins with a letter and can contain a maximum of 1023 characters You cannot use the following characters in node names space mname HSPICE or HSPICE RF requires a model reference name for all elements except passive devices pnamel An element parameter name identifies the parameter value that follows this name expression Any mathematical expression containing values or parameters such as param1 val2 vali Value of the pname1 parameter or of the corresponding model node The value can be a number or an algebraic expression M val Element multiplier Replicates va element times in parallel Do not assign a negative value or zero as the M value 56 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition For descriptions of element statements for the various types of supported elements see the chapters about individual types of elements in this user guide Example 1 Q1234567 4000 5000 6000 SUBSTRATE BJTMODEL AREA 1 0 The preceding example specifies a bipolar junction transistor with its collector connected to node 4000 its base connected to node 5000 its emitter connected to node 6000 and its substrate connected to the SUBSTRATE node The BJTMODEL name references the model statement which describes the transistor parameters M1 ADDR SIG1 GND SBS N1 10U 100
215. ctor 162 END statement for multiple HSPICE runs 70 in libraries 65 location 70 missing 43 with ALTER 67 69 ENDL statement 65 ENV statement 278 Envelope Analysis ENV 277 envelope simulation 277 ENVFFT 280 ENVFFT statement 280 environment variables 76 ENVOSC 279 ENVOSC statement 279 errors missing END statement 43 example comment line 55 configuration file 368 Monte Carlo 341 347 worst case 347 exp x function 140 exponential function 140 expressions algebraic 138 Extended output variables 371 external data files 51 F fall time verification 379 files external data 51 64 hlit 271 hspice ini 76 hspicerf 365 include files 50 Index sst 251 multiple simulation runs 70 p2d 251 printhl 271 printls 251 printss 251 ssit 251 files output 10 first character descriptions 45 flags 365 flush waveform configuration option configuration options flush waveform 366 format output DSPF 287 format output NW 320 WDB 319 Foster pole residue form E element 190 G element 190 frequency variable 143 frequency table model 130 174 frequency dependent capacitor 89 157 inductor 100 158 resistor 153 functions built in 139 143 table 139 G GAUSS functions 342 keyword 339 parameter distribution 335 generating output 10 global parameters 144 GND node 61 ground node name 61 ground floating node configuration option configuration options ground floating node 366 H Harmonic Balance
216. ctor is 0 1 JFETs and MESFETs Jxxx nd ng ns nb mname AREA area W val L val OFF IC vdsval vgsval lt M val gt lt DTEMP val gt Jxxx nd ng ns nb mname lt lt lt AREA gt area gt lt W val gt L val OFF VDS vdsval lt VGS vgsval gt M val lt DTEMP val gt Parameter Description JXXX JFET or MESFET element name Must begin with J followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters nd Drain terminal node name ng Gate terminal node name ns Source terminal node name nb Bulk terminal node name which is optional mname JFET or MESFET model name reference HSPICE RF User Guide 109 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Active Elements Parameter Description area Area multiplying factor that affects the BETA RD RS IS CGS and AREA area CGD model parameters Default 1 0 in units of square meters W FET gate width in meters L FET gate length in meters OFF Sets initial condition to OFF for this element in DC analysis Default ON IC vdsval Initial internal drain source voltage vdsval and gate source voltage vgsval VDS vgsval Use this argument when the TRAN statement contains VGS UIC The IC statement overrides it M Multiplier to simulate multiple JFETs or MESFETs in parallel The M setting affects all currents capacitances and resistances Default 1 DTEMP The difference between the element temperature and the circuit temperature
217. d capacitance as a function of temperature Metall and metal2 transmission line models for long metal lines Models must accept elements Sizes are based on a drawn dimension If you draw a cell at 2u dimension and shrink it to 1u the physical size is 0 9u The effective electrical size is 0 8u Account for the four dimension levels drawn size e shrunken size e physical size e electrical size Most simulator models scale directly from drawn to electrical size HSPICE MOS models support all four size levels as in Figure 29 334 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis Figure 29 Device Model from Drawn to Electrical Size Drawn Size Electrical Size source drain gate LMLT WMLT LD WD Shrunken Size BEEN A 1m XL XW Physical Size source drain 0 9 m sF lt Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo analysis uses a random number generator to create the following types of functions Gaussian parameter distribution e Relative variation variation is a ratio of the average e Absolute variation adds variation to the average e Bimodal multiplies distribution to statistically reduce nominal parameters Uniform parameter distribution e Relative variation variation is a ratio of the average e Absolute variation adds variation to the average e Bimodal mu
218. d gnd NMOS 1 0 35u Midiff4 dIP dbias gnd gnd NMOS 1 0 35u Cdiffl dQP QP Cdiff Cdiff2 dOQN QN Cdiff Cdiff3 dIN IN Cdiff Cdiff4 dIP IP Cdiff Mc QP1 IP vdcdif dOP gnd NMOS 1 0 35u Mc OQON2 IN vdcdif dON gnd NMOS 1 0 35u Mc QON3 QP vdcdif dIN gnd NMOS 1 0 35u Mc QPA4 ON vdcdif dIP gnd NMOS 1 0 35u Transient Analysis Test Bench stimulate oscillation with 2mA pulse iosc IP IN PULSE 0 2m Oln 01n 01 probe tran v IP v IN print tran v IP v IN TRAN 01n 10n Harmonic Balance Test Bench Sweepblock vtune sweep 0 5 0 2 2 3 0 1 HBOSC tones 1550e6 nharms 12 PROBENODE IP QN 4 sweep Vtune sweepblock vtune_sweep kk phasenoise dec 10 100 1e7 print phasenoise phnz probe phasenoise phnz print hb v IP IN v IP IN 1 v QP QN probe hb v IP IN v IP IN 1 v QP QN probe hb hertz 1 1 NMOS Device from MOSIS 0 35um Proces 5 0 5 0 for quadrature w difMsize w difMsize w difMsize w difMsize w difMsize w difMsize w difMsize w difMsize n 10n iu v OP ON 1 v OP ON 1 S HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 5 CMOS GPS VCO BSIM3 VERSION 3 1 PARAMETERS DATE Mar 8 00 LOT n9co WAF 07 Temperature parameters Default MODEL NMOS NMOS LEVEL 49 VERSION 3 1 TNOM 27 TOX 7 9E 9 TXJ 1 5E 7 NCH 1 7E17 VTHO 0 5047781 K1 0 5719698 K2 0 0197928 K3 33 4446099 K3B 3 1667861 WO
219. d not contain a header row SHORTALL Causes all inductors to be converted to short circuits and all reluctance matrix values to be ignored IGNORE_COUPLING Causes all off diagonal terms to be ignored that is set to 0 Ideal Transformer Format in HSPICE RF The ideal transformer format simplifies modeling of baluns Previously baluns were modeled using mutual inductors K elements with the IDEAL keyword HSPICE RF User Guide 163 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Scattering Parameter Data Element Multiple L and K elements were needed for a given balun model The ideal transformer model allows modeling of a balun using a single L element In the ideal transformer format no absolute inductance or reluctance values are specified Instead the transformer s coupling characteristics are specified using inductor number of turns values The behavior of the ideal transformer depends on ratios of the inductors number of turns Syntax LXXX nip nin nNp nNn TRANSFORMER NT ntl ntN Parameter Description Lxxx Inductor element name Must begin with L followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters n ipnin nNpnNn Positive and negative terminal node names The number of terminals must be even Each pair of reports represents the location of an inductor TRANSFORMER NT Number of turns values These parameters must match the number of inductors The ideal transformer element obeys the standard ideal tra
220. d on the phase noise data the syntax of the RMS JITTER measurement is provided where word is in units of sec seconds rad radiens or iu interval units The default is sec MEASURE phasenoise integralOutMag RMSJITTER phnoise FROM start frequency TO end frequency lt UNITS word gt Example meas phasenoise rj RMSJITTER phnoise from 1K to 100K units rad The RMSJITTER is calculated as r d J r j u TUC y rmsl 2 2 0 10 0 0 1 phasenoise k startfrequency With sec units the RMSJITTER is calculated as rmsl 2 0 m gt fO in which PI 2 3 1415926 and f0 is the tone frequency of the oscillator RMSJITTER With rad units the RMSJITTER is calculated as RMSJITTER Jrms1 With iu units the RMSJITTER is calculated as RMSJITTER Tu U T HSPICE RF User Guide 245 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 References Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis References 246 1 E Ngoya A Suarez R Sommet R Quere Steady State Analysis of Free or Forced Oscillators by Harmonic Balance and Stability Investigation of Periodic and Quasi Periodic Regimes nternational Journal of Microwave and Millimeter Wave Computer Aided Engineering Volume 5 Number 3 pages 210 223 1995 2 C R Chang M B Steer S Martin E Reese Computer Aided Analysis of Free Running Microwave Oscillators IEEE Trans on Microwave Theory and Techniques Volume 39 No 10 pages 1735 1745 Octobe
221. de Subcircuit node and element names follow the rules shown in Figure 6 on page 62 Figure 6 Subcircuit Calling Tree with Circuit Numbers and Instance Names 0 CKT 1 X1 2 X2 3 X3 4 X4 n abc is circuit number instance name sig24 sig25 sig26 In Figure 6 the path name of the sig25 node in the X4 subcircuit is X1 X4 sig25 You can use this path in HSPICE or HSPICE RF statements such as PRINT v X1 X4 sig25 Abbreviated Subcircuit Node Names In HSPICE you can use circuit numbers as an alternative to path names to reference nodes or elements in PRINT NODESET or IC statements HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition Compiling the circuit assigns a circuit number to all subcircuits creating an abbreviated path name lt subckt num gt lt name gt Note HSPICE RF does not recognize this type of abbreviated subcircuit name The subcircuit name and a colon precede every occurrence of a node or element in the output listing file For example 4 INTNODE1 is a node named INTNODE1 in a subcircuit assigned the number 4 Any node not in a subcircuit has a 0 prefix 0 references the main circuit To identify nodes and subcircuits in the output listing file HSPICE uses a circuit number that references the subcircuit where the node or element appears Abbreviated path names let you use DC operating point node voltage outp
222. de Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case and Monte Carlo Sweep Example Figure 43 Superimposing Sigma Sweep Over Monte Carlo Monte Carla Results 3 m_delay 3 0m m_power m_delay o 8 0m Zim 3 s delay T s power s delay 6 0m Pm 5 0m 4 0m 100p 200p 300p 4 p m delav C 1T T 1 100p 200p 300p Ep s delay Figure 44 superimposes the required part grades for product sales onto the Monte Carlo plot This example uses a 250 ps delay and 6 0 mW power dissipation to determine the four binning grades HSPICE RF User Guide 355 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case and Monte Carlo Sweep Example Figure 44 Speed Power Yield Estimation Monte Carla Results 3 m delay m powerim delay o Sorting the results from inv mt1 yields Bini 18 Bin2 30 Bin3 31 6Bin4 21 If this circuit is representative of the entire chip then the present yield should be 18 for the premium Bin 1 parts assuming variations in process parameters as specified in the netlist Of course this example only shows the principle on how to analyze the Monte Carlo results there is no market for a device with two of these inverters 356 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Simulating the Effects of Global and Local Variations with Monte Carlo Simulating the Effects of Global
223. deal balun transformer subcircuit Two pins are grounded for standard operation With all K values being IDEAL the absolute L values are not crucial only their ratios are important HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Passive Elements kk all K s ideal o outl Loi 25 XR O ce l1Ne 9 Sense o 0 Lin 1 Lo2 25 X OSEE 7o o out2 kk subckt BALUN1 in outi out2 Lin in gnd Bl Lol outl gnd L 0 25 Lo2 gnd out2 L 0 25 K12 Lin Lol IDEAL K13 Lin Lo2 IDEAL K23 Lol Lo2 IDEAL ends Example 2 This example is a 2 pin ideal 4 1 step up balun transformer subcircuit with shared DC path no DC isolation Input and output have a common pin and both inductors have the same value Note that Rload 4 Rin all K s ideal in O o out in Li 1 ER ZZ LL LLL o 0 L2 1 BR P N o out2 kk With all K s ideal the actual L s values are not important only their ratio to each other Subckt BALUN2 in out2 L1 in gnd L 1 L2 gnd out2 L 1 K12 L1 L2 IDEAL ends Example 3 This example is a 3 pin ideal balun transformer with shared DC path no DC isolation All inductors have the same value here set to unity kk all K s ideal o outl k k Lo2 1 BR EES o 0 k k Lol 1 MM ZA E o out2 in Lin 1 HSPICE RF User Guide 161 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Passive Elements Qc ONA A
224. des several new analyses that support the simulation and analysis of radio frequency integrated circuits RFICs These analyses provide simulation capabilities that are either much more difficult to perform or are not practically possible by using standard HSPICE analyses The RF analyses include Harmonic Balance HB for frequency domain steady state analysis Harmonic Balance OSC HBOSC for oscillator analysis see Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Harmonic Balance AC HBAC for periodic AC analysis see Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Harmonic Balance Noise HBNOISE for periodic time varying AC noise analysis see Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Frequency translation S parameter extraction for describing N port circuits that exhibit frequency translation effects see Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Envelope Analysis ENV see Chapter 12 Envelope Analysis You can use steady state analysis on a circuit if it contains only DC and periodic sources These analyses assume that all start up transients have completely died out with only the steady state response remaining Sources that are not periodic or DC are treated as zero valued in these analyses HSPICE RF User Guide 205 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic balance a
225. dy State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis 210 Example 3 hb tones f1 2 intmodmax 3 The resulting HB analysis spectrumz dc f4 fo fy fo fy fo 2 f4 2 fo 2 f fo 2 f4 fo 2 f24f1 2 fo fy 3 f4 3 fo Example 4 hb tones f1 f2 nharms 2 2 The resulting HB analysis spectrum dc f4 fo fy fo f4 f2 2 f4 2 fo Example 5 hb tones f1 2 nharms 2 2 intmodmax 3 The resulting HB analysis spectrum dc f4 fo fy fo fy fo 2 f4 2 f 2 f4 fp 2 f fo 2 fo H 2 fo f Example 6 hb tones f1 f2 nharms 5 5 intmodmax 3 The resulting HB analysis spectrum dc f4 fo fy fo fy fo 2 f4 2 fo 2 f4 f2 2 f fo 2 fo f4 2 fo H 3 H 3 fo 4 f 4 fo 5 H 5 fo HB Analysis Options The following table lists the OPTION command options specific to HB analysis Table 15 HB Analysis Options Option Description HBCONTINUE Specifies whether to use the sweep solution from the previous simulation as the initial guess for the present simulation HBCONTINUE 1 default Use solution from previous simulation as the initial guess HBCONTINUE 0 Start each simulation in a sweep from the DC solution HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis Table 15 HB Analysis Options Continued Option Description HBJREUSE HBJREUSETOL HBKRYLOVDIM HBKRYLOVTOL HBLINESEARCHFAC HBMAXITER HBSOLVER HBTO
226. e Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Multitone Nonlinear Steady State Analysis HBNOISE Unlimited number of HB sources using the same tone possibly multiple harmonics Includes stationary cyclostationary frequency dependent and correlated noise effects Swept parameter analysis Results are independent of the number of HBAC sources in the netlist Prerequisites and Limitations The following prerequisites and limitations apply to HBNOISE Requires one HB statement which determines the steady state solution Requires at least one HB source Requires placing the parameter sweep in the HB statement The requested maximum harmonic in HBNOISE must be less than or equal to half the number of harmonics used in harmonic balance that is max harm lt num hb harmsr2 Input Syntax HBNOISE output insrc parameter sweep nlI n2 nk 1 listfreq frequencies none all listcount val listfloor val lt listsources on off gt Parameter Description output Output node pair of nodes or 2 terminal element HSPICE RF references equivalent noise output to this node or pair of nodes Specify a pair of nodes as V n n If you specify only one node V n then HSPICE RF assumes that the second node is ground You can also specify a 2 terminal element name that refers to an existing element in the netlist insrc An input source
227. e Noise Analysis Timing Jitter Analysis The following timing jitter expression becomes apparent with the expected square root delay dependence o Jk nz f Jo In the general case you must carefully set the limits of integration for the timing jitter calculation Timing Jitter Syntax The timing jitter calculations are derived from the results of phase noise analysis The phase noise output syntax supports the JITTER keyword as an output keyword in addition to the PHNOISE keyword PRINT PHASENOISE PHNOISE JITTER PROBE PHASENOISE PHNOISE JITTER If the JITTER keyword is present the PHASENOISE statement also outputs the raw jitter data to jtO and printjtO data files These data are plotted as a function of time in units of seconds Timing jitter data itself is unitless The timing jitter calculations make use of some of the parameters given in the PHASENOISE syntax See Input Syntax on page 235 for the syntax and examples The timing jitter calculations make use of the phase noise frequency sweep specification The resulting values for type nsteps start and stop result in an array of frequency points given by fo fl fn The output of timing jitter information uses a corresponding time sampling derived via 1 1 1 TAL Sy l aU 0 NN y fue fo 244 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Timing Jitter Analysis RMS JITTER Measurement Base
228. e Sources Vsrc in gnd DC 0 SIN O Vin freql 0 TRANFORHB 1 HB tones freql intmodmax 7 Behavioral Noise Sources In HSPICE RF you can use the G element to specify noise sources Frequency domain noise analyses NOISE HBNOISE and PHASENOISE take these noise sources into account You can attach noise sources to behavioral models For example you can use a G element with the vCCAP parameter to model a varactor which includes a noise model You can also simulate effects such as substrate noise including its effect on oscillator phase noise You can also use this G element syntax to simulate behavioral descriptions of substrate noise during any frequency domain noise analysis which includes phase noise analysis For example gname nodel node2 noise noise equation gname nodel node2 node3 node4 noise noise equation The first line creates a simple two terminal current noise source whose value is described in A2 Hz The output noise generated from this noise source is noise equation H Where H is the transfer function from the terminal pair node1 node2 to the circuit output where HSPICE RF measures the output noise The second line produces a noise source correlation between the node1 node2 and node3 node4 terminal pairs The resulting output noise is calculated as noise equation sqrt H1 H2 where H1 is the transfer function from node1 node2 to the output H2 is the transfer function from node3 node4
229. e node names global across all subcircuits use a GLOBAL statement The 0 GND GND and GROUND node names all refer to the global HSPICE RF ground Simulation treats nodes with any of these names as a ground node and produces v 0 into the output files Instance Names The names of element instances begin with the element key letter see Table 5 except in subcircuits where instance names begin with X Subcircuits HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP 1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Guidelines are sometimes called macros or modules Instance names can be up to 1024 characters long Table5 Element Identifiers Letter First Element Example Line Char B IBIS buffer b io 0 nd pu0 nd pdO nd out nd in0 nd enO nd outofinO nd pc0 nd gcO C Capacitor Cbypass 1 0 10pf D Diode D7 3 9 D1 E Voltage controlled voltage source Ba 1 2 34 K F Current controlled current source Fsub nl n2 vin 2 0 G Voltage controlled current source G124 03 0 10 H Current controlled voltage source H3 4 5 Vout 2 0 I Current source IA 2 6 1e 6 J JFET or MESFET J1 7 2 3 GAASFET K Linear mutual inductor general form K1 L1 L2 1 L Linear inductor LX a b 1e 9 M MOS transistor M834 12 3 4 N1 P Port P1 in gnd port 1 z0 50 Q Bipolar transistor Q5 3 6 7 8 pnpl R Resistor R10 21 10 1000 S S parameter element S1 ndl nd2 s model2 V Voltage source vl 805 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 47 Chapter 4 I
230. e same value here set to unity kk all K s ideal kk kk kk kk kk in kk O k subckt BALUN3 in Lo2 gnd outi Lol out2 gnd Lin in out2 K12 Lin Lol K13 Lin Lo2 K23 Lol Lo2 ends Linear Inductors uw o outl Lo2 1 aa Se o 0 Lo1 21 POI o out2 Lin 1 o in outi out2 L 1 L 1 L 1 IDEAL IDEAL IDEAL Lxxx nodel node2 lt L gt inductance lt TCl val gt TC2 val M val DTEMP val IC val Parameter Description Lxxx node1 and node2 inductance L TC1 TC2 DTEMP Name of an inductor Names or numbers of the connecting nodes Nominal inductance value in Henries Inductance in Henries at room temperature Temperature coefficient Multiplier for parallel inductors Temperature difference between the element and the circuit Initial inductor current HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 99 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Example LX A B 1E 9 LR 1 0 1u IC 10mA LX is a 1 nH inductor LRis a1 uH inductor with an initial current of 10 mA Frequency Dependent Inductors You can specify frequency dependent inductors using the L equation with the HERTZ keyword The HERTZ keyword represents the operating frequency In time domain analyses an expression with the HERTZ keyword behaves differently according to the value assigned to the CONVOLUTION keyword Syntax LXXX n n2 L equation lt CONVOLUTIO
231. e that follows Here is an example of comments and line continuation in a netlist file ABC Title Line HSPICE or HSPICE RF ignores the netlist keyword on this line because the first line is always a comment This is a comment line MODEL n1 NMOS this is an example of an inline comment This is a comment line and the following line is a continuation LEVEL 3 Element and Source Statements Element statements describe the netlists of devices and sources Use nodes to connect elements to one another Nodes can be either numbers or names Element statements specify Type of device Nodes to which the device is connected Operating electrical characteristics of the device Element statements can also reference model statements that define the electrical parameters of the element HSPICE RF User Guide 55 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition Table 8 lists the parameters of an element statements Table8 Element Parameters Parameter Description elname Element name that cannot exceed 1023 characters and must begin with a specific letter for each element type C Capacitor D Diode E EG H Dependent current and voltage sources Current inductance source J JFET or MESFET K Mutual inductor L Inductor model or magnetic core mutual inductor model M MOSFET Q BJT P Port R Resistor S S parameter model T U W Transmission line V Voltage source X Sub
232. e that follows the equation Acos t where A mag o 2x harm f tone modharm fl modtone NEL 180 Values for tone and modtone an optional modulating tone must be non negative integers that specify index values for the frequencies specified with the HB TONES command Values for harm harmonic and modharm modulating tone harmonic must be integers negative values are OK that specify harmonic indices phase Example 1 The following example is a 1 0 Volt peak steady state cosine voltage source which is at the fundamental HB frequency with zero phase and with a zero volt DC value Vsrc in gnd DC 0 HB 1 0 0 1 1 Example 2 The following example is a steady state cosine power source with 1 0mW available power which is implemented with a Norton equivalent circuit and a 50 ohm input impedance Isrc in gnd HB 1 0e 3 0 1 1 power 1 z0 50 Example 3 Five series voltage sources sum to produce a stimulus of five equally spaced frequencies at and above 2 44 GHz using modharm and modtone parameters These are commensurate tones an integer relation exists therefore you only need to specify two tones when invoking the HB analysis param Vin 1 0 param f0 2440MEG param deltaf 312 5K HSPICE RF User Guide 185 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Phase Differences Between HB and SIN Sources param fcenter f0 2 0 deltaf Vrfa in ina HB Vin 0 1 1 2 440625 GHz Vrfb ina inb HB V
233. e transient analysis If you set DELAYHANDLE to OFF but DELAYFREQ is not zero HSPICE still simulates the S element in delay mode Set to 1 if the parameters are represented in the mixed mode A string used to determine the order of the indices of the mixed signal incident or reflected vector The string must be an array of a letter and a number Xn where X D to indicate a differential term C to indicate a common term S to indicate a single grounded term n the port number The line length of the transmission line system where the S parameters are extracted This keyword is required only when the S Model is used in a W element HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Scattering Parameter Data Element The FQMODEL TSTONEFILE and CITIFILE parameters describe the frequency varying behavior of a network Only specify one of the parameters in an S model card If more than one method is declared only the first one is used and HSPICE issues a warning message FQMODEL can be set in S element and S model statements but both statements must refer to the same model name The S element is capable of reading in two port noise parameter data from Touchstone data files and then transform the raw data into a form used for noise and LIN 2PNOISE analysis For example you can represent a two port system with an S element and then perform a noise analysis or any other analysis The S element
234. e type parameters The default is FMAX If the DELAYHANDLE is set to OFF but DELAYFREQ is nonzero HSPICE still simulates the S element in delay mode The interpolation method STEP piecewise step SPLINE b spline curve fit LINEAR piecewise linear default 127 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines Parameter Description INTDATTYP HIGHPASS LOWPASS MIXEDMODE DATATYPE 128 Data type for the linear interpolation of the complex data RI real imaginary based interpolation DBA dB angle based interpolation MA magnitude angle based interpolation default Specifies high frequency extrapolation 0 Use zero in Y dimension open circuit 1 Use highest frequency 2 Use linear extrapolation with the highest two points 3 Apply window function default This option overrides EXTRAPOLATION in model SP Specifies low frequency extrapolation 0 Use zero in Y dimension open circuit 1 Use lowest frequency default 2 Use linear extrapolation with the lowest two points This option overrides EXTRAPOLATION in model SP Set to 1 if the parameters are represented in the mixed mode A string used to determine the order of the indices of the mixed signal incident or reflected vector The string must be an array of a letter and a number Xn where X D to indicate a differential term C to indicate a common term S to indicate a single grounded term pn the port number HS
235. e voltage varies by more than 0 1V To change this value use the SIM_DSPF_VTOL or SIM_SPEF_VTOL option For descriptions and usage examples see OPTION SIM_DSPF_ACTIVE and OPTION SIM_SPEF_ACTIVE in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference SIM_DSPF_VTOL HSPICE RF performs a second simulation run by using the or active_node file the DSPF or SPEF file and the hierarchical SIM_SPEF_VTOL LVS ideal netlist to back annotate only active portions of the circuit If a net is latent then HSPICE RF does not expand the net This saves simulation runtime and memory value is the tolerance of the voltage change scopen can be a subcircuit definition which has an prefix or a subcircuit instance By default HSPICE RF performs only one iteration of the second simulation run Use the SIM DSPF MAX ITER or SIM SPEF MAX ITER option to change it For descriptions and usage examples see OPTION SIM DSPF VTOL and OPTION SIM SPEF VTOL in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference HSPICE RF User Guide 289 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation 290 Table 21 Selective Post Layout Flow Options Continued Syntax Description SIM DSPF MAX ITER Or SIM_SPEF_MAX_ITER value is the maximum number of iterations for the second simulation run Some of the latent nets might turn active after the first iteration of the second run In this case Resimulate the netlist to ensu
236. e written in one mutual inductor statement in the netlist mname Saturable core model name See the Passive Device Models chapter in the HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual for more information MAG Initial magnetization of the saturable core You can set this to 1 0 or 1 where 1 refer to positive and negative values of the BS model parameter See the Passive Device Models chapter in the HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual for more information magnetization In this syntax coupling is a unitless value from zero to one representing the coupling strength If you use parameter labels the nodes and model name must be first Other arguments can be in any order If you specify an inductor model see the Passive Device Models chapter in the HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual the inductance value is optional You can determine the coupling coefficient based on geometric and spatial information To determine the final coupling inductance HSPICE or HSPICE HF divides the coupling coefficient by the square root of the product of the self inductances When using the mutual inductor element to calculate the coupling between more than two inductors HSPICE or HSPICE RF can automatically calculate an approximate second order coupling See the third example below for a specific situation Note The automatic inductance calculation is an estimation and is accurate for a subset of geometries The second
237. ects Trapezoidal integration For the syntax and description of this control option see OPTION SIM ORDER in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference HSPICE RF User Guide 315 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 14 Using HSPICE with HSPICE RF RF Transient Analysis Accuracy Control RF Transient Analysis Accuracy Control 316 The default time step method in HSPICE RF mixes timestep algorithms Trapezoidal and second order Gear Gear 2 This yields a more accurate scheme than Trapezoidal or Backward Euler Also detection of numerical oscillations inserts fewer Backward Euler steps than in previous HSPICE versions OPTION SIM ACCURACY You use the SIM ACCURACY option to modify the size of timesteps in HSPICE RF For example OPTION SIM ACCURACY lt value gt A timestep is a time interval at which you evaluate a signal HSPICE RF discretely expresses the time continuum as a series of points At each point or timestep a circuit simulator evaluates the corresponding voltage or current value of a signal Thus a resulting signal waveform is a series of individual data points connecting these points results in a smooth curve You can apply different accuracy settings to different blocks or time intervals The syntax to set accuracy on a block instance or time interval is similar to the settings used for a power supply Note An OPTION SIM ACCURACY takes precedence over an OPTION ACCURATE For the syntax and description of this c
238. ects to the driver and output nodes The width and length are 500 microns This diode references the model d diode model Ddrive driver output model d Wz5e 4 L 5e 4 1C 0 2 Bipolar Junction Transistor BJT Element Oxxx nc nb ne ns mname area OFF IC vbeval vceval M val DTEMP val Oxxx nc nb ne ns mname AREA area AREAB val AREAC val OFF VBE vbeval VCE vceval M val DTEMP val Parameter Description Qxxx BJT element name Must begin with Q then up to 1023 alphanumeric characters nc Collector terminal node name nb Base terminal node name ne Emitter terminal node name ns Substrate terminal node name which is optional You can also use the BULK parameter to set this name in the BJT model mname BJT model name reference area Emitter area multiplying factor which affects currents resistances and AREA area capacitances Default 1 0 OFF Sets initial condition for this element to OFF in DC analysis Default ON HSPICE RF User Guide 107 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Active Elements 108 Parameter Description IC vbeval Initial internal base emitter voltage vbeval and collector emitter vceval VBE voltage vceval HSPICE or HSPICE RF uses this value when VCE the TRAN statement includes UIC The IC statement overrides it M Multiplier to simulate multiple BJTs in parallel The M setting affects all currents capacitances and resista
239. ed output format HSPICE RF prints a warning message indicating that the selected format is unsupported HSPICE RF then automatically defaults the output to TRO format You can use the waveform viewer to view certain output formats wdb XP CosmosScope Recommended nw XP AvanWaves xp XP AvanWaves CosmosScope Note If your waveform file is larger than 2GB use split waveforms Tabulated Data Output HSPICE RF outputs all analog waveforms specified ina PRINT statement HSPICE RF saves these waveforms as ASCII tabulated data into a file with the PRINT extension To display waveforms graphically CosmosScope can directly read the tabulated data For more information about CosmosScope see the CosmosScope User s and Reference Note Tabulated data excludes waveforms specified in PROBE statements WDB Output Format You can use the waveform database WDB output format in OPTION POST It was developed for maximum efficiency The output file is wdb For example to output to a wdb file enter OPTION POST wdba Signals across multiple hierarchies that map to the same node are named together They also share the same waveform data You can also set up the database so that CosmosScope extracts one signal at a time This means that CosmosScope does not need to read the entire output file to display a single waveform HSPICE RF User Guide 319 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 14 Using HSPICE with HSPICE RF RF Transien
240. ength in meters Default 0 0 if you did not specify L in a capacitor model DTEMP Element temperature difference from the circuit temperature in degrees Celsius Default 0 0 C equation Capacitance at room temperature specified as a function of any node voltages any branch currents any independent variables such as time hertz and temper CTYPE Determines capacitance charge calculation for elements with capacitance equations If the C capacitance is a function of V n1 lt n2 gt set CTYPE 0 Use this setting correctly to ensure proper capacitance calculations and correct simulation results Default 0 POLY Keyword to specify capacitance as a non linear polynomial cO c1 Coefficients of a polynomial described as a function of the voltage across the capacitor cO represents the magnitude of the 0th order term c1 represents the magnitude of the 1st order term and so on You cannot use parameters as coefficient values You can specify capacitance as a numeric value in units of farads as an equation or as a polynomial of the voltage The only required fields are the two nodes and the capacitance or model name HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements If you use the parameter labels the nodes and model name must precede the labels Other arguments can follow in any order f you specify a capacitor model see the Passive Device Models chapter in the HSPICE Elements
241. ential format or engineering key letter format but not both 1e 12 or 1p but not 1e 6u To designate exponents use D or E The OPTION EXPMAX limits the exponent size Trailing alphabetic characters are interpreted as units comments Units comments are not checked The OPTION INGOLD controls the format of numbers in printouts The OPTION NUMDGT x controls the listing printout accuracy The OPTION MEASDGT x controls the measure file printout accuracy The OPTION VFLOOR x specifies the smallest voltage for which HSPICE or HSPICE RF prints the value Smaller voltages print as 0 Parameters and Expressions Parameter names in HSPICE RF use HSPICE name syntax rules except that names must begin with an alphabetic character The other characters must be either a number or one of these characters S 6 HSPICE RF User Guide 49 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Guidelines To define parameter hierarchy overrides and defaults use the OPTION PARHIER global local statement f you create multiple definitions for the same parameter or option HSPICE RF uses the last parameter definition or OPTION statement even if that definition occurs later in the input than a reference to the parameter or option HSPICE RF does not warn you when you redefine a parameter You must define a parameter before you use that parameter to define another parameter When you select design
242. er Guide 169 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Scattering Parameter Data Element 170 Figure 15 Terminal Node Notation N 1 terminal system vinc 1 vinc N gt i 1 NE vref t vref N ndi 0 4 o ndN v 1 IVIN ndR reference node S Model Syntax MODEL Smodel name S lt N dimension gt FOMODEL sp model name TSTONEFILE filename CITIFILE filename TYPE s yl Zo value vector valuel FBASE base frequency FMAX maximum frequency HIGHPASS 0 1 2 gt lt LOWPASS 0 1 2 gt PRECFAC val DELAYHANDLE 1 0 ON OFF gt DELAYFREQ val MIXEDMODE 0 1 gt DATATYPE data string lt XLINELENGTH val gt 4 44 Parameter Specifies Smodel_name Name of the S model S Specifies that the model type is an S model N S model dimension which is the terminal number of the S element excluding the reference node FQMODEL Frequency behavior of the S Y or Z parameters MODEL statement of SP type which defines the frequency dependent matrices array HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Scattering Parameter Data Element Parameter Specifies TSTONEFILE CITIFILE TYPE Zo FBASE FMAX LOWPASS HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Name of a Touchstone file Data contains frequency dependent array of matrixes Touchstone files must foll
243. ers a breakpoint or when the auto detection algorithm finds numerical oscillations For the syntax and description of this control option see OPTION METHOD in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference OPTION MAXORD You use the MAXORD option to select the maximum order of integration for the GEAR method Either the first order Gear Backward Euler or the second order Gear Gear 2 integration method For the syntax and description of this control option see OPTION MAXORD in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference OPTION SIM ORDER You use the SIM ORDER option to control the amount of Backward Euler BE to mix with the Trapezoidal method for hybrid integration This option affects time stepping when you set OPTION METHOD to TRAP or TRAPGEAR For the syntax and description of this control option see OPTION SIM ORDER in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference OPTION SIM TG THETA You use the SIM TG THETA option to control the amount of Gear 2 method to mix with trapezoidal integration for the hybrid TRAPGEAR method For the syntax and description of this control option see OPTION SIM TG THETA in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference HSPICE RF User Guide 317 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 14 Using HSPICE with HSPICE RF RF Transient Analysis Output File Formats OPTION SIM TRAP You use the SIM TRAP option to change the default SIM TG THETA to 0 so that method trapgear acts like METHOD TRAP For the
244. es the product of both levels Do not assign a negative value or zero as the M value HSPICE RF User Guide 73 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Using Subcircuits 74 S Scale Parameter To scale a subcircuit use the S local scale parameter This parameter behaves in much the same way as the M parameter in the preceding section OPTION hier scale value OPTION scale value X1 nodel node2 subname S valueM parameter The OPTION HIER SCALE statement defines how HSPICE RF interprets the S parameter where value is either 0 the default indicating a user defined parameter or 1 indicating a scale parameter The OPTION SCALE statement defines the original default scale of the subcircuit The specified S scale is relative to this default scale of the subcircuit The scale in the subname subcircuit is value scale Subcircuits can originate from multiple sources so scaling is multiplicative cumulative throughout your design hierarchy xl a y inv S 1u subckt inv in out x2 a b kk S 1m ends In this example HSPICE RF scales the x1 subcircuit by the first S scaling value 1u scale Because scaling is cumulative X2 a subcircuit of X1 is then scaled in effect by the S scaling values of both X1 and X2 1m 1u scale Using Hierarchical Parameters to Simplify Simulation You can use the hierarchical parameter to simplify simulations An example is shown in the following listing and Figu
245. es with MEASURE on page 239 Errors and Warnings HBNOISE Errors See the list of HBAC Errors and Warnings on page 257 Example This example performs an HB analysis then runs an HBNOISE analysis over a range of frequencies from 9 0e8 to 8 8e8 Hz Simulation outputs the output noise at V out and the single side band noise figure versus IFB from 1e8 to 1 2e8 Hz to the pnO file The netlist for this example is shown immediately following hb tones 1e9 nharms 16 hbnoise V out Rin lin 10 1e8 1 2e8 probe hbnoise onoise nf Ideal mixer noise source prints total noise at the output 2 47e 20 V 2 Hz single sideband noise figure 3 01 dB double sideband noise figure 0 dB OPTION PROBE OPTION POST 2 vlo lo 0 0 0 hb 1 00 1 1 Periodic HB Input Ilo lo 0 0 rsrc rfin rfl 1 0 Noise source gl 0 if cur 1 0 v lo v rfin mixer element rout if 0 1 0 vrf rf1 0 hbac 2 0 0 0 hb tones 1 0g nharms 4 sweep mval 12 1 HBNOISE rout rsrc lin 11 0 90g 0 92g print HBNOISE onoise ssnf dsnf end HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Frequency Translation S Parameter HBLIN Extraction Frequency Translation S Parameter HBLIN Extraction Frequency translation scattering parameter S parameter extraction is used to describe N port circuits that exhibit frequency translation effects such as mixers The analysis is similar to the existing LIN an
246. esidual Target GMRES Residual Maximum Krylov Iterations Actual Krylov Iterations taken Multitone Nonlinear Steady State Analysis HBNOISE 258 An HBNOISE Harmonic Balance noise analysis simulates the noise behavior in periodic systems It uses a Periodic AC PAC algorithm to perform noise analysis of nonautonomous driven circuits under periodic steady state tone conditions This can be extended to quasi periodic systems having more than one periodic steady state tone One application for a multitone HBNOISE analysis is determining mixer noise figures under the influence of a strong interfering signal The PAC method simulates noise assuming that the stationary noise sources and or the transfer function from the noise source to a specific output are periodically modulated The modulated noise source thermal shot or flicker is modeled as a cyclostationary noise source A PAC algorithm solves the modulated transfer function You can also use the HBNOISE PAC method with correlated noise sources including the MOSFET level 9 and level 11 models and the behavioral noise source in the G Element Voltage Dependent Current Source You use the HBNOISE statement to perform a Periodic Noise Analysis Supported Features HBNOISE supports the following features All existing HSPICE RF noise model Uses more than one single tone harmonic balance to generate the steady state solution HSPICE RF User Guid
247. ete signals or move signals from one chart panel to another e Use the Attributes menu item to control how the signal looks Use the Stack Region menu to move signals You can move a signal to a new panel or an existing panel The existing panels are named Analog 0 Analog 1 and so on Analog 0 is the bottom panel on a chart e Use the To Time Domain command to convert a histogram plot for example from a hb0 file to a time domain signal Right click a horizontal or vertical axis to control an axis Using the Axis Attributes dialog you can use the Axis Menu to configure the axis precisely e Use the Range submenu to zoom in or out e Use the Scale submenu to switch between linear and logarithmic scales e Lock Out New Signals creates an independent axis when you create a new panel e Display Range Slider displays a region next to the axis Click in that region to pan the display right left up or down To zoom in and out use the Axis Attributes dialog the zoom buttons on the tool bar or the mouse directly on the chart window To attach a marker to a signal click on a signal label then click the Vertical Marker or Horizontal Marker icons in the tool bar You can use the mouse to drag the marker along the signal to see the signal s precise value at different points Choose Tools Calculator to open the Waveform Calculator tool This tool can be used to generate new waveforms from existing ones It
248. example CHECK RISE min max nodel node2 hi lo hi th lo th Figure 47 RISE Time Example HI HI thresh LO thresh LO 1 5ns t 2 2ns For syntax and description of this statement see CHECK RISE in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference You use the CHECK FALL statement to verify that a fall time occurs within the specified window of time For example CHECK FALL min max nodel node2 hi lo hi th lo th For syntax and description of this statement see CHECK FALL in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Edge Timing Verification The edge condition verifies that a triggering event provokes an appropriate RISE or FALL action within the specified time window You use the CHECK EDGE statement to verify this condition For example CHECK EDGE ref RISE FALL min max RISE FALL nodel lt node2 gt lt hi lo hi th low th gt HSPICE RF User Guide 379 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Using CHECK Statements Figure 48 EDGE Example voutA CLK HI HI thresh LO thresh LO 1ns t 3ns For syntax and description of this statement see CHECK EDGE in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Setup and Hold Verification You use the CHECK SETUP and CHECK HOLD statements to ensure that specified signals do not switch for a specified period of time For example CHECK SETUP ref RISE FALL duration RI
249. example if you set inductance to 6 and inductance unit to 2 UH then the actual inductance value is 12 microhenries SPEF File Example SPEF IEEE 1481 1998 DESIGN My design DATE 11 26 34 Friday June 28 2002 VENDOR Synopsys Inc PROGRAM Star RCXT VERSION 2002 2 DESIGN FLOW EXTERNAL LOADS EXTERNAL SLEWS MISSING NETS DIVIDER DELIMITER BUS DELIMITER T UNIT 1 NS C UNIT 1 PF R UNIT 1 OHM L UNIT 1 HENRY POWER NETS VDD GND NETS VSS PORTS CONTROL O L 30 S 0 0 FARLOAD O L 30 S 0 0 INVXIFNTC IN I L 30 S 5 5 NEARLOAD O L 30 S 0 0 TREE O L 30 S 0 0 HSPICE RF User Guide 305 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation lf you use triplet format the above section would look like this PORT S CONTROL O L 30 30 30 S 0 0 FARLOAD O L 30 30 30 S 0 0 INVXIFNTC IN I L 30 30 30 NEARLOAD O L 30 30 30 S 0 TREE O L 30 30 30 S 0 0 0 This triplet formatting principle applies to the rest of this example D NET INVXIFNTC IN 0 033 CONN P INVXIFNTC IN I I FL 1281 A L 0 033 END D NET INVXIFNTC 2 033341 CONN I FL 1281 X O L 0 0 I I1184 A I L 0 343 I FL 1000 A I L 0 343 I NL 1000 A I L 0 343 I TR 1000 A I L 0 343 CAP 216 FL 1000 A 0 346393 217 I1184 A 0 344053 218 INVXIFNTC IN 0 219 INVXIFNTC IN 10 0 154198 220 INVXIFNTC IN 11 0 117827 221 INVXIFNTC IN 12 0 463063 222 INVXIFNTC IN 13 0 03843
250. fault is 1 e 9 HBPROBETOL HBOSC analysis tries to find a probe voltage at which the probe current is less than HBPROBETOL This option defaults to the value of HBTOL which defaults to 1 e 9 HBMAXOSCITER Maximum number of outer loop iterations for HBOSC analysis It defaults to 10000 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Phase Noise Analysis HBOSC Output Syntax The output syntax for HBOSC analysis is identical to that for HB analysis see Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis To output the final frequency of oscillation use the HERTZ keyword For example hertz 1 identifies the fundamental frequency of oscillation Phase Noise Analysis Figure 19 shows a simple free running oscillator which includes a port with injected current Figure 19 Oscillator with Injected Current O In D v t O O e An ideal oscillator would be insensitive to perturbations with a fixed amplitude frequency and phase represented by v t Acos ogt 69 A noisy oscillator has amplitude and phase fluctuations v t A t cos Wpt 1 In the preceding equation A t is the time varying amplitude for the noisy oscillator ft is the time varying phase for the noisy oscillator sg is the frequency of oscillation In most applications the phase noise is of particular interest because it represents frequency fluctuations about the f
251. field should contain the Pr rload 1 0 trace Select a Powerln value from the list The power value should be as large as possible but still well within the linear range of the amplifier Try 25dbm Click the Apply button Result CosmoScope will show the linear gain of the amplifier and the 1dBcompression point The 3rd order intercept point is also measured by using the measurement tool Use the down arrow at the end of the Measurement field and select RF and IPS SFDR The PowerOut1 field should contain the Pr rload 1 0 trace and the PowerOut3 field should contain the Pr rload 2 1 trace Select a Powerln value from the list The power value should be a value that is as large as possible but still well within the linear range of the amplifier Try 25dbm HSPICE RF User Guide 25 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 3 Amplifier IP3 11 Click Apply Result CosmosScope will show the 3rd order intercept point of the amplifier 26 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 4 Colpitts Oscillator Example 4 Colpitts Oscillator This section demonstrates HSPICE RF oscillator analysis using a single transistor oscillator circuit Oscillator analysis is an extension of Harmonic Balance in which the base frequency itself is an unknown to be solved for In oscillator analysis the user supplies a guess at the base frequency and no voltage or current source stimu
252. file is a normal line and not a comment Subsequent lines of period Netlist keyword For example netlist and all lines of TRAN 0 5ns 20ns included files c C d D e E f F g G h Element instantiation H 1 I J J k K 1 L m M q Q r R S S V V w W asterisk Comment line HSPICE number Comment line HSPICE RF plus Continues previous line HSPICE RF User Guide 45 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Guidelines 46 Delimiters An input token is any item in the input file that HSPICE RF recognizes Input token delimiters are tab blank comma equal sign and parentheses Single or double quotes delimit expressions and filenames Colons delimit element attributes for example M1 VGS Periods indicate hierarchy For example x1 x2 n1 is the n1 node on the X2 subcircuit of the X1 circuit Node Identifiers Node identifiers can be up to 1024 characters long including periods and extensions Node identifiers are used for node numbers and node names Node numbers are valid in the range of 0 through 9999999999999999 1 1e16 Leading zeros in node numbers are ignored Trailing characters in node numbers are ignored For example node 1A is the same as node 1 A node name can begin with any of these characters Lee fees T amp For additional information see Node Naming Conventions on page 58 To mak
253. for both NMOS and PMOS devices which is consistent with the physics of manufacturing RC Time Constant This simple example shows uniform distribution for resistance and capacitance It also shows the resulting transient waveforms for 10 different random values You can find the sample netlist for this example in the following directory installdir demo hspice apps rc_monte sp HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis Figure 35 Monte Carlo Analysis of RC Time Constant FILE NOM1 SP WITH UNIFORM DISTRIBUTION May 15 2003 12 38 49 _ MONT1 SVO 992 750N i 3 2 gt a 900 0N 800 0N i Z 700 0N 2 z 1 gt 600 0N 9 500 0N 8 400 0N 7 5 d 26 3000N o Pow A we Eee Sava ML pe 8 oa dg I L La L r L I BER r 1 0 200 0N 400 0N 600 0N 800 0N 1 0 TIME LIN Switched Capacitor Filter Design Capacitors used in switched capacitor filters consist of parallel connections of a basic cell Use Monte Carlo techniques in HSPICE RF to estimate the variation in total capacitance The capacitance calculation uses two distributions Minor element distribution of cell capacitance from cell to cell on a single die m Major model distribution of the capacitance from wafer to wafer or from manufacturing run to run HSPICE RF User Guide 345 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte
254. gt lt R repeat gt lt TD delay gt lt options gt Ixxx nl n2 PWL PWLFILE filename coll col2 lt R repeat gt TD delay lt options gt Parameter Description VXXX Independent voltage source Ixxx Independent current source ni n2 Positive and negative terminal node names PWL Keyword for piecewise linear HSPICE RF User Guide 199 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements SWEEPBLOCK in Sweep Analyses Parameter Description PWLFILE Text file containing the PWL data consisting of time and voltage or current pairs This file should not contain a header row unless it is a comment The PWL source data is obtained by extracting col1 and col2 from the file col1 col2 Time values are in col1 and voltage or current values are in col2 By default col121 and col2 2 R Repeat function When an argument is not specified the source repeats from the beginning of the function The argument repeated is the time in seconds which specifies the start point of the waveform being repeat The repeat time must be less than the greatest time point in the file TD Time delay in seconds of the PWL function options Any standard V or source options Example Vit It plus It neg PWL PWLFILE Imod dat SWEEPBLOCK in Sweep Analyses You can use the SWEEPBLOCK statement to specify complicated sweeps Sweeps affect 200 DC sweep analysis Parameter sweeps around TRAN AC or HB analyses
255. gt gt gt gt gt gt gt transient waveform TRANFORHB 0 1 gt lt DCOPEN 0 1 gt Source Impedance Information Z0 val RDC val lt RAC val gt RHBAC val RHB val lt RTRAN val gt Power Switch KKKKKKKK power 0 1 2 W dbm gt H Parameter Description port portnumber The port number Numbered sequentially beginning with 1 with no shared port numbers lt DC mag gt DC voltage or power source value lt AC lt mag lt phase gt gt gt AC voltage or power source value lt HBAC lt mag lt phase gt gt gt HSPICE RF HBAC voltage or power source value HB mag phase lt harm HSPICE RF HB voltage current or power source tone modharm value Multiple HB specifications with different harm lt modtone gt gt gt gt gt gt gt tone modharm and modtone values are allowed phase is in degrees harm and tone are indices corresponding to the tones specified in the HB statement Indexing starts at 1 corresponding to the first harmonic of a tone modtone and modharm specify sources for multi tone simulation A source specifies a tone and a harmonic and up to 1 offset tone and harmonic modtone for tones and modharm for harmonics The signal is then described as V or I mag cos 2 pi harm tone modharm modtone t phase transient waveform Transient analysis Voltage or power source waveform Any one of waveforms AM EXP PU
256. h an alphabetic character but thereafter can contain numbers and the following characters t ee lt gt LI Tt e When you use an asterisk or a question mark with a PRINT PROBE PRINT HSPICE RF or CHECK HSPICE RF statement HSPICE or HSPICE RF uses the character as a wildcard For additional information see Using Wildcards on Node Names on page 59 e When you use curly brackets HSPICE converts them to square brackets automatically HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Guidelines e Names are input tokens Token delimiters must precede and follow names See Delimiters below e Names can be up to 1024 characters long and are not case sensitive e Do not use any of the time keywords as a parameter name or node name in your netlist e The following symbols are reserved operator keywords Do not use these symbols as part of any parameter or node name that you define Using any of these reserved operator keywords as names causes a syntax error and HSPICE RF stops immediately First Character The first character in every line specifies how HSPICE RF interprets the remaining line Table 4 lists and describes the valid characters Table 4 First Character Descriptions Line If the First Character is Indicates First line of a netlist Any character Title or comment line The first line of an included
257. hapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Table 24 SPEF Parameters Continued Parameter Definition flow_type One or more of the following flow types EXTERNAL LOADS The SPEF file defines all external loads if any If you do not specify this flow type then some or all external loads are not defined in this SPEF file If HSPICE RF cannot find external load data outside the SPEF file it reports an error EXTERNAL SLEWS The SPEF file defines all external slews if any If you do not specify this flow type then some or all external slews are not defined in this SPEF file If HSPICE RF cannot find external slew data outside the SPEF file it reports an error FULL CONNECTIVITY A SPEF file defines all net connectivity If you do not specify this flow type then some or all net connectivity is not defined in this SPEF file If HSPICE RF cannot find connectivity data outside the SPEF file it issues an error This flow does not look for presence or absence of power and ground nets or any other nets that do not correspond to the logical netlist If a SPEC file includes FULL CONNECTIVITY and MISSING NETS HSPICE RF reports an error MISSING NETS If any logical nets are not defined in the netlist HSPICE RF merges missing parasitic data from another source If it does not find another source HSPICE RF rereads the netlist and estimates the missing parasitics This flow does not look for presence or absence of
258. hase Noise Analysis Phase Noise Analysis 238 The computation time for the PAC algorithm is approximately linearly dependent on the number of frequency points in the phasenoise frequency sweep If you are using the PAC algorithm you should try to minimize the number of points in the sweep Another issue is that the PAC algorithm becomes more ill conditioned as you approach the carrier This means that you may have to generate a steady state solution with more harmonics to get an accurate simulation as you get closer to the carrier So if you find that the PAC is rolling off at close in frequencies you should rerun HB analysis with a larger number of harmonics Although typically you will not see improvements in PAC accuracy beyond more than about 100 200 harmonics Early in your testing the best way to verify that NLP and PAC are giving accurate results is to run both algorithms over a broad frequency range and check that the curves have some range in frequency where they overlap Typically you will see the NLP curve rolling off at 20 to 30 dB decade as frequency increases characteristic of white noise or 1 f noise behavior Also the PAC curve will at first be flat or even noisy close to the carrier At some point though you will see this curve match the NLP roll off The lowest frequency at which the curves overlap defines the point fpac above which the PAC algorithm is valid Sometimes by increasing the number of HB harmonics it
259. he same node The second subcircuit node name is a unique number that HSPICE automatically assigns to an input netlist subcircuit The extension concatenates this number with the internal node name to form the entire subcircuit s node name for example 10 M5 The output listing file cross references the node name Note HSPICE RF does not support short names for internal subcircuits such as 10 M5 To indicate the ground node use either the number 0 the name GND or GND Every node should have at least two connections except for transmission line nodes unterminated transmission lines are permitted and MOSFET substrate HSPICE RF User Guide 61 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition 62 nodes which have two internal connections Floating power supply nodes are terminated with a 1Megohm resistor and a warning message Path Names of Subcircuit Nodes A path name consists of a sequence of subcircuit names starting at the highest level subcircuit call and ending at an element or bottom level node Periods separate the subcircuit names in the path name The maximum length of the path name including the node name is 1024 characters You can use path names in PRINT PLOT NODESET and IC statements as another way to reference internal nodes nodes not appearing on the parameter list You can use the path name to reference any node including any internal no
260. hical levels Tocentralize the control at the top of the design hierarchy set global parameters To construct a library of small cells that are individually controlled from within set oca parameters and build up to the block level This section describes the scope of parameter names and how HSPICE resolves naming conflicts between levels of hierarchy HSPICE RF User Guide 143 Y 2006 03 SP1 Library Integrity Integrity is a fundamental requirement for any symbol library Library integrity can be as simple as a consistent intuitive name scheme or as complex as libraries with built in range checking Library integrity might be poor if you use libraries from different vendors in a circuit design Because names of circuit parameters are not standardized between vendors two components can include the same parameter name for different functions For example one vendor might build a library that uses the name Tau as a parameter to control one or more subcircuits in their library Another vendor might use Tau to control a different aspect of their library If you set a global parameter named Tau to control one library you also modify the behavior of the second library which might not be the intent If the scope of a higher level parameter is global to all subcircuits at lower levels of the design hierarchy higher level definitions override lower level parameter values with the same names The scope of a lower level parameter is
261. how to use periodically driven nonlinear circuit analyses as well as noise parameter calculation Describes how to use harmonic balance based AC analysis as well as nonlinear steady state noise analysis Describes how to use envelope simulation Describes the post layout flow including post layout back annotation DSPF and SPEF files linear acceleration check statements and power analysis Describes how various analysis features differ in HSPICE RF as compared to standard HSPICE Describes how to invoke HSPICE RF and how to perform advanced tasks including redirecting input and output The HSPICE Documentation Set xiv This manual is a part of the HSPICE documentation set which includes the following manuals Manual Description HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE Signal Integrity Guide Describes how to use HSPICE to simulate and analyze your circuit designs This is the main HSPICE user guide Describes how to use HSPICE to maintain signal integrity in your chip design HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 About This Manual The HSPICE Documentation Set Manual Description HSPICE Applications Manual HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference HPSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual HPSPICE MOSFET Models Manual HSPICE RF Manual AvanWaves User Guide HSPICE Quick Reference Guide HSPICE Device Models Quick Reference Guide Provides application ex
262. iables and Subcircuits The following rules apply when you use an ALTER block to alter design variables and subcircuits in HSPICE This section does not apply to HSPICE HF lf the name of a new element MODEL statement or subcircuit definition is identical to the name of an original statement of the same type then the new statement replaces the old Add new statements in the input netlist file You can alter element and MODEL statements within a subcircuit definition You can also add a new element or MODEL statement to a subcircuit definition To modify the topology in subcircuit definitions put the element into libraries To add a library use LIB to delete use DEL LIB fa parameter name in a new PARAM statement in the ALTER module is identical to a previous parameter name then the new assigned value replaces the old value Jf you used parameter variable values for elements or model parameter values when you used ALTER use the PARAM statement to change these parameter values Do not use numerical values to redescribe elements or model parameters If you used an OPTION statement in an original input file or a ALTER block to turn on an option you can turn that option off HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition Each ALTER simulation run prints only the actual altered input A special ALTER title identifies the run
263. ient period FMAX Specifies the possible maximum frequency of interest The default value is the frequency point where the function reaches close enough to infinity value assuming that the monotonous function is approaching the infinity value and that it is taken at 10THz The equation should be a function of HERTZ If CONVOLUTION is turned on when a HERTZ keyword is not used in the equation it is automatically be turned off to let the resistor behave as conventional The equation can be a function of temperature but it cannot be node voltage or branch current and time The equation can only be a function of time independent variables such as hertz and temperature Example R11 2 r 1 0 le 5 sqrt HERTZ CONVOLUTION 1 Capacitors The following general input syntax is for a capacitor Cxxx nodel node2 lt modelname gt lt C gt capacitance lt TCl val gt lt TC2 val gt lt W val gt lt L val gt lt DTEMP val gt lt M val gt lt SCALE val gt lt IC val gt CXXX n n2 C equation CTYPE 0 1 2 Parameter Description Cxxx Capacitor element name Must begin with C followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Passive Elements Parameter Description node1 and node2 capacitance modelname C TC1 TC2 W L M DTEMP SCALE IC equation CTYPE Names or nu
264. ify more general types of a reference line system The default is 50 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines Parameter Description FBASE FMAX PRECFAC DELAYHANDLE DELAYFREQ INTERPOLATION HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Base frequency used for transient analysis HSPICE uses this value as the base frequency point for Inverse Fast Fourier Transformation IFFT f FBASE is not set HSPICE uses a reciprocal of the transient period as the base frequency f FBASE is set smaller than the reciprocal value of transient period transient analysis performs circular convolution by using the reciprocal value of FBASE as a base period Maximum frequency for transient analysis Used as the maximum frequency point for Inverse Fast Fourier Transform IFFT Preconditioning factor to avoid a singularity infinite admittance matrix See Preconditioning S Parameters on page 131 Default 0 75 Delay frequency for transmission line type parameters Default OFF 1 of ON activates the delay handler See Group Delay Handler in Time Domain Analysis on page 130 0 of OFF default deactivates the delay handler You must set the delay handler if the delay of the model is longer than the base period specified in the FBASE parameter If you set DELAYHANDLE OFF but DELAYFQ is not zero HSPICE simulates the S element in delay mode Delay frequency for transmission lin
265. igher HSPICE RF supports only the XREF COMPLETE flow and the XREF NO flow from Star RCXT Refer to the Star RCXT User Guide for more information about the XREF flow To generate a hierarchical LVS ideal netlist with Star RCXT include the following options in the Star RCXT command file for XREF NO flow NETLIST IDEAL SPICE FILE ideal spice netlist sp NETLIST IDEAL SPICE TYPE layout NETLIST IDEAL SPICE HIER YES for XREF COMPLETE flow NETLIST IDEAL SPICE FILE ideal spice netlist sp NETLIST IDEAL SPICE TYPE schematic NETLIST IDEAL SPICE HIER YES Note Before version 2002 2 Star RCXT used NETLIST IDEAL SPICE SKIP CELLS to generate the hierarchical ideal SPICE netlist HSPICE RF can still simulate post layout designs using the brute force flow but the post layout flow is preferable in HSPICE RF 284 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation HSPICE RF supports these post layout flows to address your post layout simulation needs Standard Post Layout Flow Selective Post Layout Flow Additional Post Layout Options Standard Post Layout Flow Use this flow mainly for analog or mixed signal design and high coverage verification runs when you need to back annotate RC parasitics into the hierarchical LVS ideal netlist In this flow HSPICE RF expands all nets from the DSPF or SPEF file To expand only selected nets use see Selective Pos
266. ilar to the setup in the file test3 sp The result shows four different curves with a large common part and small separate parts The amount of variation defined in the two files is the same The curves look different from the test3 sp results because different random sequences are used However the statistical results sigma converge for a large number of samples There is no option available to select only local or only global variations This can be an obstacle if the file is read only or encrypted Combinations of Variation Specifications Specifying distributions on parameters and applying them to model parameters can be used on some models and the DEV LOT approach on others in the same simulation test13 sp has DEV LOT specified for model res1 and the parameter width for model res2 The values for the resistors with model res1 are different and the values for resistors with model res2 are the same test14 sp is similar to test7 sp and has modmonte 1 specified All four resistors have different values However note that in reality the sigma for width would be different when simulating local or global variations test 5 sp has instance parameter variations specified on two resistors and DEV LOT on two others From the waveforms v3 and v4 form a first pair and v1 and v2 a second pair HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Simulating the Effects of Global and Local
267. ile Open Plotfiles dialog Be sure to change the Files of Type filter to find the hbO file Using the signal manager view the v out signals from the pa trO file A time domain waveform appears View the v out signal from the pa hbO file This should be a histogram with lines at 950MHz and multiples thereof up to 9 5GHz Right click on the waveform label for v out from the pa hb0 file and choose To Time Domain Change the X End sec value to 10n Click OK to accept the default interval value You should now see a new waveform called timedomain v out Left click on the timedomain v out label hold and drag the signal to the plot containing v out This should overlay the v out and timedomain v out signals on the same panel Zoom into the transitions to see the slight differences between the waveforms HSPICE RF User Guide 21 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 3 Amplifier IP3 Example 3 Amplifier IP3 This example takes the LNA circuit of Example 1 and performs a simulation using two closely spaced steady state tones to study the compression and third order distortion properties of the amplifier The example file is located at lt install_dir gt demo hspicerf examples gsminalP3 sp k NMOS 0 25um Cascode LNA for GSM applications Test bench setup for two tone power sweep in dBm to extract IP3 kk temp 27 options post 2 param Vdd 2 3 global gnd pa
268. illator schematic shown in Figure 1 and performs phase noise analysis kk NMOS IC Quadrature VCO circuit for GPS local oscillator kk Twin differential negative resistance VCOs using NMOS transistors for varactors coupled to produce quadrature resonances Design based on 0 35um CMOS process kk References gt P Vancorenland and M S J Steyaert A 1 57 GHz fully integrated very low phase noise quadrature VCO kx IEEE Trans Solid State Circuits May 2002 pp 653 656 gt J van der Tang P van de Ven D Kasperkovitz and A Roermund Analysis and design of an optimally coupled 5 GHz quadrature LC oscillator IEEE Trans Solid State Circuits May 2002 KK pp 657 661 gt F Behbahani H Firouzkouhi R Chokkalingam S Delshadpour A Kheirkhani M Nariman M Conta and S Bhatia A fully integrated low IF CMOS GPS radio with on chip analog image rejection IEEE Trans Solid State Circuits Dec 2002 pp 1721 1727 kk Setup for Harmonic Balance Analysis kk HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 5 CMOS GPS VCO Oscillation Frequency 1575 MHz GPS L1 frequency Amplitude 5 Volts peak to peak zero to 5V Vdd 2 5 V kk HSPICE Simulation Options option delmax 1n ACCURATE LIST NODE kk HSPICE RF Simulation Options option sim accuracy 10 kk option savehb a hbs loadhb a hbs option
269. in 0 1 1 1 2 2 4403125 GHz Vrfc inb inc HB Vin 0 1 1 2 2 S 2 440 GHz Vrfd inc ind HB Vin 0 1 1 1 2 S 2 4409375 GHz Vrfe ind gnd HB Vin 0 1 1 2 2 2 44125 GHz HB tones fcenter deltaf intmodmax 5 Phase Differences Between HB and SIN Sources 186 The HB steady state cosine source has a phase variation compared to the TRAN time domain SIN source The SIN source with no offset delay or damping follows the equation Asin ot while the HB sources follow Acos ot In order for the two sources to yield identical results it is necessary to align them by setting their phase values accordingly using Acos of 0 Asin ot 90 4 sin f Acos ot p 90 To specify sources with matching phase for HB and TRAN analysis use a convention similar to Example 1 with equivalent HB and SIN sources SIN source is given 90 phase shift param freql 2400MEG Vin 1 0 Vsrc in gnd DC 0 HB Vin 0 1 1 SIN O Vin freql 0 0 90 HB tones freql intmodmax 7 Example 2 with equivalent HB and SIN sources HB source is given 90 phase shift to align with SIN param freql 2400MEG Vin 1 0 Vsrc in gnd DC 0 HB Vin 90 1 1 SIN O Vin fregl 0 HB tones freql intmodmax 7 Example 3 with equivalent HB and TRAN sources SIN source is activated for HB using TRANFORHB param freql 2400MEG Vin 1 0 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP 1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Nois
270. indow HAMM Hamming window BLACK Blackman window HARRIS Blackman Harris window GAUSS Gaussian window KAISER Kaiser Bessel window ALFA Controls the highest side lobe level and bandwidth for GAUSS and KAISER windows The default is 3 0 Description You use the ENVFFT command to perform Fast fourier Transform FFT on envelope output This command is similar to the FFT command The only difference is that transformation is performed on real data with the FFT HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 12 Envelope Analysis Envelope Simulation command and with the ENVFFT command the data being transformed is complex You usually want to do this for a specific harmonic of a voltage current or power signal Example envfft v out 1 Output Syntax The results from envelope simulation can be made available through the PRINT PROBE and MEASURE commands This section describes the basic syntax you can use for this purpose PRINT or PROBE You can print or probe envelope simulation results by using the following commands PRINT ENV ovl lt ov2 gt PROBE ENV ovl lt ov2 gt Where ov1 are the output variables to print or probe MEASURE In HSPICE RF the independent variable for envelope simulation is the first tone Otherwise and except for the analysis type the MEASURE statement syntax is the same as the syntax for HB for example MEASURE ENV result Envelope Output Data File Form
271. ine xx direction with spatial and time dependence given according to the following equation v x t Reja e P Bem Px Wot Ref Ae B ors 0 0 The A represents the incident voltage B represents the reflected voltage Zo is the characteristic impedance and p is the propagation constant The latter are related to the transmission line inductance L and capacitance C by the following equation B e JLC The L and C terms are in per unit length units Henries meter Farads meter The following equation gives the phase velocity 1 ALC At the end of the transmission line x L the propagation term B becomes the following equation aa v a Bl wVLC l ot P HSPICE RF User Guide 121 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines 122 This is equivalent to an ideal delay with the following value WER BON nu P Where T absolute time delay sec L physical length L meters V phase velocity meters sec Using standard distance velocity time relationships the HSPICE T element parameter values are related to these terms according to Vp fh 3 Where f frequency a wavelength t relative time delay TD sec meter T 7 elo ss JLC 1 Where physical length L meters 49 normalized length NL f frequency at NL F Hz T TD L T JLC L HSPICE therefore allows you to specify a transmission line in three different Ways Zp TDL
272. ines U Element 123 Trapezoidal TRAP integration algorithm 315 316 TREF model parameter 329 tutorial 15 overview 1 simulation engine 1 two tone HB 38 U UNIF keyword 339 uniform parameter distribution 335 unit atto configuration option configuration options unit atto 367 397 Index V v supply configuration option configuration options v supply 367 variables changing in ALTER blocks 66 67 Hspice specific 142 variance statistical 327 VCD format 319 vector modualted RF 192 vector modulated RF E element 198 F element 198 G element 198 H element 198 element 194 implementation 192 V element 194 vendor libraries 76 VMRF lt em gt See vector modulated RF 192 Vnn node name in CSOS 63 W W Elements 115 warnings floating power supply nodes 62 waveform display 12 398 WDB format 319 wildcard uses 59 369 wildcard_left_range configuration option configuration options wildcard_left_range 367 wildcard_match_all configuration option configuration options wildcard_match_all 368 wildcard_match_one configuration option configuration options wildcard_match_one 368 wildcard_right_range configuration option configuration options wildcard_right_range 368 worst case analysis 330 347 356 Worst Case Corners Analysis 326 X X variable 371 XL model parameter 331 XPHOTO model parameter 344 XW model parameter 331 Y yield analysis 326
273. iod 158 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Passive Elements Parameter Description FMAX Specifies the possible maximum frequency of interest The default value is the frequency point where the function reaches close enough to infinity value assuming that the monotonous function is approaching the infinity value and that it is taken at 10THz Example L11 2 L 0 5n 0 5n 1 HERTZ 1e8 CONVOLUTION 1 fbase 10 fmax 30meg DC Block and Choke Elements In HSPICE RF you can specify an INFINITY value for capacitors and inductors to model ideal DC block and choke elements The following input syntax is for the DC block ideal infinite capacitor Syntax Cxxx nodel node2 lt C gt INFINITY IC val HSPICE RF does not support any other capacitor parameters for DC block elements because HSPICE RF assumes that the infinite capacitor value is independent of temperature and scaling factors The DC block acts as an open circuit for all DC analyses HSPICE RF calculates the DC voltage across the circuits nodes In all other non DC analyses a DC voltage source of this value represents the DC block that is HSPICE RF does not then allow dv dt variations The following input syntax is for the Choke ideal infinite inductor Syntax Lxxx nodel node2 L INFINITY IC val HSPICE RF does not support any other inductor parameters because HSPICE RF assumes that the infinite
274. ion 0 Use zero in Y dimension open circuit 1 Use lowest frequency default 2 Use linear extrapolation with the lowest two points This option overrides EXTRAPOLATION in MODEL SP 171 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Scattering Parameter Data Element 172 Parameter Specifies HIGHPASS PRECFAC DELAYHANDLE DELAYFREQ MIXEDMODE DATATYPE XLINELENGTH Specifies high frequency extrapolation 0 Use zero in Y dimension open circuit 1 Use highest frequency 2 Use linear extrapolation with the highest two points 3 Apply window function default This option overrides EXTRAPOLATION in MODEL SP Preconditioning factor to avoid a singularity in the form of an infinite admittance matrix See Pre Conditioning S Parameters on page 175 for more information The default 0 75 Delay handler for transmission line type parameters 1orON activates the delay handler See Group Delay Handler in Time Domain Analysis on page 175 0 or OFF default deactivates the delay handler You must set the delay handler if the delay of the model is longer than the base period specified in the FBASE parameter If you set DELAYHANDLE OFF but DELAYFQ is not zero HSPICE simulates the S element in delay mode Delay frequency for transmission line type parameters which is the frequency point when HSPICE RF extracts the matrix delay The default is the FMAX value which is the maximum frequency used in th
275. ions tran 1n 10 sweep monte 10 firstrun 90 You can write more than one number after ist The colon represents from to Specifying only one number makes HSPICE FF run only at that single point Example 1 In this example HSPICE RF begins running at the 10th iteration then continues from the 20th to the 30th at the 40th and finally from the 46th to 72nd Monte Carlo iteration The numbers after list can not be parameter HSPICE RF User Guide 337 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis 338 tran 1n 10n sweep monte list 10 20 30 40 46 72 Monte Carlo Output MEASURE statements are the most convenient way to summarize the results PRINT statements generate tabular results and print the values of all Monte Carlo parameters MCBRIEF determines the output types of the random parameters during Monte Carlo analysis to improve output performance lf one iteration is out of specification you can obtain the component values from the tabular listing A detailed resimulation of that iteration might help identify the problem AvanWaves superimposes all iterations as a single plot so you can analyze each iteration individually PARAM Distribution Function This section describes how to use assign a PARAM parameter in Monte Carlo analysis For a general description of the PARAM statement see the PARAM command in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Refere
276. is possible to move fpac to lower frequencies The highest frequency at which the curves overlap defines the point fui p below which the NLP algorithm is valid A rough rule of thumb is that fpAc f Q where f is the carrier frequency and Q is the oscillator Q value This implies that for high Q oscillators such as crystal and some harmonic oscillators that PAC will be accurate to values quite close to the carrier Broadband Phasenoise Algorithm The broadband phasenoise BPN algorithm has been added to HSPICE RF to allow phasenoise simulation over a broad frequency range The BPN algorithm actually runs both the NLP and PAC algorithms and then connects them in the overlap region to generate a single phasenoise curve This algorithm is ideal for verifying the NLP and PAC accuracy regions and when you require a phasenoise curve over a broad frequency range HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Phase Noise Analysis Measuring PHASENOISE Analyses with MEASURE The MEASURE PHASENOTSE syntax supports five types of measurements trigger target MEASURE PHASENOISE result TRIG trig var VAL trig val lt TD time delay gt lt CROSS C gt lt RISE r gt lt FALL f gt TARG This measurement yields the result of the frequency difference between the trigger event and the target event find when MEASURE PHASENOISE result FIND out varl WHEN out var2 out val2 T
277. ize the yield HSPICE RF supports statistical techniques and observes the effects of variations in element and model parameters HSPICE RF User Guide 325 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Analytical Model Types Analytical Model Types 326 To model parametric and statistical variation in circuit behavior use PARAM statement to investigate the performance of a circuit as you change circuit parameters For details about the PARAM statement see the PARAM statement in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Temperature variation analysis to vary the circuit and component temperatures and compare the circuit responses You can study the temperature dependent effects of the circuit in detail Monte Carlo analysis when you know the statistical standard deviations of component values to center a design This provides maximum process yield and determines component tolerances Worst case corner analysis when you know the component value limit to automate quality assurance for e basic circuit function process extremes e quick estimation of speed and power tradeoffs e best case and worst case model selection e parameter corners e library files Data driven analysis for cell characterization response surface or Taguchi analysis See Performing Digital Cell Characterization in the HSPICE Applications Manual Automates characterization of cells and calculates the coefficient of polynomi
278. l inductors involved must have the INFINITY value and for K IDEAL the ratio of all L values is unity Then for two L values v2 vl i2 i120 HSPICE RF User Guide 97 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Example 1 This example is a standard 5 pin ideal balun transformer subcircuit Two pins are grounded for standard operation With all K values being IDEAL the absolute L values are not crucial only their ratios are important k all K s ideal o outl Lol 25 X Oz Topora o 0 Lin 1 Lo2 25 BR WO usce H o out2 kk Subckt BALUN1 in outi out2 Lin in gnd L 1 Lol outl gnd L 0 25 Lo2 gnd out2 Lz0 25 K12 Lin Lol IDEAL K13 Lin Lo2 IDEAL K23 Lol Lo2 IDEAL ends Example 2 This example is a 2 pin ideal 4 1 step up balun transformer subcircuit with shared DC path no DC isolation Input and output have a common pin and both inductors have the same value Note that Rload 4 Rin kk all K s ideal in O o out in L1 1 LL ZZ L LL o 0 L2 1 RR eC o out2 kk With all K s ideal the actual L s values are not important only their ratio to each other Subckt BALUN2 in out2 L1 in gnd L 1 L2 gnd out2 L 1 K12 L1 L2 IDEAL ends 98 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Example 3 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements This example is a 3 pin ideal balun transformer with shared DC path no DC isolation All inductors have th
279. l set 334 Monte Carlo analysis 326 327 347 356 distribution options 338 339 Monte Carlo analaysis operating point results in transient analysis 349 MONTE keyword 336 MOSFETs drain diffusion area 112 elements 111 initial conditions 112 node names 111 perimeter 112 source 112 113 squares 112 temperature differential 113 zero bias voltage threshold shift 113 multiple ALTER statements 67 69 multiply parameter 72 81 393 Index mutual inductor 95 N natural log function 140 negative td configuration option configuration options negative td 367 netlist 51 file example 52 flat 51 input files 43 schematic 51 structure 52 netlist file example 52 nodes connection requirements 61 floating supply 62 internal 62 MOSFET s substrate 62 names 58 61 63 automatic generation 63 ground node 61 period in 59 subcircuits 61 62 zeros in 63 numbers 58 61 terminators 62 noise HBNOISE 258 noise parameter extraction small signal 247 nonlinear perturbation algorithm 237 numerical integration 315 316 NW output format 320 O operating point saving 63 operators 139 optimization 373 syntax 373 OPTION ALTER blocks 66 68 MAXORD 317 PURETP 318 394 SIM_ACCURACY 316 SIM_ANALOG 101 SIM_DELTAI 323 SIM_DELTAV 322 SIM_DSPF 286 SIM_DSPF_ACTIVE 286 289 SIM_DSPF_INSERROR 291 SIM_DSPF_LUMPCAPS 291 SIM DSPF MAX ITER 290 SIM DSPF RAIL 290 SIM DSPF SCALEC 290 SIM DSPF SCALER 290 SIM DSPF VTOL 289 SIM LA 286
280. le 17 on page 223 lists the warning messages Table 16 HB Analysis Error Messages File Description HB ERR 1 Harmonic numbers must be positive non zero HB ERHR 2 No hb frequencies given HB ERR 3 Negative frequency given HB ERR 4 Number of harmonics should be greater than zero HB ERHR 5 Different number of tones nharms HB ERR 6 Bad probe node format for oscillator analysis HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis HB Output Data Files Table 16 HB Analysis Error Messages Continued File Description HB ERR 7 Bad format for FSPTS HB_ERR 8 Bad hb keyword HB_ERR 9 Tones must be specified for hb analysis HB ERR 10 Nharms or intmodmax must be specified for hb analysis HB ERR 11 Source harmonic out of range HB ERHR 12 Source named in the tones list is not defined HB ERHR 13 Source named in the tones list does not have TRANFORHB specified HB ERHR 14 Source named in the tones list has no transient description HB ERHR 15 Source namedi in the tones list must be HB SIN PULSE PWL or VMRF HB ERHR 16 Tone specification for the source is inconsistent with its frequency HB ERHR 17 HB oscillator analysis has reached the NULL solution HB ERHR 18 Bad subharms format HB ERR 19 Modtone may not be set to the same value as tone Table 17 HB Analysis Warning Messages File Description HB WARN 1 hb multiply defined Last one will be used HB W
281. local to the subcircuit where you define the parameter but global to all subcircuits that are even lower in the design hierarchy Local scoping rules in HSPICE prevent higher level parameters from overriding lower level parameters of the same name when that is not desired Reusing Cells Parameter name problems also occur if different groups collaborate on a design Global parameters prevail over local parameters so all circuit designers must know the names of all parameters even those used in sections of the design for which they are not responsible This can lead to a large investment in standard libraries To avoid this situation use local parameter scoping to encapsulate all information about a section of a design within that section Creating Parameters in a Library To ensure that the input netlist includes critical user supplied parameters when you run simulation you can use illegal defaults that is defaults that cause the simulator to abort if you do not supply overrides for the defaults If a library cell includes illegal defaults you must provide a value for each instance of those cells If you do not the simulation aborts HSPICE RF User Guide 144 Y 2006 03 SP1 For example you might define a default MOSFET width of 0 0 HSPICE aborts because MOSFET models require this parameter Example 1 Subcircuit default definition SUBCKT Inv A Y Wid 0 Inherit illegal values by default mpl NodeList Model
282. ltage at frequency index i The conversion to a steady state time domain is then given by the Fourier series expansion An HB analysis produces these output data files Output from the PRINT HB statement is written to a printhb file e The header contains the large signal fundamental frequencies e The columns of data are labeled as HERTZ followed by frequency indices and then the output variable names e The sum of the frequency indices multiplied by the corresponding fundamental frequencies add up to the frequency in the first column HSPICE RF User Guide 221 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis HB Output Data Files 222 Output from the PROBE HB statement is written to a hb file It is in the same format as the HSPICE transient analysis tr file Besides the output waveform it contains the information of harmonic indices and basic tone frequencies m Output from the PRINT HBTRAN statement is written to a printhr file The format is identical to a print file Output from the PROBE HBTRAN statement is written to a hr file The format is identical to a tr file Reported performance log statistics are written to a lis file Name of HB data file Simulation time DC operating point op time HB time Total simulation time Memory used Size of matrix nodes harmonics Final HB residual error Errors and Warnings Table 16 lists the errors messages and Tab
283. ltiplies distribution to statistically reduce nominal parameters Random limit parameter distribution e Absolute variation adds variation to the average e Monte Carlo analysis randomly selects the min or max variation HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 335 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis 336 The value of the MONTE analysis keyword determines how many times to perform operating point DC sweep AC sweep or transient analysis Figure 30 Monte Carlo Distribution Gaussian Distribution Uniform Distribution Population Population Abs 3 Sigma Abs variation variation 4 gt gt Nom value Nom value Rel variation Abs variation Nom value Monte Carlo Setup To set up a Monte Carlo analysis use the following HSPICE statements PARAM statement sets a model or element parameter to a Gaussian Uniform or Limit function distribution DC AC Or TRAN analysis enables MONTE MEASURE statement calculates the output mean variance sigma and standard deviation MODEL statement sets model parameters to a Gaussian Uniform or Limit function distribution Select the type of analysis to run such as operating point DC sweep AC sweep or TRAN sweep Operating Point DC MONTE firstrun numl or DC MONTE list numi num2 lt num3 gt num5 num lt num7 gt lt gt DC Sweep
284. lue of Vp will be lower than V depending on the internal impedance and the network s input impedance With the alternate definition the internal voltage source value is adjusted to 2 V so that Vp V when the Port element s impedance is matched with the network input impedance The actual value of Vp will still depend on the port and network impedances Defines the hierarchy delimiter in the active nodes file in RCXT format Directs HSPICE RF to consider transistors with matching geometries except for NRD and NRS as identical for pre characterization purposes Activates detection of the atto unit Otherwise HSPICE RF assumes that a represents amperes Changes the default voltage supply range for characterization Begins range expression If you do not set negative td a negative time delay defaults to zero port element voltage matchload rcxt divider skip nrd nrs unit atto v supply 3 wildcard left range 367 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Creating a Configuration File Table 27 Configuration File Options Continued Keyword Description Example wildcard match all Matches any group of characters wildcard match all wildcard match one Matches any single character wildcard match one wildcard right range Ends range expression wildcard right range Note 368 For more information about wildcards see Using Wildcards in HSPICE RF on page 369 Inserting Comment
285. lus is needed To activate oscillator analysis include a HBOSC command with The TONE parameter set to a guess of the oscillation frequency The PROBENODE parameter set to identify an oscillating node or pair of nodes Always specify a pair of nodes if only one node oscillates specify ground as the second node To speed up the simulation also supply a guess at the magnitude of the oscillating voltage across these nodes The FSPTS parameter set to a frequency range and number of search points When you set FSPTS HSPICE RF precedes the HBOSC analysis with a frequency search in the specified range to obtain an optimal initial guess for the oscillation frequency This can accelerate the HB oscillator convergence In conjunction with oscillator analysis HSPICE RF can perform phase noise analysis Phase noise analysis measures the effect of transistor noise on the oscillator frequency Phase noise analysis is activated using the HBNOISE command this command sets a set of frequency points for phase noise analysis The PRINT and PROBE commands can be used to output phase noise values The following netlist osc sp simulates an oscillator and performs phase noise analysis This example is included with the HSPICE RF distribution as pa sp and is available in directory lt installdir gt demo hspicerf examples Use the HBOSC command with the PROBENODE and FSPTS parameters set PROBENODE emitter 0 4 27 Identifies the emitter
286. m IFB DSNF DSNF outputs a double side band noise figure as a function of the IFB points DSNF 10 Log DSF Double side band noise factor DSF Total Noise at output at the OFB originating from all frequencies Load Noise originating from the OFB Input Source Noise originating from the IFB and from the image of IFB Output Data Files An HBLIN analysis produces these output data files The S parameters from the PRINT statement are written to a printhl file The extracted S parameters from the PROBE statement are written to a hl file Computing Transfer Functions HBXF The HBXF command calculates the transfer function from a given source in the circuit to a designated output Frequency conversion is calculated from the input frequencies to a single output frequency that is specified with the command The relationship between the HBXF command and the input output is expressed in the following equation Y o9 2 HBXF jp j A X j Ao ogW HSPICE RF User Guide 271 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Computing Transfer Functions HBXF Where HBXF j j Ao is the transfer function from input port n to the output port m W is the set of all possible harmonics Aw is the input frequency Aw is the offset frequency m is the output node number n is the input node number is the output frequency Y is the out
287. m for periodic steady state analysis Perturbation analysis for Oscillator Phase Noise The HBAC command invokes phase periodic AC noise for oscillators circuits operating in a large signal steady state Oscillator phase noise analysis including both a nonlinear perturbation method and a PAC method and includes stationary cyclostationary frequency dependent and correlated noise effects Frequency translation S parameter and noise figure extraction with the HBLIN command Envelope analysis The ENV command invokes standard envelope simulation The ENVOSC command invokes envelope startup simulation The ENVFFT command invokes envelope Fast Fourier Transform simulation OPTION HBTRANINIT HBTRANPTS and HBTRANSTEP for transient analysis of ring oscillators Convolution for transient analysis of S parameter data models S element Calculation of the transfer function from an arbitrary source and harmonic in the circuit to a designated output with the HBXF command Reading encrypted netlists HSPICE RF User Guide 3 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 1 HSPICE RF Features and Functionality HSPICE RF Overview OPTION SIM ACCURACY provides simplified accuracy control for all simulations while OPTION SIM ORDER and SIM TRAP improve transient analysis simulation controls DSPF Flow for fast analysis using parasitic data from layout OPTION SIM LA provides linear acceleration for RC network reduction for faster simulation
288. mal Monte Carlo Results This section describes the output of the Monte Carlo analysis in HSPICE RF The plot in Figure 39 shows that the relationship between TOX against XL polysilicon width transistor length is completely random as set up in the input file To generate this plot in CosmosScope 1 Read in the file inv mt1 2 Open the Calculator select TOX left mouse button transfer to calculator middle mouse button and then select and transfer XL 3 Onthe WAVE pulldown in the calculator select f x and then click the plot icon 4 Using the right mouse button on the plotted waveform select Attributes to change from the line plot to symbols HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case and Monte Carlo Sweep Example Figure 39 Scatter Plot XL and TOX Monte Carla Results 3 XI palyca d tox toxcd xl polycd 200 0 150 0 500n 0 0 500n xl poly cd The next graph see Figure 40 is a standard scatter plot showing the measured delay for the inverter pair against the Monte Carlo index number HSPICE RF User Guide 351 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case and Monte Carlo Sweep Example Figure 40 Scatter Plot of Inverter Pair Delay Monte Carla Results indexi j If a particular result looks interesting for example if the simulation 68 monte carlo index 68 produce
289. mbers of connecting nodes Nominal capacitance value in Farads Capacitance model name Capacitance at room temperature in Farads First order and second order temperature coefficient Capacitor width in meters Capacitor length in meters Multiplier to simulate multiple parallel capacitors Temperature difference between element and circuit Scaling factor Initial capacitor voltage Capacitance can be a function of any node voltage and any branch current but not a function of time frequency or temperature Determines the calculation mode for elements that use capacitance equations Set this parameter carefully to ensure correct simulation results HSPICE RF extends the definition and values of CTYPE relative to HSPICE Q if C depends only on its own terminal voltages that is a function of V n1 n2 This is consistent with HSPICE 1 if C depends only on outside voltages or currents This is consistent with HSPICE 2 if C depends on both its own terminal and outside voltages default for HSPICE RF HSPICE does not use CTYPE 2 This support is similar to HSPICE For additional information see Capacitors the HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 155 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Passive Elements 156 Example 1 Cbypass 1 0 10PF C12 3 CBX MODEL CBX C CB B 0 10P IC AV CP X1 XA 1 0 0 1P In this example Cbypass is a straightfor
290. mentation Set on page xiv Inside This Manual This manual contains the chapters described below For descriptions of the other manuals in the HSPICE documentation set see the next section The HSPICE Documentation Set Chapter Description Chapter 1 HSPICE RF Features and Functionality Chapter 2 Getting Started Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Introduces HSPICE RF features and functionality Describes how to set up your environment invoke HSPICE RF customize your simulation and redirect input and output Provides a quick start tutorial for users new to HSPICE RF Describes the specialized elements supported by HSPICE RF for high frequency analysis and characterization Describes how to use harmonic balance analysis for frequency driven steady state analysis xiii About This Manual The HSPICE Documentation Set Chapter Description Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Chapter 10 Power Dependent S Parameter Extraction Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Chapter 12 Envelope Analysis Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Chapter 14 Using HSPICE with HSPICE RF Chapter 16 Advanced Features Describes how to use HSPICE RF to perform oscillator and phase noise analysis on autonomous oscillator circuits Describes
291. mple Based on the HB analysis the following example computes the trans impedance from isrc to v 1 hb tones 1e9 nharms 4 hbxf v 1 lin 10 1e8 1 2e8 print hbxf tfv isrc tfi n3 References 1 S Maas Nonlinear Microwave Circuits Chapter 3 IEEE Press 1997 2 R Gilmore and M B Steer Nonlinear Circuit Analysis Using the Method of Harmonic Balance A Review of the Art Part I Introductory Concepts International Journal of Microwave and Millimeter wave Computer Aided Engineering Volume 1 No 1 pages 22 37 1991 3 R Gilmore and M B Steer Nonlinear Circuit Analysis Using the Method of Harmonic Balance A Review of the Art Part Il Advanced Concepts International Journal of Microwave and Millimeter wave Computer Aided Engineering Volume 1 No 2 pages 159 180 1991 4 V Rizzoli F Mastri F Sgallari G Spaletta Harmonic Balance Simulation of Strongly Nonlinear Very Large Size Microwave Circuits by Inexact Newton Methods MTT S Digest pages 1357 1360 1996 5 S Skaggs Efficient Harmonic Balance Modeling of Large Microwave Circuits Ph D thesis North Carolina State University 1999 6 R S Carson High Frequency Amplifiers 2nd Edition John Wiley amp Sons 1982 S Y Liao Microwave Circuit Analysis and Amplifier Design Prentice Hall 1987 8 J Roychowdhury D Long P Feldmann Cyclostationary Noise Analysis of Large RF Circuits with Multitone Excitations EEE
292. ms in WDB or NW format For example OPTION SIM DELTAI value For a additional information see OPTION SIM DELTAI in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Heference HSPICE RF User Guide 323 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 14 Using HSPICE with HSPICE RF Compressing Analog Files 324 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Describes the features available in HSPICE RF for statistical analysis Overview Described in this chapter are the features available in HSPICE RF for statistical analysis These features are supported for HSPICE RF and differ from the enhanced statistical analysis features available for HSPICE described in the HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide in Chapter 13 Simulating Variability Chapter 14 Variation Block and Chapter 15 Monte Carlo Analysis The following subjects are described in this chapter Application of Statistical Analysis Analytical Model Types m Simulating Circuit and Model Temperatures Worst Case Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case and Monte Carlo Sweep Example Simulating the Effects of Global and Local Variations with Monte Carlo Application of Statistical Analysis When you design an electrical circuit it must meet tolerances for the specific manufacturing process The electrical yield is the number of parts that meet the electrical test specifications Overall process efficiency requires maximum yield To analyze and optim
293. n DATA dataname OPTIMIZE OPT xxx MONTE val SUBHARMS Allows subharmonics in the analysis spectrum The minimum non DC frequency in the analysis spectrum is f subharms where f is the frequency of oscillation Example 1 HBOSC tone 900MEG nharms 9 probenode gate gnd 0 65 Performs an oscillator analysis searching for frequencies in the vicinity of 900 MHz This example uses nine harmonics with the probe inserted between the gate and gnd nodes The probe voltage estimate is 0 65 V Example 2 HBOSC tone 2400MEG nharms 11 probenode drainP drainN 1 0 fspts 20 2100MEG 2700MEG Performs an oscillator analysis searching for frequencies in the vicinity of 2 4 GHz This example uses 11 harmonics with the probe inserted between the drainP and drainN nodes The probe voltage estimate is 1 0 V HSPICE RF User Guide 229 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Harmonic Balance for Oscillator Analysis Example 3 Another method to define the probenode information is through a zero current source The following two methods define an equivalent HBOSC command Method 1 HBOSC tone probenode fspts 20 Method 2 ISRC drainP drainN 0 HBOSCVPROBE 1 0 HBOSC tone 2 4G nharms 10 fspts 20 2 1G 2 7G 2 4G nharms 10 drainP drainN 1 0 2 1G 2 7G In method 2 the PROBENODE information is defined by a current source in the circuit Only one such current source is needed and its current must
294. n optional date Date and time when a parasitic extraction tool Such as Star RCXT generated the DSPF file optional vendor Name of the vendor such as Synopsys whose tools you used to generate the DSPF file optional program_name Name of the program such as Star RCXT that generated the DSPF file optional HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Table 23 DSPF Parameters Continued Parameter Definition program_ version divider delimiter path net_name instance_name pin_name pinCap pin_type HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Version number of the program that generated the DSPF file optional Character that divides levels of hierarchy in a circuit path optional If you do not define this parameter the default hierarchy divider is a slash For example X1 X2 indicates that X2 is a subcircuit of the X1 circuit Character used to separate the name of an instance and a pin in a concatenated instance pin name or a net name and a sub node number in a concatenated sub node name If you do not define this parameter the default delimiter is a colon Hierarchical path to a net instance or pin within a circuit Name of a net in a circuit or subcircuit Name of an instance of a subcircuit Name of a pin on an instance of a subcircuit Capacitance of a pin input O output B bidirectional X don t ca
295. n or from physical measurement The standard Touchstone and CITIfile formats are supported in addition to a proprietary HSPICE format The syntax of voltage and current sources as well as Port elements supports the syntax for specifying power sources In this case the source value is interpreted as a power value in Watts or dBm units and the Port element is HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 1 HSPICE RF Features and Functionality HSPICE RF Overview implemented as a voltage source with a series impedance The HBLSP command invokes periodically driven nonlinear circuit analyses for power dependent S parameters Harmonic Balance HB analysis using Direct and Krylov solvers The HB command invokes the single and multitone Harmonic Balance algorithm for periodic steady state analysis TRANFORHB element parameter to recognize V I sources that include SIN and PULSE transient descriptions as well as PWL and VMRF sources Harmonic balance based periodic AC analysis The HBAC command invokes periodic AC analysis for analyzing small signal perturbations on circuits operating in a large signal periodic steady state Harmonic Balance based Periodic Noise analysis HBNOISE for noise analysis of periodically modulated circuits includes stationary cyclostationary and frequency dependent noise effects Autonomous Harmonic Balance analysis The HBOSC command invokes the multitone oscillator capable Harmonic Balance algorith
296. n representation can be accessed and analyzed by using the PRINT or PROBE HBTRAN Output option or by invoking the To Time Domain function on complex spectra within CosmosScope HSPICE RF User Guide 213 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis 214 Output Syntax This section describes the syntax for the HB PRINT and PROBE statements PRINT and PROBE Statements PRINT HB TYPE NODES or ELEM INDICES PROBE HB TYPE NODES or ELEM INDICES Parameter Description TYPE NODES or ELEM Specifies a harmonic type node or element TYPE can be one of the following Voltage type V voltage magnitude and phase in degrees VR real component VI imaginary component VM magnitude VP Phase in degrees VPD Phase in degrees VPR Phase in radians VDB dB units VDBM GB relative to 1 mV Current type current magnitude and phase in degrees IR real component I imaginary component IM magnitude IP Phase in degrees IPD Phase in degrees IPR Phase in radians IDB dB units IDBM dB relative to 1 mV Power type P Frequency type HERTZ i HERTZ i j HERTZ i j kT You must specify the harmonic index for the HERTZ keyword The frequency of the specified harmonics is dumped HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis Parameter Descri
297. n the HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide Limiting Output Data Size For multi million transistor simulations an unrestricted waveform file can grow to several gigabytes in size The file becomes unreadable in some waveform viewers and requires excessive space on the hard drive This section describes options that limit the number of nodes output to the waveform file to reduce the file size HSPICE RF supports the following options to control the output SIM POSTTOP Option SIM POSTSKIP Option SIM POSTAT Option m SIM POSTDOWN Option SIM POSTSCOPE Option HSPICE RF User Guide 369 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Limiting Output Data Size SIM_POSTTOP Option You use the SIM POSTTOP option to limit the data written to your waveform file to data from only the top n level nodes This option outputs instances up to n levels deep For example OPTION SIM POSTTOP lt n gt Note To enable the waveform display interface you also need the POST option For additional information see OPTION SIM POSTTOP in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference SIM POSTSKIP Option You use the SIM POSTSKIP to have the SIM POSTTOP option skip any instances and their children that the subckt definition defines For example OPTION SIM POSTSKIP subckt definition For additional information see OPTION SIM POSTSKIP in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference SIM POSTAT Option You use the SIM POSTA
298. n their worst case values simultaneously this technique tends to be overly pessimistic and can lead to over designing the circuit However this analysis is useful as a fast check Model Skew Parameters The HSPICE RF device models include physically measurable model parameters The circuit simulator uses parameter variations to predict how an actual circuit responds to extremes in the manufacturing process Physically measurable model parameters are called skew parameters because they skew from a statistical mean to obtain predicted performance variations Examples of skew parameters are the difference between the drawn and physical dimension of metal postillion or active layers on an integrated circuit Generally you specify skew parameters independently of each other so you can use combinations of skew parameters to represent worst cases Typical skew parameters for CMOS technology include XL polysilicon CD critical dimension of the poly layer representing the difference between drawn and actual size XW XW active CD critical dimension of the active layer representing the difference between drawn and actual size TOX thickness of the gate oxide RSH RSH resistivity of the active layer DELVTO DELVTO variation in threshold voltage You can use these parameters in any level of MOS model within the HSPICE RF device models The DELVTO parameter shifts the threshold value HSPICE HSPI
299. n use the n1 n2 nk 1 index term to specify an arbitrary offset The noise figure measurement is also dependent on this index term listfreq Prints the element noise value to the lis file You can specify at which frequencies the element noise value is printed The frequencies must match the sweep frequency values defined in the parameter sweep otherwise they are ignored In the element noise output the elements that contribute the largest noise are printed first The frequency values can be specified with the NONE or ALL keyword which either prints no frequencies or every frequency defined in parameter sweep Frequency values must be enclosed in parentheses For example list freq none listfreq all listfreg 1 0G listfreq 1 0G 2 0G The default value is NONE 260 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP 1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Multitone Nonlinear Steady State Analysis HBNOISE Parameter Description listcount Prints the element noise value to the lis file which is sorted from the largest to smallest value You do not need to print every noise element instead you can define 1istcount to print the number of element noise frequencies For example listcount 5 means that only the top 5 noise contributors are printed The default value is 1 listfloor Prints the element noise value to the lis file and defines a minimum meaningful noise value in V Hz units Only
300. nalysis HB is a frequency domain steady state analysis technique In HSPICE RF you can use this analysis technique on a circuit that is excited by DC and periodic sources of one or more fundamental tones The solution that HB finds is a set of phasors for each signal in the circuit You can think of this set as a set of truncated Fourier series You must specify the solution spectrum to use in an analysis HB then finds a set of phasors at these frequencies that describes the circuit response Linear circuit elements are evaluated in the frequency domain while nonlinear elements are evaluated in the time domain The nonlinear response is then transformed to the frequency domain where it is added to or balanced with the linear response The resulting composite response satisfies KCL and KVL Kirchoff s current and voltage laws when the circuit solution is found Typical applications include performing intermodulation analysis and gain compression analysis on amplifiers and mixers HB analysis also serves as a starting point for periodic AC and noise analyses Harmonic Balance Equations The condition in this equation must be satisfied in the time domain f v t i v qv y o v O0d4 i 0 j v t represents the resistive currents from nonlinear devices qrepresents the charges from nonlinear devices yrepresents the admittance of the linear devices in the circuit i represents the vector of independent current s
301. nce You can assign a PARAM parameter to the keywords of elements and models and assign a distribution function to each PARAM parameter HSPICE RF recalculates the distribution function each time that and element or model keyword uses a parameter When you use this feature Monte Carlo analysis can use a parameterized schematic netlist without additional modifications Syntax PARAM xx UNIF nominal val rel variation lt multiplier PARAM xx AUNIF nominal val abs variation lt multiplier PARAM xx GAUSS nominal val rel variation sigma lt multiplier PARAM xx AGAUSS nominal val abs variation sigma multiplier HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis PARAM xx LIMIT nominal val abs variation Argument Description XX Distribution function calculates the value of this parameter UNIF Uniform distribution function by using relative variation AUNIF Uniform distribution function by using absolute variation GAUSS Gaussian distribution function by using relative variation AGAUSS Gaussian distribution function by using absolute variation LIMIT Random limit distribution function by using absolute variation Adds abs variation to nominal val based on whether the random outcome of a 1 to 1 distribution is greater than or less than 0 nominal val Nominal value in Monte Carlo analysis and default value in all abs
302. nce Some Transient AC input output I O options HSPICE RF does support POST and PROBE options Sub circuit cross listing in a pa file HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide Chapter 3 r command line argument for a remote host HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide OP supports node voltage for any time but HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference supports element values only for t 0 Sensitivity analysis SENS HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference 6 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 1 HSPICE RF Features and Functionality HSPICE and HSPICE RF Differences Table 1 HSPICE Features Not in HSPICE RF Continued Feature See DC mismatch analysis DCMATCH HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Table2 Device Models Not in HSPICE RF Model See B element IBIS buffer HSPICE Signal Integrity Guide Bname n1 n2 parameters data driven element current source HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual data driven V element voltage source HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual BJT LEVEL 10 MODELLA HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual Chapter 5 MOSFET Levels 4 8 HSPICE MOSFET Models Manual Common Model Interface CMI HSPICE MOSFET Models Manual HSPICE RF User Guide 7 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 1 HSPICE RF Features and Functionality HSPICE and HSPICE RF Differences 8 HSPICE RF Use
303. nces Default 1 DTEMP The difference between the element temperature and the circuit temperature in degrees Celsius Default 0 0 AREAB Base area multiplying factor which affects currents resistances and capacitances Default AREA AREAC Collector area multiplying factor which affects currents resistances and capacitances Default AREA The only required fields are the collector base and emitter nodes and the model name The nodes and model name must precede other fields in the netlist Example 1 In the Q1 BJT element below Q1 1 2 3 model_1 The collector connects to node 1 The base connects to node 2 The emitter connects to node 3 model 1 references the BUT model Example 2 In the following Qopamp1 BJT element Qopampl cl b3 e2 s 1stagepnp AREA 1 5 AREAB 2 5 AREAC 3 0 The collector connects to the c1 node The base connects to the b3 node u The emitter connects to the e2 node The substrate connects to the s node jstagepnp references the BUT model HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Active Elements The AREA area factor is 1 5 The AREAB area factor is 2 5 The AREAC area factor is 3 0 Example 3 In the Qdrive BJT element below Odrive driver in output model npn 0 1 The collector connects to the driver node The base connects to the in node The emitter connects to the output node model npn references the BJT model The area fa
304. nctions Continued HSPICE Form Function Class Description x y power If x lt 0 returns the value of x raised to the integer part of y If x 0 returns 0 If x gt 0 returns the value of x raised to the y power log x natural math Returns the natural logarithm of the absolute value of logarithm x with the sign of x sign of x log Ixl log10 x base 10 math Returns the base 10 logarithm of the absolute value logarithm of x with the sign of x sign of x log4o Ixl exp x exponential math Returns e raised to the power x e db x decibels math Returns the base 10 logarithm of the absolute value of x multiplied by 20 with the sign of x sign of x 20log o Ixl int x integer math Returns the integer portion of x The fractional portion of the number is lost nint x integer math Rounds x up or down to the nearest integer sgn x return sign math Returns 1 if x is less than 0 Returns 0 if x is equal to 0 Returns 1 if x is greater than 0 sign x y transfer sign math Returns the absolute value of x with the sign of y sign of y lxl min x y smaller of control Returns the numeric minimum of x and y two args max x y largeroftwo control Returns the numeric maximum of x and y args val element get value various Returns a parameter value for a specified element HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 For example val r1 returns the resistance value of the r1 resistor 140 Table 11 Synopsys HSPICE Built in Func
305. ncy Translation S Parameter HBLIN Extraction on page 265 208 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis Parameter Description SWEEP Type of sweep You can sweep up to three variables You can specify either LIN DEC OCT POI SWEEPBLOCK DATA OPTIMIZE or MONTE Specify the nsteps start and stop frequencies using the following syntax for each type of sweep LIN nsteps start stop DEC nsteps start stop OCT nsteps start stop POI nsteps freq values SWEEPBLOCK nsteps freq1 freq2 freqn DATA dataname OPTIMIZE OPT xxx MONTE val HB Analysis Spectrum The NHARMS and INTMODMAX input parameters define the spectrum f INTMODMAX N the spectrum consists of all f a f b fo n fn frequencies so that f gt 0 and lal lbl lnl lt N The a b n coefficients are integers with absolute value lt N f you do not specify INTMODMAX it defaults to the largest value in the NHARMS list lf entries in the NHARMS list are gt INTMODMAX HSPICE RF adds the m f frequencies to the spectrum where f is the corresponding tone and m is a value the NHARMS entry Example 1 hb tones f1 2 intmodmax 1 The resulting HB analysis spectrumz dc f4 fo Example 2 hb tones f1 2 intmodmax 2 The resulting HB analysis spectrum dc f4 fo fy fo f4 f2 2 f4 2 fo HSPICE RF User Guide 209 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Stea
306. nd output port the ground references a model or file reference a number of conductors and a length HSPICE RF does not support the Field Solver form of the W element S Model form Wxxx inl lt in2 lt inx gt gt refin outl out2 lt outx gt gt refout Smodel modelname NODEMAP XiYj N val L val HSPICE RF User Guide 115 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines Table Model form Wxxx inl in2 lt inx refin outl out2 lt outx gt gt refout N val L val TABLEMODEL name Parameter Description Wxxx Lossy W Element transmission line element name Must start with W followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters inx Signal input node for x transmission line in1 is required refin Ground reference for input signal outx Signal output node for the x transmission line each input port must have a corresponding output port refout Ground reference for output signal N Number of conductors excluding the reference conductor L Physical length of the transmission line in units of meters RLGCfile filename Umodel2modelname FSmodel modelname 116 File name reference for the file containing the RLGC information for the transmission lines for syntax see Using the W Element in the HSPICE Signal Integrity Guide U model lossy transmission line model reference name A lossy transmission line model used to represent the characteristics of the W element t
307. ng at this frequency For CONVOLUTION 2 mode HSPICE uses this value as the base frequency point for Inverse Fourier Transformation For recursive convolution the default value is OHz and for linear convolution HSPICE uses the reciprocal of the transient period Specifies the possible maximum frequency of interest The default value is the frequency point where the function reaches close enough to infinity value assuming that the monotonous function is approaching the infinity value and that it is taken at 10THz The equation should be a function of HERTZ If CONVOLUTION is turned on when a HERTZ keyword is not used in the equation it is automatically be turned off to let the resistor behave as conventional The equation can be a function of temperature but it cannot be node voltage or branch current and time Example The equation can only be a function of time independent variables such as hertz and temperature R1 1 2 r 1 0 le 5 sqrt HERTZ CONVOLUTION 1 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP 1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Skin Effect Resistors Rxxx n1 n2 R value Rs value The Rs indicates the skin effect coefficient of the resistor The complex impedance of the resistor can be expressed as the following equation R Ro 1 j Rs sqrt f The Ro j and are DC resistance imaginably unit j 2 1 and frequency respectively Capacitors Cxxx nl n2 lt mname gt lt C gt capacitance lt
308. nic balance analysis the frequency spacing must coincide with the HB TONES settings PHASE Carrier phase in degrees If fc 0 0 ph 0 and baseband l t is generated ph 90 and baseband q t is generated Otherwise s t l t cos 9 Q t sin 9 MOD One of the following keywords identifies the modulation method used to convert a digital stream of information to I t and Q t variations BPSK binary phase shift keying QPSK quadrature phase shift keying HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Complex Signal Sources and Stimuli Parameter Description FILTER One of the following keywords identifies the method used to filter the and Q signals before modulating the RF carrier signal COS raised cosine Nyquist filter RECT rectangular filtering FILCOEF Filter parameter for the COS filter 0 lt filpar lt 1 RATE Bit rate for modulation bits per second For BPSK modulation the data rate and the symbol rate are the same For QPSK modulation the symbol rate is half the data rate The Rb value must be greater than zero BITSTREAM A binary b or hexadecimal h string that represents an input data stream Valid data string characters are Oor for binary b mode u 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F a b c d e or f for hexadecimal h mode For example 01010011b binary 0F647A30E9h hexadecimal You can also use the standard V source and s
309. nput Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Guidelines 48 Table5 Element Identifiers Continued Letter First Element Char Example Line W T Transmission Line U X Subcircuit call Wl inl 0 outi 0 N 1 L 1 X1 2 4 17 31 MULTI WN 100 LN 5 Hierarchy Paths A period indicates path hierarchy Paths can be up to 1024 characters long Path numbers compress the hierarchy for post processing and listing files The OPTION PATHNUM controls whether the list files show full path names or path numbers Numbers You can enter numbers as integer floating point floating point with an integer exponent or integer or floating point with one of the scale factors listed in Table 6 Table 6 Scale Factors Scale Factor Prefix T tera G giga MEG or X mega K kilo M milli U micro Symbol Multiplying Factor 1e 12 1e 9 1e 6 1e 3 1e 3 1e 6 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Guidelines Table 6 Scale Factors Continued Scale Factor Prefix Symbol Multiplying Factor N nano n 1e 9 P pico p 1e 12 F femto f 1e 15 A atto a 1e 18 Note Scale factor A is not a scale factor in a character string that contains amps For example HSPICE interprets the 20amps string as 20e 18mps 20 19amps but it correctly interprets 20amps as 20 amperes of current not as 20e 18mps 20 8amps Numbers can use expon
310. nsformer equations R a int int iynty 0 Example L1 1 0 0 2 3 0 transformer nt 1 2 2 Scattering Parameter Data Element 164 A transmission line is a passive element that connects any two conductors at any distance apart For more information about transmission lines see S Parameter Modeling Using the S Element in the HSPICE Signal Integrity Guide HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Scattering Parameter Data Element Frequency Dependent Multi Terminal S Element When used with the generic frequency domain model MODEL SP a S element is a convenient way to describe the behavior of a multi terminal network The S element describes a linear time invariant system and provides a series of data that describe the frequency response of the system The S element is particularly useful for high frequency characterization of distributed passive structures A common use of the S element is in microwave circuits because electronic devices in this frequency domain no longer act as they do in low frequencies In this case distributed system parameters must be considered The S element uses the following parameters to define a frequency dependent multi terminal network S scattering parameter m Y admittance parameter Note All HSPICE and HSPICE RF analyses can use the S element The S parameter is the reflection coefficient of the system which is measured through ratios
311. ntheses For example listfreq none listfreq all listfreq 1 0G listfreq 1 0G 2 0G The default value is the first frequency value Dumps the element phase noise value to the lis file which is sorted from the largest to smallest value You do not need to dump every noise element instead you can define listcount to dump the number of element phase noise frequencies For example listcount 5 means that only the top 5 noise contributors are dumped The default value is 20 Dumps the element phase noise value to the lis file and defines a minimum meaningful noise value in dBc Hz units Only those elements with phase noise values larger than the listfloor value are dumped For example listfloor 200 means that all noise values below 200 dBc Hz are not dumped The default value is 300 dBc Hz HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Phase Noise Analysis Parameter Description listsources Dumps the element phase noise value to the lis file When the element has multiple noise sources such as a level 54 MOSFET which contains the thermal shot and 1 f noise sources When dumping the element phase noise value you can decide if you need to dump the contribution from each noise source You can specify either ON or OFF ON dumps the contribution from each noise source and OFF does not The default value is OFF Phase Noise Algorithms HSPICE RF provides three alg
312. odels within a circuit can operate at different temperatures For example a high speed input output buffer that switches at 50 MHz is much hotter than a low drive NAND gate that switches at 1 MHz To simulate this temperature difference specify both an element temperature parameter DTEMP and a model reference parameter TREF If you specify DTEMP in an element statement the element temperature for the simulation is element temperature circuit temperature DTEMP Specify the DTEMP value in the element statement resistor capacitor inductor diode BJT JFET or MOSFET statement or in a subcircuit element Assign a parameter to DTEMP then use the DC statement to sweep the parameter The DTEMP value defaults to zero If you specify TREF in the model statement the model reference temperature changes TREF overrides TNOM Derating the model parameters is based on the difference between circuit simulator temperature and TREF instead of TNOM HSPICE RF User Guide 329 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case Analysis TEMP Statement To specify the temperature of a circuit for a HSPICE RF simulation use the TEMP statement Worst Case Analysis 330 Circuit designers often use worst case analysis when designing and analyzing MOS and BJT IC circuits To simulate the worst case set all variables to their 2 or 3 sigma worst case values Because several independent variables rarely attai
313. of flip flops to settle into random states However all transistors on a die site vary according to the wafer or fabrication run distribution This value is much larger than the die distribution but affects all transistors the same way You can specify the wafer distribution in the MOSFET model to set the speed and power dissipation characteristics Monte Carlo Examples Gaussian Uniform and Limit Functions You can find the sample netlist for this example in the following directory S installdir demo hspice apps mont1 sp Figure 31 Uniform Functions MONT1 SP TEST OF MONTE CARLO GAUSSIAN UNIFORM AND LIMIT FUNCTIONS May 15 2003 11 41 23 119 182 00A i m MONT1 SVO z d ELEC 2 S dX 4a a RUNIF 1 110 0 Ba a e e am o a A A SELD TEEN ex A x a A j 100 0 ate a as Zase PA es A A Pe z 90 0 AA M a X EDO NO uer NL a H 80 1384 sAdma ca Gv DA x aoa AS a poe Gh Wo voa Pow i MONT4 SVO Q OOE qae ansa o Ta W az BAUM Ah m fa 2 RUNIF 10 110 0 gt A 100 0 90 0 Z ZA C A PSI E i a 80 0402 TIAI A PRAE 1 1 iA 1 EL tum ES APA rava a o Aa d 1 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 40 0 50 0 60 0 MONTE CARLO LIN HSPICE RF User Guide 341 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis Figure 32 Gaussian Functions MONT1 SP TEST OF MONTE CARLO GAUSSIAN UNIFORM AND LIMIT FUNCTIONS May 15 2003 11 41 23 P MONT1 SV
314. of 2u and lu Under global parameter scoping rules simulation succeeds but incorrectly HSPICE does not warn you that the x1 inverter has no assigned width because the global parameter definition for wid overrides the subcircuit default HSPICE RF User Guide 145 Y 2006 03 SP1 Note Similarly sweeping with different values of Wid dynamically changes both the Wid library internal parameter value and the pulse width value to the Wid value of the current sweep In global scoping the highest level name prevails when resolving name conflicts Local scoping uses the lowest level name When you use the parameter inheritance method you can specify to use local scoping rules When you use local scoping rules the Example 2 netlist correctly aborts in x1 for W 0 default Wid 0 in the SUBCKT definition has higher precedence than the PARAM statement This results in the correct device sizes for x2 This change can affect your simulation results if you intentionally or accidentally create a circuit such as the second one shown above As an alternative to width testing in the Example 2 netlist you can use OPTION DEFW to achieve a limited version of library integrity This option sets the default width for all MOS devices during a simulation Part of the definition is still in the top level circuit so this method can still make unwanted changes to library values without notification from the HSPICE simulator Table 13 compares
315. of incident and reflected sinusoidal waves For passive systems the magnitude of an S parameter varies between zero and one Because the reflection coefficient is easy to measure in real microwave circuits the S parameter can be a very useful tool for microwave engineers You can use the S element with a MODEL SP or with data files that describe the frequency response of a network and provide discrete frequency dependent data Touchstone and CITIfile You can measure this data directly using network analyzers such as Hewlett Packard s MDS Microwave Design System or HFSS High Frequency Structure Simulator HSPICE can also extract the S element from a real circuit system For a description of the S parameter and SP analyses see S Parameter Model in the HSPICE Signal Integrity Guide S Element Syntax Sxxx nd nd2 ndN ndRef MNAME Smodel name lt FQMODEL sp model name TYPE s y Zo value vector value l FBASE base frequency FMAX maximum frequency PRECFAC val DELAYHANDLE 1 0 ON OFF gt HSPICE RF User Guide 165 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Scattering Parameter Data Element lt INTERPOLATION STEP LINEAR SPLINE gt lt INTDATTYP RI MA DBA gt lt HIGHPASS value gt lt LOWPASS value gt lt MIXEDMODE 0 1 gt DATATYPE data string lt DTEMP val gt Specifies lt DELAYFREQ val gt lt NOISE 1 0 gt Parameter nd1 nd2
316. ohms at room temperature TC1 TC2 TC First and second order temperature coefficients TC is alias for TC1 The current definition overrides the previous definition W Resistor width L Resistor length M Parallel multiplier C Parasitic capacitance between node2 and the substrate DTEMP Temperature difference between element and circuit SCALE Scaling factor equation Resistance can be a function of any node voltage and any branch current but not a function of time frequency or temperature This support is similar to HSPICE For additional information see Resistor Elements in a HSPICE or HSPICE RF Netlist the HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide The following are some basic examples for HSPICE RF Example 1 R1 is a resistor whose resistance follows the voltage at node c R1 1 0 v c Example 2 R2 is a resistor whose resistance is the sum of the absolute values of nodes c and d R2 1 0 abs v c abs v d HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Passive Elements Example 3 R3 is a resistor whose resistance is the sum of the rconst parameter and 100 times tx1 for a total of 1100 ohms PARAM rconst 100 tx1 10 R3 4 5 rconst tx1 100 R3 takes its value from the RX parameter and uses the TC1 and TC2 temperature coefficients which become 0 001 and 0 respectively Example 4 You can use the HERTZ keyword to form frequency dependent resi
317. ompressing Analog Files on page 322 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 14 Using HSPICE with HSPICE RF RF Transient Analysis Output File Formats VCD Output Format To output your waveforms from HSPICE RF in VCD Value Change Dump format set the VCD option in conjunction with the LPRINT statement For example OPTION VCD LPRINT 0 5 4 5 v 0 v 2 v 6 LPRINT Statement You use the LPRINT statement to produce output in VCD file format from transient analysis For example LPRINT vi1 v2 output varable list For additional information see LPRINT in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference turboWave Output Format To use turboWave output format TW enter OPTION POST tw This format supports analog compression as described in Compressing Analog Files on page 322 Undertow Output Format To use Veritools Undertow output format UT enter OPTION POST ut This format supports analog compression as described in Compressing Analog Files on page 322 The waveform list in UT format now displays in a hierarchical structure rather than one flat level as in previous versions HSPICE RF User Guide 321 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 14 Using HSPICE with HSPICE RF Compressing Analog Files CSDF Output Format To use CSDF output format CSDF enter OPTION POST csdf OPTION csdf overrides OPTION POST setting Compressing Analog Files 322 Analog compression eliminates unnecessary data points
318. on NT turns Number of turns of an inductive magnetic winding mname Saturable core model name See the Passive Device Models chapter in the HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual for model information In this syntax the inductance can be either a value in units of henries an equation a polynomial of the current or a magnetic winding Required fields are the two nodes and the inductance or model name f you specify parameters the nodes and model name must be first Other parameters can be in any order f you specify an inductor model see the Passive Device Models chapter in the HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual the inductance value is optional Example 1 In the following example the L1 inductor connects from the coilin node to the coilout node with an inductance of 100 nanohenries L1 coilin coilout 100n Example 2 The Lloop inductor connects from node 12 to node 17 Its inductance is 1 microhenry and its temperature coefficients are 0 001 and 0 Lloop 12 17 L 1u TC1 0 001 TC2 0 Example 3 The Lcoil inductor connects from the input node to ground Its inductance is determined by the product of the current through the inductor and 1E 6 Lcoil input gnd Les lu i input LTYPE 0 94 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Example 4 The L99 inductor connects from the in node to the out node Its inductance is determined by the polynomial L cO
319. on use of a GLOBAL statement is if your netlist file includes subcircuits This statement assigns a common node name to subcircuit nodes Another common use of GLOBAL statements is to assign power supply connections of all subcircuits For example GLOBAL VCC connects all subcircuits with the internal node name vcc Ordinarily in a subcircuit the node name consists of the circuit number concatenated to the node name When you use a GLOBAL statement HSPICE or HSPICE RF does not concatenate the node name with the circuit number and assigns only the global name You can then exclude the power node name in the subcircuit or macro call Circuit Temperature To specify the circuit temperature for a HSPICE or HSPICE RF simulation use the TEMP statement or the TEMP parameter in the DC AC and TRAN statements HSPICE compares the circuit simulation temperature against the reference temperature in the TNOM control option HSPICE or HSPICE RF uses the difference between the circuit simulation temperature and the TNOM reference temperature to define derating factors for component values In HSPICE RF you can use multiple TEMP statements to specify multiple temperatures for different portions of the circuit HSPICE permits only one temperature for the entire circuit Multiple TEMP statements in a circuit behave as a sweep function Data Driven Analysis In data driven analysis you can modify any number of parameters then use
320. onductor line j hh vay am m em cw lia 1 1 V1 f L f G f C f Vo 4 A 21 12 Th v la Signal Conductors Volo i o 35 2 l i aN iv VilN VolN M r T Reference conductor T 2 TERR EEE 0 gt x For additional information about the W element see the Modeling Coupled Transmission Lines Using the W Element chapter in the HSPICE Signal Integrity User Guide Lossless T Element General form Txxx in refin out refout Z0 val TD val lt L val gt IC vil il v2 i2 Txxx in refin out refout Z0 val F val lt NL val gt IC vil il v2 i2 U Model form Txxx in refin out refout mname L val Parameter Description Txxx Lossless transmission line element name Must begin with T followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters in Signal input node refin Ground reference for the input signal out Signal output node HSPICE RF User Guide 119 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines refout ZO TD L IC v1 i1 v2 i2 NL mname Ground reference for the output signal Characteristic impedance of the transmission line Signal delay from a transmission line in seconds per meter Physical length of the transmission line in units of meters Default 1 Initial conditions of the transmission line Specify the voltage on the input port v1 current into the input port i1 voltage on the output port v2 and the current into the output port i2
321. ons 0 r The power spectral density of phase fluctuations is related to phase noise e SOn 2L f Characterizing and measuring low frequency phase variations of the oscillator leads directly to its spectrum about the fundamental HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Input Syntax Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Phase Noise Analysis PHASENOISE output frequency sweep lt method int gt carrierindex int listfreq frequencies none all listcount val lt listfloor val gt lt listsources on off gt Parameter output frequency sweep method HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Description An output node pair of nodes or 2 terminal element HSPICE RF references phase noise calculations to this node or pair of nodes Specify a pair of nodes as V n n If you specify only one node V n then HSPICE RF assumes that the second node is ground You can also specify a 2 terminal element A sweep of type LIN OCT DEC POI or SWEEPBLOCK Specify the type nsteps and start and stop time for each sweep type where type Frequency sweep type such as OCT DEC or LIN nsteps Number of steps per decade or total number of steps start Starting frequency Stop Ending frequency The four parameters determine the offset frequency sweep about the carrier used for the phase noise analysis LIN type nsteps start stopOCT type nsteps start stopDEC
322. ontrol option see OPTION SIM ACCURACY in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Algorithm Control In HSPICE RF you can select the Backward Euler Trapezoidal Gear or hybrid method algorithms Each of these algorithms has its own advantages and disadvantages for specific circuit types These methods have tradeoffs related to accuracy avoidance of numerical oscillations and numerical damping of circuit oscillations For pre charging simulation or timing critical simulations the Trapezoidal algorithm usually improves accuracy HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 14 Using HSPICE with HSPICE RF RF Transient Analysis Accuracy Control OPTION METHOD You use the METHOD option to select a numeric integration method for a transient analysis HSPICE RF supports three basic timestep algorithms Trapezoidal TRAP second order Gear Gear 2 and Backward Euler BE Backward Euler is the same as first order Gear Also HSPICE RF supports a hybrid algorithm TRAPGEAR which is a mixture of the three basic algorithms HSPICE RF contains an algorithm for auto detection of numerical oscillations commonly encountered with trapezoidal integration If HSPICE RF detects such oscillations it inserts BE steps but not more than one BE step for every 10 time steps To turn off auto detection use the PURETP option The TRAPGEAR method combining 90 trapezoidal with 10 Gear 2 HSPICE HF inserts BE steps when the simulator encount
323. ord represents the operating frequency In time domain analyses an expression with the HERTZ keyword behaves differently according to the value assigned to the CONVOLUTION keyword Syntax Cxxx nl n2 C equation CONVOLUTION 0 1 2 FBASE val lt FMAX val gt gt Parameter Description n1 n2 Names or numbers of connecting nodes equation Expressed as a function of HERTZ If CONVOLUTION 1 or 2 and HERTZ is not used in the equation CONVOLUTION is turned off and the capacitor behaves conventionally The equation can be a function of temperature but it does not support variables of node voltage branch current or time If these variables exist in the expression and CONVOLUTION 1 or 2 then only their values at the operating point are considered in calculation CONVOLUTION Specifies the method used 0 default HERTZ 0 in time domain analysis 1or2 performs Inverse Fast Fourier Transformation IFFT linear convolution FBASE Base frequency to use for transient analysis This value becomes the base frequency point for Inverse Fast Fourier Transformation IFFT when CONVOLUTION 1 or 2 If you do not set this value the base frequency is a reciprocal value of the transient period FMAX Maximum frequency to use for transient analysis Used as the maximum frequency point for Inverse Fourier Transformation If you do not set this value the reciprocal value of RISETIME is taken HSPICE RF User Guide 89 Y 2006
324. ording to the value assigned to the CONVOLUTION keyword Syntax LXXX n n2 L equation CONVOLUTION 0 1 2 lt FBASE valule gt lt FMAX value gt gt Parameter Description Lxxx Inductor element name Must begin with L followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters ni n2 Positive and negative terminal node names equation The equation should be a function of HERTZ If CONVOLUTION is turned on when a HERTZ keyword is not used in the equation CONVOLUTION is automatically be turned off and the inductor behaves conventionally The equation can be a function of temperature but it does not support variables of node voltage branch current or time If these variables exist in the equation with CONVOLUTION turned on only their values at the operating point are considered in the calculation CONVOLUTION Indicates which method is used 0 default Acts the same as the conventional method 1 Applies recursive convolution and if the rational function is not accurate enough it switches to linear convolution 2 Applies linear convolution FBASE Specifies the lower bound of the transient analysis frequency For CONVOLUTION 1 mode HSPICE starts sampling at this frequency For CONVOLUTION 2 mode HSPICE uses this value as the base frequency point for Inverse Fourier Transformation For recursive convolution the default value is OHz For linear convolution HSPICE uses the reciprocal of the transient per
325. orithms for oscillator phasenoise nonlinear perturbation periodic AC and broadband calculations These algorithms are selected by setting the METHOD parameter to 1 2 or 3 respectively Each algorithm has their regions of validity and computational efficiency so some thought is necessary to obtain meaningful results from a PHASENOISE simulation For each algorithm the region of validity depends on the particular circuit being simulated However there are some general rules that can be applied to oscillator types that is ring or harmonic so that a valid region can be identified And there are techniques that can be used to check validity of your simulation results Nonlinear Perturbation Algorithm The nonlinear perturbation NLP algorithm which is the default selection is typically the fastest computation but is valid only in a region close to the carrier Generally you will want to use this algorithm if you interested in phasenoise close to the carrier and do not need to determine a noise floor NLP computation time is almost independent of the number of frequency points in the phasenoise frequency sweep Periodic AC Algorithm The periodic AC PAC algorithm is valid in a region away from the carrier and is slower than the NLP algorithm The PAC algorithm is used for getting phasenoise in the far carrier region and when you need to determine a noise floor HSPICE RF User Guide 237 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and P
326. orm Lxxx nlp nin nNp nNn RELUCTANCE FILE filenamel FILE lt filename2 gt SHORTALL yes no IGNORE COUPLING yes no Parameter Description Lxxx Name of a reluctor Must begin with L followed by up to 1023 alphanumeric characters nip nin Names of the connecting terminal nodes The number of nNp nNn terminals must be even Each pair of ports represents the location of an inductor RELUCTANCE Keyword to specify reluctance inverse inductance r1 c1 val Reluctance matrix data In general K will be sparse and only r2 C2 val2 non zero values in the matrix need be given Each matrix entry rm cm valm is represented by a triplet r c val The value r and c are 102 integers referring to a pair of inductors from the list of terminal nodes If there are 2 N terminal nodes there will be N inductors and the r and c values must be in the range 1 N The val value is a reluctance value for the r c matrix location and the unit for reluctance is the inverse Henry H Only terms along and above the diagonal are specified for the reluctance matrix The simulator fills in the lower triangle to ensure symmetry If you specify lower diagonal terms the simulator converts that entry to the appropriate upper diagonal term If multiple entries are supplied for the same r c location then only the first one is used and a warning will be issued indicating that some entries are ignored
327. orms AM EXP PULSE PWL SFFM or SIN Multiple transient descriptions are not allowed HSPICE RF Power Switch When 0 default element treated as a voltage or current source When 1 or W element treated as a power source realized as a voltage source with a series impedance In this case the source value is interpreted as RMS available power in units of Watts When dbm element treated as a power source in series with the port impedance Values are in dbms You can use this parameter for Transient analysis if the power source is either DC or SIN LIN analysis System impedance used when converting to a power source inserted in series with the voltage source Currently this only supports real impedance When power 0 z0 defaults to 0 When power 1 z0 defaults to 50 ohms You can also enter zo val DC analysis Series resistance overrides zo AC analysis Series resistance overrides z 0 HSPICE RF HBAC analysis Series resistance overrides z0 HSPICE RF HB analysis Series resistance overrides z0 Transient analysis Series resistance overrides z0 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Steady State Voltage and Current Sources Parameter Description lt TRANFORHB 011 gt 0 default The transient description is ignored if an HB value is given or a DC value is given If no DC or HB value is given and TRANFORHB 0 then HB treats the source as
328. ource options for non transient simulations such as DC va1 and AC mag ph a with the VMRF source Example BITSTREAM 01010010011100b data 1 dr HSPICE RF User Guide 195 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Complex Signal Sources and Stimuli BPSK I and Q Signals 707 1 dr QPSK I Signal 707 QPSK Q Signal 707 1 dr The Rb parameter represents the data rate The associated symbol rate represents how fast the and Q data streams change The period for each bit of data is 196 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Complex Signal Sources and Stimuli The symbol rate depends on whether you select BPSK or QPSK modulation For BPSK the symbol rate is the same as the data rate BPSK For QPSK modulation two bits are used to create each symbol so the symbol rate is half the data rate gO _ R 5 2 The period for each symbol is computed as This value is necessary for establishing the characteristics of Nyquist filters The following equation calculates the raised cosine COS filter response l a lt f lt 2T T T L 2 1 2 1 ac lt l a Hf J T cos E OT 2T lt lf lt 27 1 a fi gt 27 The VMRF signal source is designed primarily for TRAN and HB analyses and can generate baseband signals You can also specify DC and AC values as with any other HSPICE signal source n DC analysis the VMRF source is a const
329. ources visa variable that represents the circuit unknowns both node voltages and branch currents 206 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis Transforming this equation to the frequency domain results in equation F V IV x OQ V YV 1 0 Note Time differentiation is transformed to multiplication by jo terms which make up the O matrix in the frequency domain The convolution integral is transformed to a simple multiplication The Y matrix is the circuit s modified nodal admittance matrix All terms above are vectors representing the circuit response at each analysis frequency The following equation shows the vector of complex valued unknowns in the frequency domain for a circuit with K analysis frequencies and N unknowns V lv a V_ 1 V K D V_ 2 0 V_ N K 0 HSPICE RF finds the unknown vector V which satisfies the system of nonlinear equations shown in the equation above This is done via the Newton Raphson technique by using either a direct solver to factor the Jacobian matrix or an indirect solver The indirect solver available in HSPICE RF is the Generalized Minimum Residual GMRES Solver a Krylov technique and uses a matrix implicit algorithm Features Supported HB supports the following features All existing HSPICE RF models Unlimited number of independent input tones Sources with multiple HB
330. out Flow Selective Post Layout Flow Contents nds 4 recours destod dod d aate F rmat AAS acoso e s eU ct RE Additional Post Layout Options sassa aaaeeeaa Selective Extraction Flow lese I Overview of DSPF Files Overview of SPEF Files Linear Acceleration PACT Algorithm PI Algorith m Linear Acceleration Control Options Summary 4 Using HSPICE with HSPICE R Fee ohJj Jo G NEEH RRR MMMM RF Numerical Integration Algorithm Control 00000 0 ee eee RF Transient Analysis Accuracy GOMOD sos eens eee are PT OPTION SIM_ACCURACY 0 00 kk kK KK KK eh Algorithm Control RF Transient Analysis Output Fi Tabulated Data Output WDB Output Format TR Output Format XP Output Format NW Output Format VCD Output Format turboWave Output Format le Formats 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 274 274 275 277 277 278 281 281 283 283 285 288 290 292 293 298 309 310 311 311 315 315 316 316 316 318 319 319 320 320 320 321 321 Contents 15 Undertow Output Format kk kk kK essere CSDF Output Format 0 kK KK KK KK KK KK ee Compressing Analog Files 000 00 KK KK KRE KK KK eee Eliminating Voltage Datapoints kk KK KR KK KI KK Eliminating Current Datapoints llle Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis
331. ow the sp file extension rule where represents the dimension of the network For details see Touchstone File Format Specification by the EIA IBIS Open Forum http www eda org Name of the CITIfile which is a data file that contains frequency dependent data For details see Using Instruments with ADS by Agilent Technologies http www agilent com One of the following parameter types S scattering default Y admittance Z impedance Characteristic impedance value of the reference line frequency independent For multi terminal lines N21 HSPICE assumes that the characteristic impedance matrix of the reference lines are diagonal and their diagonal values are set to Zo You can also set a vector value for non uniform diagonal values Use Zof to specify more general types of a reference line system The default is 50 Base frequency to use for transient analysis This value becomes the base frequency point for Inverse Fast Fourier Transformation IFFT f you do not set this value the base frequency is a reciprocal value of the transient period Ifyou set a frequency that is smaller than the reciprocal value of the transient then the transient analysis performs circular convolution and uses the reciprocal value of FBASE as its base period Maximum frequency for transient analysis Used as the maximum frequency point for Inverse Fast Fourier Transform IFFT Specifies low frequency extrapolat
332. owing file structure in a DSPF file Parameters in braces are optional DSPF file DSPF version DESIGN design name DATE date VENDOR vendor PROGRAM program name VERSION program version DIVIDER divider DELIMITER delimiter W SUBCKT GROUND NET path divider net name NET path divider net name path divider instance name pin name net capacitance P pin name pin type pinCap resistance unit 0 capacitance unit F x coordinate y coordinate HSPICE RF User Guide 293 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation 294 I path divider instance name delimiter pin name path divider instance name pin name pin type pinCap resistance unit 0 capacitance unit F x coordinate y coordinate S path divider net name path divider instance name delimiter pin name pin name instance number x coordinate y coordinate capacitor statements resistor statements subcircuit call statements ENDS END Table 23 DSPF Parameters Parameter Definition IDSPF Specifies that the file is in DSPF format version Version number of the DSPF specification optional Words that start with are keywords I Or use the option either preceding or following Il For example IP II means you can use either the IP option or the II option design_name Name of your circuit desig
333. parameter For a description of this parameter see M Multiply Parameter on page 58 HSPICE RF User Guide 137 Y 2006 03 SP1 Using Algebraic Expressions Note Synopsys HSPICE uses double precision numbers 15 digits for expressions user defined parameters and sweep variables For better precision use parameters instead of constants in algebraic expressions because constants are only single precision numbers 7 digits In HSPICE an algebraic expression with quoted strings can replace any parameter in the netlist In HSPICE you can then use these expressions as output variables in PRINT statements Algebraic expressions can expand your options in an input netlist file Some uses of algebraic expressions are Parameters PARAM x y43 Functions PARAM rho leff weff 2 leff weff 2u Algebra in elements R1 1 0 r ABS v 1 i m1 10 Algebra in MEASURE statements MEAS vmax MAX V 1 MEAS imax MAX I q2 MEAS ivmax PARAM vmax imax Algebra in output statements PRINT conductance PAR i m1 v 22 The basic syntax for using algebraic expressions for output is PAR algebraic expression In addition to using quotations you must define the expression inside the PAR statement for output The continuation character for quoted parameter strings in HSPICE is a double backslash V Outside of quoted strings the single backslash is the continuation character HSPICE R
334. parameter names be careful to avoid conflicts with parameterized libraries To delimit expressions use single or double quotes Expressions cannot exceed 1024 characters For improved readability use a double slash XX at end of a line to continue the line You can nest functions up to three levels Any function that you define can contain up to two arguments Use the PAR expression or parameter function to evaluate expressions in output statements Input Netlist File Structure An input netlist file should consist of one main program and can contain one or more optional submodules HSPICE RF uses a submodule preceded by an ALTER statement to automatically change an input netlist file then rerun the simulation with different options netlist analysis statements and test vectors You can use several high level call statements INCLUDE and LIB to structure the input netlist file modules These statements can call netlists model parameters test vectors analysis and option macros into a file from library files or other files The input netlist file also can call an external data file which contains parameterized data for element sources and models You must enclose the names of included or internally specified files in single or double quotation when they begin with a number 0 9 50 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Guidelines Schemati
335. ption NODES or ELEM can be one of the following Voltage type a single node name n1 or a pair of node names n1 n2 Current type an element name elemname Power type a resistor resistorname or port portname element name INDICES Index to tones in the form n1 n2 nN where nj is the index of the HB tone and the HB statement contains N tones If INDICES is used then wildcards are not supported HB data can be transformed into the time domain and output using the following syntax PRINT hbtran ovl ov2 gt PROBE hbtran ovl ov2 gt Where ovi are the output variables to print or probe Calculating Power Measurements After HB Analyses Two types of power measurements are available dissipated power in resistors and delivered power to port elements The following subtle differences between these two measurements are described in this section Power Dissipated in a Resistor All power calculations make use of the fundamental phasor power relationship given as the following equation where voltage V and current are complex phasors given in peak values not rms nor peak to peak 1 P s ReiVI j In the case of a simple resistor its current and voltage are related according to Va l R The power dissipated in a resistor of real value R at frequency index n is then given by Vi P a resistor n ETTI HSPICE RF User Guide 215 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8
336. ption to print a list of signals that match tolerance and timepoint settings For example HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features POWER Analysis OPTION SIM POWER ANALYSIS time point gt lt tol gt or OPTION SIM POWER ANALYSIS bottom lt time point gt lt tol gt These two options do not give you tabulated data but they do provide a list of signals that match the tolerance setting HSPICE RF traverses down all hierarchies and prints node s specified in the POWER statement with larger port current than the threshold current The first SIM POWER ANALYSIS option produces a list of signals that consume more current than tol at time point The second SIM POWER ANALYSIS option produces the list of lowest level signals known as leaf subcircuits that consume more than to1 at time point For syntax and description of these options statement see OPTION SIM POWER ANALYSIS in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Heference Power Analysis Output Format Power analysis using the POWER statement creates a table that can be read by any spreadsheet to post process the data Signal Port Current Definition Dep Dep Name Name Parent Up Dn Max A Min A Avg A RMS A Column Description Signal Index number assigned to the Port Current Name You can use this value to find the parent for the port Port Current Name Name of the port Definition Name Definition n
337. put voltage or current X is the input voltage or current Supported Features The HBXF command supports the following features All existing HSPICE RF models and elements Sweep parameter analysis Unlimited number of HB sources Prerequisites and Limitations The following prerequisites and limitations apply to the HBXF command 272 Only one HBXF statement is required If you use multiple HBXF statements HSPICE RF only uses the last HBXF statement At least one HB statement is required which determines the steady state solution Parameter sweeps must be placed in HB statements HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Input Syntax Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Computing Transfer Functions HBXF HBXF out var freq sweep Parameter Description out var Specify i 2 port elem or v n1 n2 freq sweep Frequency sweep range for the input signal also referred to as the HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 input frequency band IFB or fin A sweep of type LIN DEC OCT POI or SWEEPBLOCK Specify the nsteps start and stop frequencies using the following syntax for each type of sweep LIN nsteps start stop DEC nsteps start stop OCT nsteps start stop POI nsteps freq values SWEEPBLOCK BlockName Specify the frequency sweep range for the output signal HSPICE RF determines the offset frequency in the input sidebands for example f1 abs fout k f0 s t
338. que solves the DC parameters first then the AC parameters and finally the transient parameters To perform optimization create an input netlist file that specifies Optimization parameters with upper and lower boundary values along with an initial guess An AC DC TRAN HB or HBOSC optimization statement HSPICE RF User Guide 373 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Optimization 374 An optimization model statement Optimization measurement statements for optimization parameters If you provide the input netlist file optimization specifications limits and initial guess then the optimizer reiterates the simulation until it finds an optimized solution Usage Notes and Examples Optimization works for TRAN AC DC HB HBOSC and HBAC analyses You can add the GOAL options in every meaningful MEASURE statement like FIND WHEN FIND AT and so forth Agata sweep is not required to be defined in the HB statement for HB optimization to use the measured result from MEASURE HBNOISE PHASENOISE or HBTRAN statements Therefore parameter sweep is not supported for this type of optimization Optimize multiple parameters with multiple goals by selecting MODEL OPT LEVEL 0 modified Lavenberg Marquardt method Optimize single parameters in single measurement situations by selecting MODEL OPT LEVEL 1 bisection method Examples e Setting optimization parameters param W opt1 231lu 1
339. r model2 subckt IBIS vccq vss out in IBIS FILE str file ibs IBIS MODEL str ibis model ven en 0 vcc BMCH vccq vss out in en v0dq0 vccq vss buffer 3 file str IBIS FILE model str IBIS MODEL typ typ ramp rwf 2 ramp fwf 2 power on ends HSPICE can now support these kinds of definitions and instances with the following netlist components PARAM statements SUBCKT statements FOMODEL keywords S Parameters FILE and MODEL keywords B Elements RLGCFILE UMODEL FSMODEL RLGCMODEL TABLEMODEL and SMODEL keywords in the W Element Parameter Defaults and Inheritance Use the OPTION PARHIER parameter to specify scoping rules HSPICE RF User Guide 147 Y 2006 03 SP1 Syntax OPTION PARHIER lt GLOBAL LOCAL gt The default setting is GLOBAL Example This example explicitly shows the difference between local and global scoping for using parameters in subcircuits The input netlist includes the following OPTION parhier global local gt PARAM DefPwid 1u SUBCKT Inv a y DefPwid 2u DefNwid 1u Mp1 MosPinList pMosMod L 1 2u W DefPwid Mn1 MosPinList nMosMod L 1 2u W DefNwid ENDS Setthe OPTION PARHIER parameter scoping option to GLOBAL The netlist also includes the following input statements xlInv0O0 a yO Inv override DefPwid default xlInvO Mpl1 width 1u xInvl a yl Inv DefPwid 5u override DefPwid 5u xlInvl Mpl width 1u measure tran WidO p
340. r 1991 3 G D Vendelin Design of Amplifiers and Oscillators by the S Parameter Method John Wiley amp Sons 1982 4 A Demir A Mehrotra J Roychowdhury Phase Noise in Oscillators A Unifying Theory and Numerical Methods for Characterization in Proc IEEE DAC pages 26 31 June 1998 5 A Demir A Mehrotra and J Roychowdhury Phase Noise in Oscillators A Unifying Theory and Numerical Methods for Characterization EEE Trans Circuits System I Volume 47 pages 655 674 May 2000 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 10 Power Dependent S Parameter Extraction Describes how to use periodically driven nonlinear circuit analyses as well as noise parameter calculation HBLSP Analysis An HBLSP analysis provides three kinds of analyses for periodically driven nonlinear circuits such as those that employ power amplifiers and filters Two port power dependant large signal S parameter extraction m Two port small signal S parameter extraction Two port small signal noise parameter calculation Unlike small signal S parameters which are based on linear analysis power dependent S parameters are based on harmonic balance simulation Its solution accounts for nonlinear effects such as compression and variation in power levels The definition for power dependent S parameters is similar to that for small signal parameters Power dependent S parameters are defined as the ratio of reflected and incident waves by u
341. r Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 2 Getting Started Describes how to set up your environment invoke HSPICE RF customize your simulation redirect input and output and use the CosmosScope waveform display tool Before you run HSPICE RF you need to set up several environment variables You can also create a configuration file to customize your simulation run HSPICE RF accepts a netlist file from standard input and delivers the ASCII text simulation results to HTML or to standard output Error and warning messages are forwarded to standard error output Running HSPICE RF Simulations Use the following syntax to invoke HSPICE RF hspicerf a inputfile outputfile h vl For a description of the hspicerf command syntax and arguments see section HSPICE RF Command Syntax in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Netlist Overview The circuit description syntax for HSPICE RF is compatible with the SPICE and HSPICE input netlist format For a description of an input netlist file and methods of entering data see chapter Input Netlist and Data Entry in the HSPICE Simulation and Analysis User Guide HSPICE RF User Guide 9 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 2 Getting Started Parametric Analysis Extensions Parametric Analysis Extensions All major HSPICE RF analyses TRAN AC DC and HB support the following parameter sweeps with the same syntax as standard HSPICE LIN DEC u OCT DATA POI You can also use the MO
342. r R1 at the fundamental HB analysis frequency following a one tone analysis PROBE HB P R1 1 x Example 3 This example prints the power dissipated by resistor R1 at DC following a one tone analysis PRINT HB P R1 0 HSPICE RF User Guide 217 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis 218 Example 4 This example outputs the RMS power dissipated by resistor R1 at the low side 3rd order intermodulation product following an HB two tone analysis PROBE HB P R1 I2 1 Example 5 This example prints the RMS power dissipated by resistor R1 at the high side 3rd order intermodulation product following an HB two tone analysis PRINT HB P R1 1 2 Example 6 This example outputs the RMS power spectrum delivered to port element Pload PROBE HB P Pload Example 7 The following example prints the RMS power delivered to port element P1oad at the fundamental HB analysis frequency following a one tone analysis PRINT HB P Pload 1 Example 8 The following example outputs the RMS power delivered to port element Pload at the low side 3rd order intermodulation product following an HB two tone analysis PROBE HB P Pload 2 1 Calculating for a Time Domain Output In addition to a frequency domain output HB analysis also supports a time domain output A frequency domain signal is Inverse Fast Fourier Transformed into a time domain by this formula
343. r at the end of the file and before the END statement Note If you do not place an END statement at the end of the input netlist file HSPICE RF issues an error message HSPICE RF User Guide 43 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Guidelines 44 Netlist input processing is case insensitive except for file names and their paths HSPICE RF does not limit the identifier length line length or file size Input Line Format The input reader can accept an input token such as astatement name e anode name e a parameter name or value Any valid string of characters between two token delimiters is a token You can not use a character string as a parameter value in HSPICE RF See Delimiters on page 46 An input statement or equation can be up to 1024 characters long HSPICE RF ignores differences between upper and lower case in input lines except in quoted filenames To continue a statement on the next line enter a plus sign as the first non numeric non blank character in the next line To indicate to the power of in your netlist use two asterisks For example 2 5 represents two to the fifth power 29 To continue all HSPICE RF statements including quoted strings such as paths and algebraics use a backslash or a double backslash atthe end of the line that you want to continue A single backslash preserves white space Names must begin wit
344. r end is voltage between the conductors Examples of transmission lines include Power transmission lines Telephone lines Waveguides Traces on printed circuit boards and multi chip modules MCMs Bonding wires in semiconductor IC packages On chip interconnections W Element The W element supports five different formats to specify the transmission line properties Model 1 RLGC Model specification e Internally specified in a model statement e Externally specified in a different file HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines Model 2 U Model specification e RLGC input for up to five coupled conductors e Geometric input planer coax twin lead e Measured parameter input e Skin effect Model 3 Built in field solver model Model 4 Frequency dependent tabular model Model 5 S Parameter Model W Element Statement The general syntax for a lossy W Element transmission line element is RLGC file form Wxxx inl lt in2 lt inx gt gt refin outi out2 lt outx gt gt refout RLGCfile filename N val L val U Model form Wxxx inl in2 inx refin outl out2 outx refout lt Umodel modelname gt N val L val Field solver form Wxxx inl in2 lt inx gt gt refin outl out2 outx refout lt FSmodel modelname gt N val L val The number of ports on a single transmission line are not limited You must provide one input a
345. r of node names n1 n2 Current type an element name elemname Power type a resistor resistorname or port portname element name Frequency type the harmonic index for the hertz variable The frequency of the specified harmonics is dumped Index to tones in the form n1 n2 nK 1 nj is the index of the j th HB tone and the HB statement contains K tones 1 is the index of the HBAC tone Wildcards are not supported if this parameter is used You can transform HB data into the time domain and output by using the following syntax PRINT HBTRAN ov1 ov2 ovN PROBE HBTRAN ov1 ov2 ovN See TYPE above for voltage and current type definitions Output Data Files An HBAC analysis produces these output data files Output from the PRINT statement is written to a printhb file This data is against the IFB points The header contains the large signal fundamental and the range of small signal frequencies The columns of data are labeled as F Hz followed by the output variable names Each variable name has the associated mixing pair value appended All N variable names and all M mixing pair values are printed for each swept small signal frequency value a total of N M for each frequency value Output from the PROBE statement is written to a hb file This data is against the IFB points HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses
346. r to be swept in dBm units param Pin dBm 30 0 param Pin Pin dBm param Pin W 1 0e 3 pwr 10 0 Pin 10 0 References to sources must use SI units in conjunction with the previous equation to convert from dBm to Watts The colon is used as a labeling convenience Second a voltage source element is used as a two tone power source by setting the power flag and a source impedance of 50 ohms is specified The HB keyword is used to identify the amplitude interpreted in Watts with the power flag set phase harmonic index and tone index for each tone Vin rfind gnd dc 0 power 1 z0 50 50 Ohm src HB Pin W 0 1 1 tone 1 HB Pin W 0 12 tone 2 Third the HB command designates the frequencies of the two tones and establishes the power sweep using the dBm power variable The intmodmax parameter has been set to 7 to include intermodulation harmonic content up to 7th order effects HB tones 900MEG 910MEG nharms 11 intmodmax 7 SWEEP Pin dBm 50 0 0 0 2 0 Last the HSPICE RF ability to specify specific harmonic terms is used in the PRINT and PROBE statements to pull out the signals of particular interest Notice the three different formats PRINT HB P Rload This reference dumps a complete spectrum in RMS Watts for the power across resistor Rload PRINT HB P Rload 1 0 This reference selectively dumps the power in resistor Rload at the first harmonic of the 1st tone PRINT HB P Rload 2 1 This reference
347. raction 100 Final cell placement final route 3d extraction Logical name of a pin Physical name of a node Name of a net in a circuit or subcircuit Unique identifier for capacitance between two specific nodes Unique identifier for resistance between two specific nodes Unique identifier for inductance between two specific nodes First of two nodes between which you are specifying a capacitance resistance or inductance value Second of two nodes between which you are specifying a capacitance resistance or inductance value For a capacitance value if you do not specify a second node name HSPICE RF assumes that the second node is ground HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Table 24 SPEF Parameters Continued Parameter Definition capacitance Specifies the capacitance value assigned to a cap id identifier capacitance unit defines the units of capacitance For example if you set capacitance to 5 and capacitance unit to 10 PF then the actual capacitance value is 50 picoFarads resistance Specifies the resistance value assigned to a res id identifier resistance unit defines the units of resistance For example if you set resistance to 5 and resistance unitto 5 KOHM then the actual resistance value is 25 kilo ohms inductance Specifies the resistance value assigned to an induc id identifier inductance unit defines the units of inductance For
348. ram Pin dBm 30 0 param Pin Pin dBm param Pin W 1 0e 3 pwr 10 0 Pin 10 0 Change to Watts for sources kk Cascode LNA tuned for operation near 1 GHz kk M1 n4 n3 n5 n5 CMOSN 1 0 25u w 7 5u as 15p ad 15p ps 19u pd 19u m 80 M2 n6 nil n4 n4 CMOSN 1 0 25u w 7 5u as 15p ad 15p ps 19u pd 19u m 80 M3 rfo n6 gnd gnd CMOSN 1 0 25u w 7 5u as 15p ad 15p ps 19u pd 19u m 40 rl vdd n6 400 11 n5 gnd 1 0 9nH 12 rfin n3 1 13nH 0 65n vvb nl gnd dc 1 19 bias for common base device vinb rfinb gnd dc 0 595 lchk rfin rfinb INFINITY Choke cblk rfin rfind INFINITY DC block vvdd vdd gnd dc Vdd rfb rfo n6 120 feedback kk Two tone input source DC blocked at this point kk Vin rfind gnd dc 0 power 1 z0 50 50 Ohm src HB Pin W 011 tone 1 HB Pin W 012 tone 2 Rload rfo vdd R 255 k HB test bench to measure IP3 and IP2 22 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 kk HB tones 900MEG 910MEG nharms 11 SWEEP Pin dBm 50 0 0 0 2 0 print HB P Rload P Rload 1 0 probe HB P Rload P Rload 1 0 k Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 3 Amplifier IP3 11 intmodmax 7 P Rload 2 0 P Rload 2 0 P Rload 2 1 P Rload 2 1 Approximate parameters for MOSIS 0 25um process run T17B k MODEL CMOSN NMOS LEVEL 49 VERSION 3 1 TNOM 27 TOX 5 8E 9 TXJ 1E 7 NCH 2 3549E17 VTHO 0 3819327 K1 0 477867 K2 2 422759E 3 K3 1E 3 K3B 2 1606637 WO 1
349. ransmission line Internal field solver model name References the PETL internal field solver as the source of the transmission line characteristics for syntax see Using the Field Solver Model chapter in the HSPICE Signal Integrity Guide HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines Parameter Description NODEMAP String that assigns each index of the S parameter matrix to one of the W Element terminals This string must be an array of pairs that consists of a letter and a number for example Xn where X 1 i N or n to indicate near end input side terminal of the W element u X O i F or f to indicate far end output side terminal of the W element The default value for NODEMAP is I112I3 nO010203 On Smodel S Model name reference which contains the S parameters of the transmission lines for the S Model syntax see the HSPICE Signal Integrity Guide TABLEMODEL Name of the frequency dependent tabular model Example 1 The W1 lossy transmission line connects the in node to the out node W1 in gnd out gnd RLGCfile cable rlgc N 1 L 5 Where Both signal references are grounded The RLGC file is named cable rlgc The transmission line is 5 meters long Example 2 The Wcable element is a two conductor lossy transmission line Wcable inl in2 gnd outl out2 gnd Umodel umod 1 N 2 L 10 Where in1 and in2 input nodes connect to the out1 and out2 output
350. rcuits Because the frequency of oscillation is not determined by the frequencies of driving sources these circuits are called autonomous Autonomous simulation solves a slightly different set of nonlinear equations as shown in the following equation F V V o9 OQ V o9 Y o9 V 4 I HSPICE RF adds the fundamental frequency of oscillation to the list of unknown circuit quantities To accommodate the extra unknown the phase or equivalently the imaginary part of one unknown variable generally a node voltage is set to zero The phases of all circuit quantities are relative to the phase at this reference node Additionally HSPICE RF tries to avoid the degenerate solution where all non DC quantities are zero Although this is a valid solution of the above equation it is the correct solution if the circuit does not oscillate HB analysis might find this solution incorrectly if the algorithm starts from a bad initial solution HSPICE RF follows the technique described by Ngoya et al which uses an internally applied voltage probe to find the oscillation voltage and frequency The source resistance of this probe is a short circuit at the oscillation frequency and an open circuit otherwise HSPICE RF uses a two tier Newton approach to find a non zero probe voltage which results in zero probe current HSPICE RF uses the DC solution as a starting point for non autonomous HB analysis In addition to the DC solution autonomou
351. re S switch J jumper 295 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation 296 Table 23 DSPF Parameters Continued Parameter Definition resistance capacitance unit X coordinate y coordinate capacitor statements resistor statements subcircuit call statements END Resistance on a pin in ohms for input I output O or bidirectional B pins You can use resistance capacitance RC pairs to model pin characteristics by using a higher order equivalent RC ladder circuit than a single capacitor model For example CO R1 C1 R2 C2 Attaching RC pairs increases the order of the equivalent circuit from the first CO order For X S and J pin types simulation ignores this generalized capacitance value but you should insert a 0 value as a place holder for format integrity The resistance value can be a real number or an exponent optionally followed by a real number You can enter an O ohms after the value Capacitance on a pin in farads for input I output O or bidirectional B pins Use as part of a resistance capacitance RC pair Optionally enter an F farads after the value K kilo M milli Location of a pin relative to the x horizontal axis Location of a pin relative to the y vertical axis SPICE type statements that define capacitors in the subcircuit SPICE type statements that define resistors in the subcircuit Statements that call
352. re 9 on page 75 X1 D Q Qbar CL CLBAR dlatch flip 0 macro dlatch D Q Qbar CL CLBAR flip vcc nodeset v din flip xinvl din qbar inv xinv2 Qbar Q inv ml q CLBAR din nch w 5 1 1 m2 D CL din nch w 5 1 1 eom HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Using Subcircuits Figure 9 D Latch with Nodeset Q clbar cl E D 1 Q din C Nodeset HSPICE does not limit the size or complexity of subcircuits they can contain subcircuit references and any model or element statement However in HSPICE RF you cannot replicate output commands within subcircuit definitions To specify subcircuit nodes in PRINT statements specify the full subcircuit path and node name DDL Library Access To include a DDL library component in a data file use the X subcircuit call statement with the DDL element call The DDL element statement includes the model name which the actual DDL library file uses For example the following element statement creates an instance of the 1N4004 diode model X1 2 1 D1N4004 Where D1N4004 is the model name See Element and Source Statements on page 55 and the HSPICE Elements and Device Models Manual for descriptions of element statements Optional parameter fields in the element statement can override the internal specification of the model For example for op amp devices you can override the offset voltage and the gain and offset current Because
353. re the accuracy of the post layout simulation Use SIM DSPF MAX ITER or SIM_SPEF_MAX_ITER to set the maximum number of iterations for the second run If the active node remains the same after the second simulation run HSPICE RF ignores these options For descriptions and usage examples see OPTION SIM DSPF MAX ITER and OPTION SIM SPEF MAX ITER in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Additional Post Layout Options Other post layout options are listed in Table 22 Table 22 Additional Post Layout Options Syntax Description SIM DSPF RAIL Or SIM_SPEF_RAIL SIM_DSPF_SCALER SIM_SPEF_SCALER Or SIM_DSPF_SCALEC SIM_SPEF_SCALEC By default HSPICE RF does not back annotate parasitics of the power net To back annotate power net parasitics include one of these options in the netlist Default OFF ON expands nets in a power rail as it expands all nets Scales the resistance or capacitance values scaleR is the scale factor for resistance scaleC is the scale factor for capacitance HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Table 22 Additional Post Layout Options Continued Syntax Description SIM_DSPF_LUMPCAPS If HSPICE RF cannot back annotate an instance in a net Or because one or more instances are missing in the SIM_SPEF_LUMPCAPS hierarchical LVS ideal netlist then by default HSPICE RF does not evaluate the net Inste
354. ressions are kept numerically very small thus the differences from the different values of locwidth are dominant and the results look almost identical to the ones from test3 sp In test6 sp the resistor width is assigned inside of the subcircuit The variations get picked up from the top level Because each subcircuit is a separate entity the parameter w is treated as a separate reference thus each resistor will have its own value partly defined through the common value of globwidth and partly through the separate value of locwidth test7 sp has two resistors in the subcircuit Each device in each subcircuit has a separate reference to the variation therefore each device gets its own value In test8 sp the variation definition for locwidth has been moved from the top level into the subcircuit Each resistor has a common global variation and its own local variation test9 sp assigns the top level variation to a local parameter which in turn is applied to the width definition of the resistor This happens independently within each subcircuit thus we end up with the same values for the resistor pair in each subcircuit but different values for the different pairs This technique can be applied to long resistors when a middle terminal is required for connecting capacitance to the substrate The resulting two resistor pieces will have the same resistance but it will be different from other resistor pairs HSPICE
355. results of the analysis are displayed in Figure 2 on page 35 Figure 3 on page 36 and Figure 4 on page 37 using CosmosScope for VCO waveforms tuning curves and phase noise response 34 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 5 CMOS GPS VCO Figure2 VCO Waveforms Output in CosmosScope VCO IQ Waveformsand Spectra V t s timedomain v m 1d b m2d b timedomain v m 1d m2d 200p 400p 600p dB V f Hz v mid_b m2d_b dB V f Hz vimid m2d HSPICE RF User Guide 35 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 5 CMOS GPS VCO Figure 3 VCO Tuning Curves Output in CosmosScope GPS VCO Tuning Curve Mag V vtune v m1id m2d 1 Freq vtune At begin freq f0 ES 2 D i pos 2 vtune a ee eo KEREN 20 25 U So 4 4 vtune _ HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 6 Mixer Figure 4 VCO Phase Noise Response in CosmosScope GPS VCO Phase Noise dBc Hz f Hz PHNOISE Q ETE us 3 120 0 J 140 0 1 60 0 100 0 1 0k 10 0k 100 0k 1meg t Hz Example 6 Mixer The example in this section shows how to use HSPICE RF to analyze a circuit driven by multiple input stimuli with different frequencies Mixer circuits provide a typical example of this scenario in this case there might be two input signals LO and RF which are mixed to produce an IF output signal In this
356. riable specified in the HB simulation control statement This variable can be anything frequency power voltage current a component value and so on Example 1 For the following HB simulation control statement the independent variable is the swept tone frequency and the MEASURE command values return results based on this frequency sweep HARMONIC BALANCE tone frequency sweep for amplifier param freqi 1 91e9 power 1e 3 HB tones freql nharms 10 sweep freql LIN 10 1 91e9 2 0e9 MEASURE HB Patf0 FIND P Rload 1 AT 1 95e9 Power at f0 1 95Ghz MEASURE HB Frq1W WHEN P Rload 1 1 freql 1 Watt HSPICE RF User Guide 219 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis 220 MEASURE HB BW1W TRIG AT 1 92e9 TARG P Rload 1 VAL 1 CROSS 2 1 Watt bandwidth MEASURE HB MaxPwr MAX P Rload 1 FROM 1 91e9 TO 2 0e9 Finds max output power MEASURE HB MinPwr MIN P Rload 1 FROM 1 91e9 TO 2 0e9 Finds min output power Example 2 In the following example the independent variable is the power variable and the MEASURE values return results based on the power sweep Units are in Watts HARMONIC BALANCE power sweep for amplifier param freqi 1 91e9 power 1e 3 HB tones freq1 nharms 10 sweep power DEC 10 1e 6 1e 3 MEASURE HB PatluW FIND P Rload 1 AT 1e 6 Pout at 1uW MEASURE HB PinlW WHEN P Rload 1 1 Pin 1 Watt Pout MEASURE HB PrangelW TRIG A
357. rm noise analysis on RF circuits by using the HBNOISE command which is included in the mix hbac sp netlist The HBNOISE command invokes noise analysis identifying an output node where the noise is measured an input noise source in this case rrf1 which serves as a reference for noise figure computation and a frequency sweep for the noise analysis The PRINT and PROBE hbnoise commands instruct HSPICE RF to save the output noise and noise figure at each frequency in the mix hbac printpnO and mix hbac pnO output files This ideal mixer is noiseless except for the resistors at the input and output The mix hbac lis file contains detailed data on the individual noise source contributions of the resistors You can view mix hbac printpnO to see the output noise and noise figure at each frequency In CosmosScope you can view mix hbac pnO to plot the output noise and noise figure data as a function of frequency Device Model Cards The following is an NMOS model in cmos49 model inc file used in the power amplifier example It is available in directory lt installdir gt demo hspicerf examples MODEL CMOSN NMOS LEVEL 49 VERSION 3 1 TNOM 27 TOX 7 9E 9 XJ 1 5E 7 NCH 1 7E17 VTHO 0 5047781 K1 0 5719698 K2 0 0197928 K3 33 4446099 K3B 3 1667861 WO 1E 5 NLX 2 455237E 7 HSPICE RF User Guide 41 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Device Model Cards DVTOW 0 DVT1W 0 DVT2W
358. rns 0 greater para x y gt z y greater than z than HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 141 Table 11 Synopsys HSPICE Built in Functions Continued HSPICE Form Function Description gt relational Returns 1 if the left operand is greater than or equal operator to the right operand Otherwise returns 0 greater para x y gt z y greater than or equal to z than or equal equality Returns 1 if the operands are equal Otherwise returns 0 para x y z y equal to z l inequality Returns 1 if the operands are not equal Otherwise returns 0 para x y z y not equal to z amp amp Logical Returns 1 if neither operand is zero Otherwise AND returns 0 para x y amp amp z y AND z II Logical OR Returns 1 if either or both operands are not zero Returns 0 only if both operands are zero para x yllz y OR z Example parameters pl 4 p2 5 p3 6 r 1 0 value pl p2 1 p3 HSPICE reserves the variable names listed in Table 12 on page 142 for use in elements such as E G R C and L You can use them in expressions but you cannot redefine them for example this statement would be illegal param temper 100 Table 12 Synopsys HSPICE Special Variables HSPICE Form Function Description time current Uses parameters to define the current simulation simulation time during transient analysis time HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 142 Table 12 Synopsys HSPICE Special Variables Continued
359. rt number HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Scattering Parameter Data Element Parameter Specifies DTEMP Temperature difference between the element and the circuit Expressed in C The default is 0 0 NOISE Activates thermal noise 1 default element generates thermal noise 0 element is considered noiseless a Circuit temperature is specified by using the TEMP statement or by sweeping the global TEMP variable in DC AC or TRAN statements When neither TEMP or TEMP is used circuit temperature is set by using OPTION TNOM The default for TNOM is 25 C unless you use OPTION SPICE which has a default of 27 C You can use the DTEMP parameter to specify the temperature of the element The preceding table lists descriptions of the S element parameters For other parameters refer to the S model parameter descriptions The nodes of the S element must come first If MNAME is not declared you must specify the FOMODEL You can specify all the optional parameters in both the S element and S model statements except for MNAME argument You can enter the optional arguments in any order and the parameters specified in the element statement have a higher priority If the number of nodes in the element card is smaller than the number specified in the model card or external file by 1 then the reference node is the default The default reference node is 0 gnd HSPICE RF Us
360. s For frequencies below f0 the approx signal matches that of the original admittance Above fo the two waveforms diverge but presumably the higher frequencies are not of interest The lower the fO frequency the greater the amount of reduction For the syntax and description of this control option see OPTION SIM LA in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference You can choose one of two algorithms explained in the following sections PACT Algorithm PI Algorithm PACT Algorithm The PACT Pole Analysis via Congruence Transforms algorithm reduces the RC networks in a well conditioned manner while preserving network stability The transform preserves the first two moments of admittance at DC slope and offset so that DC behavior is correct see Figure 24 The algorithm preserves enough low frequency poles from the original network to maintain the circuit behavior up to a specified maximum frequency f0 within the specified tolerance This approach is the most accurate of the two algorithms and is the default Figure 24 PACT Algorithm o is c o t E frequency 310 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Linear Acceleration PI Algorithm This algorithm creates a pi model of the RC network Foratwo port the pi model reduced network consists of e aresistor connecting the two ports and e a capacitor connecting each port to ground The result resembles the
361. s However AL TER processing can accept INCLUDE statements within a file that a LIB statement calls HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition Using Multiple ALTER Blocks This section does not apply to HSPICE RF Forthe first simulation run HSPICE reads the input file up to the first ALTER statement and performs the analyses up to that ALTER statement After it completes the first simulation HSPICE reads the input between the first ALTER statement and either the next ALTER statement or the END statement HSPICE then uses these statements to modify the input netlist file HSPICE then resimulates the circuit For each additional ALTER statement HSPICE performs the simulation that precedes the first ALTER statement HSPICE then performs another simulation using the input between the current ALTER statement and either the next ALTER statement or the END statement If you do not want to rerun the simulation that precedes the first ALTER statement every time you run an ALTER simulation then do the following 1 Putthe statements that precede the first ALTER statement into a library 2 Usethe LIB statement in the main input file 3 Puta DEL LIB statement in the ALTER section to delete that library for the ALTER simulation run Connecting Nodes Use a CONNECT statement to connect two nodes in
362. s circuits need an accurate initial value for both the oscillation frequency and the probe voltage HSPICE RF calculates the small signal admittance that the voltage probe sees over a HSPICE RF User Guide 227 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Harmonic Balance for Oscillator Analysis range of frequencies in an attempt to find potential oscillation frequencies Oscillation is likely to occur where the real part of the probe current is negative and the imaginary part is zero You can use the FSPTS parameter to specify the frequency search You must also supply an initial guess for the large signal probe voltage A value of one half the supply voltage is often a good starting point Input Syntax HBOSC TONE F1 lt F2 gt lt Fn gt NHARMS H1 lt H2 gt lt Hn gt PROBENODE N1 N2 VP lt OSCTONE N gt lt FSPTS NUM MIN MAX gt SWEEP PARAMETER SWEEP gt SUBHARMS I ISRC N1 N2 VP HBOSCVPROBE VP HBOSC TONE F1 NHARMS H1 PROBENODE N1 N2 VP lt FSPTS NUM MIN MAX Parameter Description TONE Approximate value for oscillation frequency Hz The search for an exact oscillation frequency begins from this value unless you specify an FSPTS range or transient initialization see HB Simulation of Ring Oscillators on page 230 for more information NHARMS Number of harmonics to use for oscillator HB analysis PROBENODE Nodes used to probe for oscillation conditions N1 and N2 are the po
363. s in a hspice File To insert comments into your hspicerf file include a number sign character as the first character in a line For example this configuration file shows how to use comments in a hspicerf file sample configuration file the next line of code changes the delimiter for subcircuit hierarchies from to hier delimiter the next line of code matches any groups of characters wildcard match all the next line of code matches one character wildcard match one the next line of code begins the range expression with the character wildcard left range the next line of code ends the range expression with the character wildcard right range HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Using Wildcards in HSPICE RF Using Wildcards in HSPICE RF You can use wildcards to match node names HSPICE RF uses wildcards somewhat differently than standard HSPICE Before using wildcards you must define the wildcard configuration in a hspicerf file For example you can define the following wildcards in a hspicerf file file hspicerf wildcard match one wildcard match all wildcard left range wildcard right range The PRINT PROBE LPRINT and CHECK statements support wildcards in HSPICE RF For more information about using wildcards in an HSPICE configuration file see Using Wildcards in PRINT PROBE PLOT and GRAPH Statements i
364. s the following time domain description Vm 0 5 cos 2 pi 1 e8 t Example 4 This example uses an HB source specified with a SIN source and HBTRANINIT hb tone 1 e8 harms 7 Vt 1 2 SIN 0 1 1 0 2 e8 0 0 90 tranforhb 1 Vt is converted to the following HB source Vt 1 2 dc 0 1 hb 1 0 0 0 2 1 Example 5 This example shows a power source the units are Watts hb tones 1 1e9 harms 9 Pt Input Gnd power 1 Z0 50 1m 0 1 1 Pt delivers 1 mW of power through a 50 ohm impedance Steady State HB Sources 184 The fundamental frequencies used with harmonic balance analysis are specified with the HB TONES command These frequencies can then be referenced by their integer indices when specifying steady state signal sources For example the HB specification given by the following line HB TONES 1900MEG 1910MEG INTMODMAX 5 This specifies two fundamental frequencies rone 1 1 9GHz and fltone 2 1 91GHz Their mixing product at 10 MHz can then be referenced using indices as 2 11 while their 3rd order intermodulation product at 1 89 GHz can be referenced as 2 1 2 l HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Steady State HB Sources Steady state voltage and current sources are identified with the HB keyword according to lt HB lt mag lt phase lt harm lt tone lt modharm lt modtone gt gt gt gt gt gt gt The source is mathematically equivalent to a cosine signal sourc
365. s the smallest delay then you can obtain the Monte Carlo parameters for that simulation monte carlo index 68 MONTE CARLO PARAMETER DEFINITIONS polycd xl 1 6245E 07 nactcd xwn 3 4997E 08 pactcd xwp 3 6255E 08 toxcd tox 191 0 vtoncd delvton 2 2821E 02 delvtop 4 1776E 02 vtopcd rshncd rshn 45 16 rshpcd rshp 166 2 m delay 1 7929E 10 targ 3 4539E 10 trig 1 6610E 10 m power 6 6384E 03 from 0 0000E 00 to 1 0000E 09 In the preceding listing the m_delay value of 1 79e 10 seconds is the fastest pair delay You can also examine the Monte Carlo parameters that produced this result 352 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP 1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case and Monte Carlo Sweep Example The information on shortest delay and so forth is also available from the statistics section at the end of the output listing While this information is useful to determine whether the circuit meets specification it is often desirable to understand the relationship of the parameters to circuit performance Plotting the results against the Monte Carlo index number does not help for this purpose You need to generate plots that display a Monte Carlo result as a function of a parameter For example Figure 41 shows the inverter pair delay to channel as a function of poly width which relates directly to device length Figure 41 Delay as a function of Poly width XL Monte Carla Results xiepalyca
366. sa8 sa9 sa10 sb1 sb2 sb3 sb4 Sb5 sb6 sb7 sb8 sb9 sb10 sw1 sw2 sw3 sw4 sw5 sw6 sw7 sw8 sw9 Sw10 muluO mulua mulub tnodeout rthO cthO deltox delk1 delnfct and acnqsmod Bsim4 supports the following instance parameters L w ad as pd ps nrd nrs rdc rsc off ic dtemp delvto geo rbsb rbdb rbpb rbps rbpd trngsmod acnqsmod rbodymod rgatemod geomod rgeomod nf min muluO delk1 delnfct deltox sa sb sd stimod sa1 sa2 sa3 sa4 sa5 sa6 sa7 sa8 sa9 sa10 sb1 sb2 sb3 sb4 sb5 sb6 sb7 sb8 Sb9 sb10 sw1 sw2 sw3 sw4 sw5 sw6 sw7 sw8 sw9 sw10 xgw ngcon sca scb scc sc delk2 delxj mulngate delrsh delrshg dellpeO deldvtO and mulvsat Variations Specified on Model Parameters In this section we investigate the method of specifying distributions on parameters and using these parameters to define values of model parameters With this approach the netlist does not have to be parameterized The modmonte option can be used to distinguish between global variations all devices of a particular model have the same parameter set or local variations every device has a unique random value for the specified parameters testiO sp shows a simple case where the model parameter for sheet resistivity is assigned a distribution defined on the parameter rsheet The results show that all resistors have the same value for each Monte Carlo sample but a different one for different
367. selectively dumps the power in resistor Rload at the 3rd intermodulation product frequency 890 MHz HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 3 Amplifier IP3 To run this simulation type the following line at the command line hspicerf gsmlnaIP3 sp Viewing Results using CosmoScope For this analysis the print statement will generate a design name printhbO file Assume you want to find out the output power through the load resistor at the first tone when the input power is 0 1mW To view the file AVN Click the 4 Analysis button and then click on the Print tab Click the 3 Simulation button Invoke CosmosScope by clicking on the Waveform button Choose File gt Open gt Plotfiles to open the lt design_name gt hbO file Be sure to select HSPICERF hb pn hr jt from the Files of type pulldown to find the lt design_name gt hbO file Plot the signals Pr rload 1 0 Pr rload 2 0 and Pr rload 2 1 on top of each other The X axis will be the input power and the Y axis will be the output power Result CosmosScope will display the input and output power in dBm But there will be a W or Watt after the dBm label this is incorrect To measure the 1dB compression point of the amplifier open the measurement tool by clicking on the caliper icon at the bottom tool bar Use the down arrow at the end of the Measurement field and select RF and P1dB The PowerOut
368. sing 2 tone HB add HB source for Lo add HB 0 5 0 1 1tothe LO voltage source this sets the amplitude to 0 5 no phase shift for the first harmonic of the first tone which is 1 GHz HB source for RF add HB 0 001 24 1 2tothe RF voltage source this sets the amplitude to 0 001 24 degrees phase shift for the first harmonic of the second tone 0 8 GHz An HB command specifying both tones hb tones 1g 0 8g nharms 6 3 only a small number of harmonics is required to resolve the signals The complete mix_hb sp netlist for 2 tone HB analysis is then Ideal mixer example 2 tone HB analysis OPTIONS POST vlo lo 0 1 0 sin 1 0 0 5 1 0g O O 90 HB 0 5 0 1 1 rrfl rfl rf 1 0 gl 0 if cur 1 0 v lo v rf mixer element cl 0 if q2 1 0e 9 v lo v rf mixer element HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 6 Mixer rout if ifg 1 0 vctrl ifg 0 0 0 hi out O vctrl 1 0 convert I to V rhi out 0 1 0 vrf rf1 0 sin 0 0 001 0 8GHz 0 O 114 HB 0 00124 1 2 opt sim accuracy 100 hb tones 1g 0 8g nharms 6 3 end This example is available in directory lt installdir gt demo hspicerf examples HBAC Approach To analyze this circuit using HBAC start with the 2 tone HB analysis setup and modify it as follows Replace the RF HB signal with an HBAC signal change HB 0 001 24 1 2 to Hpac 0 001 24 this deactivates the source for HB and activates it for HBAC with the same magnitude
369. sing this equation b S a S ij b unla jn when a k n k j 0 The incident waves a i n and reflected waves b i n are defined by using these equations ali n V if n Wo Zoli I i n Wo 2 sart Zg i b i n V i n Wo Zoli I i n Wo 2 sart Zg i Where Wo is the fundamental frequency tone nisa signed integer HSPICE RF User Guide 247 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 10 Power Dependent S Parameter Extraction Limitations j is the port number afi n is the input wave at the frequency n Wj on the jth port bfi n is the reflected wave at the frequency n Wj on the jm port V i n Wo is the Fourier coefficient at the frequency n W of the voltage at port i I i n Wo is the Fourier coefficient at the frequency n W of the current at port i Zoi is the reference impedance at port i An HBLSP analysis only extracts the S parameters on the first harmonic that is n 1 Limitations The HBLSP analysis has these known limitations Power dependent S parameter extraction is a 2 port analysis only Multiport power dependent S parameters are not currently supported The intermodulation data block IMTDATA in the p2d file is not supported The internal impedance of the P port Element can only be a real value Complex impedance values are not supported Input Syntax 248 HBLSP NHARMS nh lt POWERUNIT dbm watt gt lt SSPCALC 1 0 YES
370. sitive and negative nodes for a voltage probe inserted in the circuit for oscillator analysis VP is the initial probe voltage value one half the supply voltage is a suggested value The phase of the probe voltage is forced to zero all other phases are relative to the probe phase HSPICE RF uses this probe to calculate small signal admittance for the initial frequency estimates It should be connected to a non linear device OSCTONE Specifies what tone to use as the autonomous tone counted from 1 up The default is 1 228 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Harmonic Balance for Oscillator Analysis Parameter Description FSPTS Specifies the frequency search points that HSPICE RF uses in its initial small signal frequency search Optional but recommended unless the circuit is a ring oscillator see HB Simulation of Ring Oscillators on page 230 for more information NUM is an integer MIN and MAX are in units of Hz When present this parameter causes the TONE parameter to be ignored SWEEP Specifies the type of sweep You can sweep up to three variables You can specify either LIN DEC OCT POI SWEEPBLOCK DATA OPTIMIZE or MONTE Specify the nsteps start and stop frequencies using the following syntax for each type of sweep LIN nsteps start stop DEC nsteps start stop OCT nsteps start stop POI nsteps freq_values SWEEPBLOCK nsteps freq1 freq2 freq
371. specifications SIN PULSE VMRF and PWL sources with TRANFORHB 1 Prerequisites and Limitations The following prerequisites and limitations apply to HB Hequires one HB statement Treats sources without a DC HB or TRANFORHB description as a zero value for HB unless the sources have a transient description in which case the time 0 The value is used as a DC value HSPICE RF User Guide 207 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis Harmonic Balance Analysis Input Syntax Without SS TONE HB TONES lt F1 gt lt F2 gt lt gt lt FN gt lt NHARMS lt H1 gt lt H2 gt lt gt lt HN gt gt lt INTMODMAX n gt SWEEP parameter_sweep With SS_TONE HB TONES lt F1 gt lt F2 gt lt gt lt FN gt lt NHARMS lt H1 gt lt H2 gt lt gt lt HN gt gt lt INTMODMAX n gt SS TONE n gt SWEEP parameter sweep Parameter Description TONES Fundamental frequencies NHARMS Number of harmonics to use for each tone Must have the same number of entries as TONES You must specify NHARMS INTMODMAX or both INTMODMAX INTMODMAX is the maximum intermodulation product order that you can specify in the analysis spectrum You must specify NHARMS INTMODMAX or both SS_TONE Small signal tone number for HBLIN analysis The value must be an integer number The default value is 0 indicating that no small signal tone is specified For additional information see Freque
372. specify a label use the second syntax with the OPTION WL statement to exchange the width and length options Example In the following M1 MOSFET element MI 1 2 3 model 1 The drain connects to node 1 The gate connects to node 2 The source connects to node 3 model 1 references the MOSFET model In the following Mopamp1 MOSFET element Mopampl dl g3 s2 b 1stage L 2u W 10u The drain connects to the d1 node The gate connects to the g3 node The source connects to the s2 node stage references the MOSFET model The length of the gate is 2 microns The width of the gate is 10 microns In the following Mdrive MOSFET element Mdrive driver in output bsim3v3 W 3u L 0 25u DTEMP 4 0 HSPICE RF User Guide 113 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines The drain connects to the driver node The gate connects to the in node The source connects to the output node bsim3v3 references the MOSFET model The length of the gate is 3 microns The width of the gate is 0 25 microns The device temperature is 4 degrees Celsius higher than the circuit temperature Transmission Lines 114 A transmission line is a passive element that connects any two conductors at any distance apart One conductor sends the input signal through the transmission line and the other conductor receives the output signal from the transmission line The signal that is transmitted from one end of the pair to the othe
373. stors Variation on Model Parameters as a Function of Device Geometry For local variations see DC Mismatch Analysis it is a common requirement to specify variation on a model parameter as a function of device geometry For example the MOS device threshold was observed to vary with the total device area The approach explained in the section Indirect Variations on a Model Parameter can be used While this allows for specifying local variations on each device it does not include the capability of using expressions based on element parameters Thus variation cannot be described with an expression that includes the device s geometry Conceptually a netlist processor could be written that inserts the appropriate values for the parameters as a function of device size Synopsys does not make such a tool available HSPICE RF User Guide 363 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Simulating the Effects of Global and Local Variations with Monte Carlo The DEV LOT approach has no mechanism to describe variation as a function of an element parameter 364 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 16 Advanced Features Describes how to invoke HSPICE RF and how to perform advanced tasks including redirecting input and output HSPICE RF accepts a netlist file from stdin and delivers the ASCII text simulation results to an HTML file or to stdout Error and warning messages are forwarded to standard error output
374. stors HSPICE RF accurately analyzes these in all time domain and frequency domain simulations In this example R4 has resistance with both DC and skin effect contributions RA in out R 100 0 sqrt HERTZ 1000 0 Frequency Dependent Resistors You can specify frequency dependent resistors using the R expression with the HERTZ keyword The HERTZ keyword represents the operating frequency In time domain analyses an expression with the HERTZ keyword behaves differently according to the value assigned to the CONVOLUTION keyword Syntax RXXX N n R expression with HERTZ lt CONVOLUTION 0 1 2 gt FBASE value lt FMAX value gt gt Parameter Description CONVOLUTION Indicates which method is used 0 Acts the same as the conventional method This is the default 1 Applies recursive convolution and if the rational function is not accurate enough it switches to linear convolution 2 Applies linear convolution HSPICE RF User Guide 153 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Passive Elements 154 Parameter Description FBASE Specifies the lower bound of the transient analysis frequency For CONVOLUTION 1 mode HSPICE starts sampling at this frequency For CONVOLUTION 2 mode HSPICE uses this value as the base frequency point for Inverse Fourier Transformation For recursive convolution the default value is OHz and for linear convolution HSPICE uses the reciprocal of the trans
375. stribution is the transistor to transistor process variation It is responsible for critical second order effects such as amplifier offset voltage and flip flop preference HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 343 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Monte Carlo Analysis 344 Figure 34 Major and Minor Distribution of Manufacturing Variations major distribution E minor distribution pop d XL polysilicon linewidth variation The following example is a Monte Carlo analysis of a DC sweep in HSPICE RF Monte Carlo sweeps the VDD supply voltage from 4 5 volts to 5 5 volts You can find the sample netlist for this example in the following directory installdir demo hspice apps mondc_a sp The M1 through M4 transistors form two inverters The nominal value of the LENGTH parameter sets the channel lengths for the MOSFETs which are set to 1u in this example All transistors are on the same integrated circuit die The LEFF parameter specifies the distribution for example a 5 distribution in channel length variation at the 3 sigma level Each MOSFET has an independent random Gaussian value The PHOTO parameter controls the difference between the physical gate length and the drawn gate length Because both n channel and p channel transistors use the same layer for the gates Monte Carlo analysis sets XPHOTO distribution to the PHOTO local parameter XPHOTO controls PHOTO lithography
376. t m_delay 1 palycd o 300p 250p x kk poly cdi Figure 42 shows the pair delay against the TOX parameter The scatter plot shows no obvious dependence which means that the effect of TOX is much smaller than XL To explore this in more detail set the XL skew parameter to a constant and run a simulation HSPICE RF User Guide 353 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case and Monte Carlo Sweep Example Figure 42 Sensitivity of Delay with TOX Monte Carla Results 3 tox toxed 300p m_delayitox toxcd 170 0 180 0 180 0 200 0 210 0 220 0 230 0 tox toxcd The plot in Figure 43 overlays the skew result with the ones from Monte Carlo The skew simulation traverses the design space with all parameters changing in parallel and then produces a relationship between power and delay which shows as a Single line Monte Carlo exercises a variety of independent parameter combinations and shows that there is no simple relationship between the two results Since the distributions were defined as Gaussian in the netlist parameter values close to the nominal are more often exercised than the ones far away With the relatively small number of samples the chance of hitting a combination at the extremes is very small In other words designing for 3 sigma extreme for every parameter is probably not a good solution from the point of view of economy 354 HSPICE RF User Gui
377. t Layout Flow on page 288 Figure 20 Standard Post Layout Flow Extraction Tool DSPF Ideal Netlist SPEF HSPICE RF Back annotation j j HSPICE RF User Guide 285 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation 286 Standard Post Layout Flow Control Options The standard post layout flow options are SIM DSPF and SIM SPEF Include one of these options in your netlist For example OPTION SIM DSPF scope dspf filename OPTION SIM SPEF spec filename In the SIM DSPF syntax scope can be a subcircuit definition or an instance If you do not specify scope it defaults to the top level definition HSPICE RF requires both a DSPF file and an ideal netlist Only flat DSPF files are supported hierarchy statements such as SUBCKT and x1 are ignored Very large circuits generate very large DSPF files this is when using either the SIM DSPForthe SIM DSPF ACTIVE option can really improve performance You can specify a DSPF file in the SIM SPEF option or a SPEF file in the SIM DSPF option The scope function is not supported in the SPEF format For descriptions and usage examples see OPTION SIM DSPF and OPTION SIM SPEF in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference Example models MODEL p pmos MODEL n nmos INCLUDE add4 dspf OPTION SIM DSPF add4 dspf VEC dspf adder vec TRAN 1n 5u vdd
378. t lt rdc val gt lt rac val gt lt RHBAC val gt lt rhb val gt lt rtran val gt Parameter Description lt lt dc gt mag gt DC voltage or power source value You don t need to specify DC explicitly default 0 lt ac lt mag lt phase gt gt gt AC voltage or power source value lt HBAC lt mag lt phase gt gt gt HSPICE RF HBAC voltage or power source value hb mag phase harm HSPICE RF HB voltage current or power source value tone modharm Multiple HB specifications with different harm tone lt modtone gt gt gt gt gt gt gt modharm and modtone values are allowed phase is in degrees harm and tone are indices corresponding to the tones specified in the HB statement Indexing starts at 1 corresponding to the first harmonic of a tone modtone and modharm specify sources for multi tone simulation A source specifies a tone and a harmonic and up to 1 offset tone and harmonic modtone for tones and modharm for harmonics The signal is then described as V or I mag cos 2 pi harm tone modharm modtone t phase HSPICE RF User Guide 181 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Steady State Voltage and Current Sources Parameter Description lt transient waveform gt lt power 0 1 W dbm gt lt z0 val gt lt rdc val gt lt rac val gt lt RHBAC val gt lt rhb val gt lt rtran val gt 182 Transient analysis Any one of wavef
379. t Analysis Output File Formats 320 The WDB format was designed to make accessing waveform data faster and more efficient It is a true database so the waveform browser does not have to load the complete waveform file for you to view a single signal This feature is especially useful if the size of the waveform file is several gigabytes Furthermore the WDB format is usually more compact than XP and NW described later in this section However if the NW file is already very small then WDB offers little advantage in size or speed You can compress WDB files For additional information see Compressing Analog Files on page 322 TR Output Format HSPICE RF stores simulation results for analysis by using the AvanWaves graphical interface method For example these commands output a tr file in TR format OPTION POST 1 saves the results in binary format OPTION POST 2 saves the results in ASCII format XP Output Format HSPICE RF outputs XP binary format to a file with the xp extension This format is compatible with the HSPICE TR binary format For example to output to a xp file enter OPTION POST xp NW Output Format HSPICE RF outputs the NW format to a file with the nw extension Synopsys developed this format you need a Synopsys waveform display tool to process a file in NW format For example to output to a nw file enter OPTION POST nw You can compress NW files For additional information see C
380. t is the reader s responsibility to determine the applicable regulations and to comply with them Disclaimer SYNOPSYS INC AND ITS LICENSORS MAKE NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Registered Trademarks 8 Synopsys AMPS Arcadia C Level Design C2HDL C2V C2VHDL Cadabra Calaveras Algorithm CATS CRITIC CSim Design Compiler DesignPower DesignWare EPIC Formality HSIM HSPICE Hypermodel iN Phase in Sync Leda MAST Meta Meta Software ModelTools NanoSim OpenVera PathMill Photolynx Physical Compiler PowerMill PrimeTime RailMill RapidScript Saber SiVL SNUG SolvNet Superlog System Compiler TetraMAX TimeMill TMA VCS Vera and Virtual Stepper are registered trademarks of Synopsys Inc Trademarks TM Active Parasitics AFGen Apollo Apollo Il Apollo DPIl Apollo GA ApolloGAIl Astro Astro Rail Astro Xtalk Aurora AvanTestchip AvanWaves BCView Behavioral Compiler BOA BRT Cedar ChipPlanner Circuit Analysis Columbia Columbia CE Comet 3D Cosmos CosmosEnterprise CosmosLE CosmosScope CosmosSE Cyclelink Davinci DC Expert DC Professional DC Ultra DC Ultra Plus Design Advisor Design Analyzer Design Vision DesignerHDL DesignTime DFM Workbench Direct RTL Direct Silicon Access Discovery DW8051 DWPCI Dynamic Macromodeling Dynamic Model Swit
381. t1 and tr1 for Monte Carlo inv sp sweep mosfet 3 sigma to 3 sigma use measure output param vref 2 5 sigma 0 global 1 vec 10 5 0 HSPICE RF User Guide 347 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case and Monte Carlo Sweep Example 348 vin in 0 pwl 0 0 0 2n 5 x1 in 2 inv x2 2 3 inv x3 3 out inv x4 out 4 inv macro inv in out mn out in 0 0 nch w 10u l lu mp out in 1 1 pch w 10u l 1u eom param mult1 1 polycd agauss 0 0 06u 1 xl polycd sigma 0 06u nactcd agauss 0 0 3u 1 xwn nactcd sigma 0 3u pactcd agauss 0 0 3u 1 xwp pactcd sigma 0 3u toxcd agauss 200 10 1 tox toxcd sigma 10 vtoncd agauss 0 0 05v 1 delvton vtoncd sigma 0 05 vtopcd agauss 0 0 05v 1 delvtop vtoncd sigma 0 05 rshncd agauss 50 8 1 rshn rshncd sigma 8 rshpcd agauss 150 20 1 rshp rshpcd sigma 20 level 28 example model model nch nmos level 28 lmlt mult1 wmlt multl1 wref 22u lref 4 4u xl x1 xw xwn tox tox delvto delvton rsh rshn model pch pmos level 28 lmlt multi wmlt multl wref 22u lref 4 4u xl xl xw xwp tox tox delvto delvtop rsh rshp ld20 08u wd 0 2u acm 2 ldif 0 hdif 2 5u rs 0 rd 0 rdc 0 rsc 0 rsh rshp js 3e 04 jsw 9e 10 transient with sweep tran 20p 1 0n Sweep sigma 3 3 5 meas s delay trig v 2 val vref fall 1 targ v out val vref fall 1 meas s power rms power transient with Monte Carlo tran 20p 1 0n sweep monte 100
382. te example 378 verification 378 small signal noise parameter extraction 247 small signal S parameter extraction 247 source statements 55 sqrt x function 139 square root function 139 ss file 251 starting hspicerf 9 statement 279 280 ENV 278 HBOSC 227 statements AC 329 CHECK EDGE 379 CHECK FALL 379 CHECK GLOBAL_LEVEL 378 CHECK HOLD 380 CHECK IRDROP 381 CHECK RISE 379 CHECK SETUP 380 CHECK SLEW 378 DATA 64 DC 329 element 55 ENDL 65 LIB 65 LPRINT 321 MODEL 329 PARAM 65 POWER 383 POWERDC 381 source 55 SURGE 388 TEMP 64 329 330 TRAN 329 383 statistical analysis 330 356 statistics calculations 327 subcircuit probing currents 371 subcircuits calling tree 62 changing in ALTER blocks 66 67 creating reusable circuits 71 hierarchical parameters 72 library structure 77 multiplying 73 node names 61 62 Index path names 62 PRINT and PLOT statements 75 zero prefix 63 SURGE statement 388 T tabulated data output 319 Taguchi analysis 326 tan x function 139 tanh x function 139 TEMP model parameter 64 329 TEMP statement 329 330 temper variable 143 temperature circuit 327 329 coefficients 80 derating 64 329 element 329 reference 64 329 variable 143 Temperature Variation Analysis 326 time variable 142 title for simulation 53 TITLE statement 53 TNOM option 64 329 TOX model parameter 331 TRAN statement 329 383 transfer sign function 140 transmission l
383. tement The delay matrix is a constant matrix which HSPICE RF extracts using finite difference calculation at selected target frequency points HSPICE RF obtains the Toq delay matrix component as dO gj 1 40 en n WED ANC n ea Ta i j do 2n df 1 fis the target frequency which you can set using DELAYFREQ The default target frequency is the maximum frequency point 0 is the phase of Sij After time domain analysis obtains the group delay matrix the following equation eliminates the delay amount from the frequency domain system transfer function joT gt mn o x Ymn o Ae mn 2 The convolution process then uses the following equation to calculate the delay z T lig y ki t Y ka ty gt kN x Via Tp Yoq eT op gt VN Tu 3 Pre Conditioning S Parameters Certain S parameters such as series inductor 2 port show a singularity when converting S to Y parameters To avoid this singularity the S element adds kR e series resistance to pre condition S matrices kI 2 S Q 1 kS R e is the reference impedance vector kis the pre conditioning factor HSPICE RF User Guide 175 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Port Element To compensate for this modification the S element adds a negative resistor kKRe to the modified nodal analysis NMA matrix in actual circuit compensation To specify this pre conditioning factor use the PREFAC keyword in
384. ters as a Function of Device Geometry it 321 322 322 322 323 325 325 325 326 327 328 330 330 330 335 336 338 338 340 341 347 348 350 357 357 359 360 360 361 362 362 363 Contents 16 Advanced Features 0 0 00 ccc eee Creating a Configuration File llle Inserting Comments in a hspice File 0000 RR KK Using Wildcards in HSPICE RF kk kK KK KK KK esee Limiting Output Data Size k kk kk KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KIR SIM_POSTTOP Option Ak kk kK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KIR SIM POSTSKIP ODtlOn sa x k stada ka WANA WAYE eee SIM POSTAT Option 4 lt gt L 5 ks sla k la d k Wl dia yd dikek keka b SIM POSTDOWN Option naana AK kK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KIR SIM POSTSCOPE Option anaua aaua KK KK KK KK KK KK KK eee Probing Subcircuit Currents 0 0 0 0 kk kk kK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK Generating Measurement Output Files llis Optimization collium esc rp WD a Sa j peu RE Say reed Optimizing AC DC and TRAN Analyses lsssses lessen Optimizing HB Analysis iilis ee Optimizing HBOSC Analysis kk kK kK KK KK KK KK ee Using CHECK Statements 200 000 KK KK KK KK eee Setting Global Hi Lo Levels W kK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK Slew Rise and Fall Conditions llle Edge Timing Verification 0 kK KK KK KK
385. th 110 width 110 K keywords DTEMP 328 MONTE 336 PAR 138 L L Element inductor 99 large signal S parameter extraction 247 LENGTH model parameter 344 LIB call statement 65 statement 50 77 in ALTER blocks 65 66 68 with DEL LIB 69 with multiple ALTER statements 67 69 libraries adding with LIB 69 ASIC cells 76 building 65 configuring 146 creating parameters 144 DDL 75 duplicated parameter names 144 END statement 65 integrity 144 search 76 subcircuits 77 vendor 76 LIMIT keyword 339 linear acceleration 309 capacitor 88 inductor 99 matrix reduction 309 resistor 82 local parameters 144 log x function 140 log10 x function 140 logarithm function 140 low noise amplifier 15 LPRINT statement 321 ls file 251 M macros 69 manufacturing tolerances 343 max x y function 140 max waveform size configuration option configuration options max waveform size 366 mean statistical 327 Index measure 281 MEASURE ENV command 281 MEASURE statement parameters 137 MESFETSs 109 min x y function 140 mixer 37 model cards 41 model parameters ALTER blocks 66 68 capacitance distribution 345 DELVTO 331 DTEMP 329 LENGTH 344 manufacturing tolerances 343 PHOTO 344 RSH 331 sigma deviations worst case analysis 331 skew 330 TEMP 64 329 temperature analysis 329 TOX 331 TREF 327 329 XPHOTO 344 MODEL statement 329 models Monte Carlo analysis 335 340 347 reference temperature 329 specifying 76 typica
386. the new parameter values to perform an operating point DC AC or transient analysis An array of parameter values can be either inline in the simulation input file or stored as an external ASCII file The DATA statement associates a list of parameter names with corresponding values in the array HSPICE supports the entire functionality of the DATA statement However HSPICE RF supports DATA only for Data driven analysis nline or external data files HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition Library Calls and Definitions To create and read from libraries of commonly used commands device models subcircuit analysis and statements in library files use the LIB call statement As HSPICE RF encounters each LIB call name in the main data file it reads the corresponding entry from the designated library file until it finds an ENDL statement You can also place a LIB call statement in an AL TER block Library Building Rules Alibrary cannot contain ALTER statements A library can contain nested LIB calls to itself or to other libraries If you use a relative path in a nested LIB call the path starts from the directory of the parent library not from the work directory If the path starts from the work directory HSPICE can also find the library but it prints a warning The depth of nested calls is limited only by the constraints of yo
387. the results of a transient analysis for the voltage at the matched node name PRINT TRAN V 9 t u HSPICE RF User Guide 59 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition 60 Wildcards must begin with a letter or a number for example PROBE v correct format PROBE incorrect format PROBE x correct format Here are some practical applications for these wildcards If your netlist includes a resistor named r1 and a voltage source named vin then PRINT i prints the current for both elements i r1 and i vin The statement PRINT v o prints the voltages for all nodes whose names start with o if your netlist contains nodes named in and out this example prints only the v out voltage If your netlist contains nodes named 0 1 2 and 3 then PRINT v 0 or PRINT v 0 prints the voltage between node o and each of the other nodes v 0 1 v 0 2 and v 0 3 Examples The following examples use wildcards with PRINT PROBE and LPRINT statements Probe node voltages for nodes at all levels PROBE v Probe all nodes whose names start with a For example a1 a2 a3 a00 ayz PROBE v a Print node voltages for nodes at the first level and all levels below the first level where zero level are top level nodes For example X1 A X4 554 Xab abc123 PRINT v Probe node voltages for all nodes whose name start with x at the first level
388. the subcircuit from higher level circuits Marks the end of the file optional HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation DSPF File Example DSPF 1 0 DESIGN my circuit DATE June 15 2002 14 12 43 VENDOR Synopsys PROGRAM Star RC VERSION Star RCXT 2002 2 DIVIDER DELIMITER SUBCKT BUFFER OUT IN Description of Nets GROUND NET VSS NET IN 1 221451PF P IN 1 0 0 0 10 I DF1 A DFI A I 0 0PF 10 0 10 0 I DF1 B DF1 B I 0 0PF 10 0 20 0 S IN 1 5 0 10 0 IN 2 5 0 20 0 C1 IN VSS 0 117763PF C2 IN 1 VSS 0 276325PF C3 IN 2 VSS 0 286325PF C4 DF1 A VSS 0 270519PF C5 DF1 B VSS 0 270519PF R20 IN N 1 1 70333E00 1 1 2 R21 IN 1 DF1 A 1 29167E 01 R22 IN 1 IN 2 1 29167E 01 R23 IN 2 DF1 B 1 70333E 01 NET BF 0 287069PF I DF1 C DEI C O 0 0PF 12 0 15 0 I INV1 IN INV1 IN I 0 0PF 30 0 15 0 C6 DF1 C VSS 0 208719PF C7 INV1 IN VSS 0 783500PF R24 DF1 C INV1 IN 1 80833E 01 NET OUT 0 148478PF S OUT 1 45 0 15 0 P OUT O 0 0PF 50 0 5 0 I INV1 OUT INV1 OUT O 0 0PF 40 0 15 0 C8 INV1 OUT VSS 0 147069PF C9 OUT 1 VSS 0 632813PF C10 OUT VSS 0 776250PF R25 INV1 OUT OUT 1 3 11000E00 R26 OUT 1 OUT 3 03333E00 Description of Instances XDF1 DF1 A DF1 B DF1 C DFF XINV1 INV1 IN INV1 OUT INV ENDS END HSPICE RF User Guide 297 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation 298 Over
389. this keyword 0002 and 2 are two separate nodes Automatically limits the waveform file size If the number is less than 5000 HSPICE RF resets it to 2G f you do not set the number HSPICE RF uses the default 2G If you do not set the line the file size has no limit flush waveform percent ground floating node 1 hier delimiter htmlhspicerf test This example creates a file named test html in the current directory integer node max waveform size 2000000000 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 16 Advanced Features Creating a Configuration File Table 27 Configuration File Options Continued Keyword Description Example negative td port element voltage matchload rcxt divider skip nrd nrs unit atto v supply wildcard left range HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Allows negative time delay input in pw1 piecewise linear with repeat p1 piecewise linear exp exponential rising time delay only sin damped sinusoidal pu1se trapezoidal pulse and am amplitude modulation formats Allows the alternate Port element definition A Port element consists of a voltage source in series with a resistor For the explanation that follows let the user specified DC AC or transient value of the Port element be V and let the voltage across the overall port element be Vp By default HSPICE RF will set the internal voltage source value to V The va
390. this name HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Table 24 SPEF Parameters Continued Parameter Definition name_idlbitlpathlnamel physical_ref logical_power_net physical_power_net ground_net logical_port coordinate par_value rising_slew falling_slew low_threshold high_threshold cell_type physical_port logical_instance HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 A name identifier bit path name or physical reference to map to the name index Logical path or logical path index to a power net Physical path or physical path index to a power net You can specify multiple logical power net physical power net pairs Name of a net to use as a ground net You can specify multiple ground net names Logical name of an input output or bidirectional port Geometric location of a logical or physical port Either a single float value or a triplet in float float float form Rising slew of the waveform for the port T UNIT defines the time unit for the waveform Rising slew of the waveform for the port T UNIT defines the time unit for the waveform Low voltage threshold as a percentage of the port s input voltage Can bed one float value or a triplet in float float float form High voltage threshold as a percentage of the input voltage for the port Either a single float value or a triplet in float float float form Type of
391. those elements with noise values larger than 1istfloor are printed The default value is 1 0e 14 V Hz listsources Prints the element noise value to the lis file when the element has multiple noise sources such as a FET which contains the thermal shot and 1 f noise sources You can specify either ON or OFF ON Prints the contribution from each noise source and OFF does not The default value is OFF Output Syntax This section describes the syntax for the HBNOISE PRINT and PROBE statements PRINT and PROBE Statements PRINT HBNOISE ONOISE NF lt SSNF gt lt DSNF gt PROBE HBNOISE ONOISE NF lt SSNF gt lt DSNF gt Parameter Description ONOISE Outputs the voltage noise at the output frequency band OFB across the output nodes in the HBNOISE statement The data is plotted as a function of the input frequency band IFB points Units are in V Hz Simulation ignores ONOISE when applied to autonomous circuits HSPICE RF User Guide 261 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 11 Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Multitone Nonlinear Steady State Analysis HBNOISE Parameter Description NF NF and SSNF both output a single side band noise figure as a function SSNF of the IFB points NF SSNF 10 Log SSF Single side band noise factor SSF Total Noise at output at OFB originating from all frequencies Load Noise originating from OFB Input Source Noise originating from IFB DSNF D
392. tion the data stream is broken into bit pairs to form the correct and Q values This function is represented as the serial to parallel converter Data In Data Q Data 00 1 e JB E 01 1 1 JB E 10 1 1 E JB 11 1 1 J2 E To generate a continuous time waveform the VMRF source takes the resulting digital and Q data streams and passes them through ideal filters Rectangular and Nyquist raised cosine filter options are available The output waveforms are therefore band limited according to the specified data rate HSPICE RF User Guide 193 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Complex Signal Sources and Stimuli 194 Voltage and Current Source Elements The V and elements can include VMRF signal sources that you can use to generate BPSK and QPSK waveforms V and Element Syntax Vxxx n n VMRF AMP sa FREQ fc PHASE ph MOD MOD FILTER FIL FILCOEF filpar RATE Rb BITSTREAM data TRANFORHB 0 1 Ixxx n n VMRF AMP sa FREQ fc PHASE ph MOD MOD FILTER FIL FILCOEF filpar RATE Rb BITSTREAM data TRANFORHB 0 1 Parameter Description VXXX Independent voltage source IXxx Independent current source n n Positive and negative controlled source connecting nodes VMRF Keyword that identifies and activates the Vector Modulated RF signal source AMP Signal amplitude in volts or amps FREQ Carrier frequency in hertz Set fc 0 0 to generate baseband I Q signals For harmo
393. tions Continued HSPICE Form Function Class Description val element get value various Returns a value for a specified parameter of a parameter specified element For example val rload temp returns the value of the temp temperature parameter for the rload element val model type get value various Returns a value for a specified parameter of a model name specified model of a specific type For example model param val nmos mos1 rs returns the value of the rs parameter for the mos1 model which is an nmos model type lv lt Element gt element various Returns various element values during simulation or templates See Element Template Output HSPICE Only on Ix lt Element gt page 251 for more information v lt Node gt circuit various Returns various circuit values during simulation See i lt Element gt output DC and Transient Output Variables on page 236 for variables more information cond x y ternary Returns x if cond is not zero Otherwise returns y operator param z condition x y relational Returns 1 if the left operand is less than the right operator operand Otherwise returns O less than para x y lt z y less than z lt relational Returns 1 if the left operand is less than or equal to operator the right operand Otherwise returns 0 less than or para x y lt z y less than or equal to z equal gt relational Returns 1 if the left operand is greater than the right operator operand Otherwise retu
394. ts The result is a convenient means to get scattering parameters noise parameters stability parameters and gain coefficients The LIN command essentially obsoletes the NET command The output from the LIN command is saved in the scO file format that can in turn be referenced as a model file for the new S parameter element HSPICE RF User Guide 15 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 1 Low Noise Amplifier To set up a linear transfer parameter analysis the HSPICE input netlist must contain Use the AC command to activate small signal AC analysis and to specify a frequency sweep Also use the AC command to specify any other parameter sweeps of interest m Use the LIN command with the AC command to activate small signal linear transfer analysis The AC command specifies the base frequency sweep for the LIN analysis The LIN analysis automatically performs multiple AC and NOISE analyses as needed to compute all complex signal transfer parameters The necessary number of port P elements numbered sequentially beginning with one to define the terminals of the multi port network For example a two port circuit must contain two port elements with one listed as port 1 and the other as port 2 The port elements define the ordering for the output quantities from the LIN command for example the terminals for port 1 are used for S11 Y11 and Z11 measurements Much of the LIN analysis is autom
395. ts warning messages Example 7 sl n n2 n3 n ref mname smodel fqmodel sfqmodel 1 model smodel s n 3 fqmodel sfqmodel 2 In this example qmodel1 is declared in both the S element statement and the S model statement and they have different qgmodel names This is not allowed in HSPICE Example 8 sl n n2 n3 n ref mname smodel fqmodel sfqmodel model smodel s tstonefile expl s3p In this example f qmode1 is already declared in the s1 statement and tstonefile is declared in the related smodel card This is a conflict when describing the frequency varying behavior of the network which is not allowed in HSPICE Frequency Table Model The frequency table model SP model is a generic model that you can use to describe frequency varying behavior Currently the S element and the LIN command use this model For a description of this model see section Small Signal Parameter Data Frequency Table Model in the HSPICE Signal Integrity Guide HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Scattering Parameter Data Element Group Delay Handler in Time Domain Analysis The S element accepts a constant group delay matrix in time domain analysis You can also express a weak dependence of the delay matrix on the frequency as a combination of the constant delay matrix and the phase shift value at each frequency point To activate or deactivate this delay handler specify the DELAYHANDLE keyword in the S model sta
396. uctor in amperes HSPICE or L inductance DTEMP R L equation LTYPE HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 HSPICE RF uses this value as the DC operating point voltage when you specify UIC in the TRAN statement The IC statement overrides it Inductance value This can be a numeric value in henries a parameter in henries a function of any node voltages a function of branch currents any independent variables such as time hertz and temper Multiplier used to simulate parallel inductors Default 1 0 Temperature difference between the element and the circuit in degrees Celsius Default 0 0 Resistance of the inductor in ohms Default 0 0 Inductance at room temperature specified as afunction of any node voltages afunction of branch currents any independent variables such as time hertz and temper Calculates inductance flux for elements using inductance equations If the L inductance is a function of I Lxxx then set LTYPE 0 Otherwise set LTYPE 1 Use this setting correctly to ensure proper inductance calculations and correct simulation results Default 0 93 Chapter 5 Elements Passive Elements Parameter Description POLY Keyword that specifies the inductance calculated by a polynomial cO c1 Coefficients of a polynomial in the current describing the inductor value cO is the magnitude of the Oth order term c1 is the magnitude of the 1st order term and so
397. ulations are performed with the higher frequency tone as the fundamental frequency In HSPICE RF any voltage or current source identified as a HB source either in a V orl element statement or by an OPTION TRANFORHB command is used HSPICE RF User Guide 277 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 12 Envelope Analysis Envelope Simulation 278 for HB simulations at each point in time All other sources are associated with the transient timescale Also the input waveforms can be represented in the frequency domain as RF carriers modulated by an envelope by identifying a VMRF signal source in a V or element statement The amplitude and phase values of the sampled envelope are used as the input signal for HB analysis Some typical applications for envelope simulation are amplifier spectral regrowth adjacent channel power ration ACPR and oscillator startup and shutdown analyses Envelope Analysis Commands This section describes those commands specific to envelope analysis These commands are Standard envelope simulation ENV Oscillator simulation both startup and shutdown ENVOSC Envelope Fast Fourier Transform ENVFFT Nonautonomous Form ENV TONES f1 lt f2 fn gt NHARMS hi lt h2 hn gt ENV STEP tstep ENV STOP tstop Parameter Description TONES Carrier frequencies in hertz NHARMS Number of harmonics ENV STEP Envelope step size in seconds ENV STOP Envelope stop time in seconds Description You
398. uncertainty which is a function of the auto correlation function in the power spectrum of the phase variations The following equation shows this function o t A 0 R 0 0 242 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Timing Jitter Analysis The Weiner Khintchine Theorem 1 relates the auto correlation function to the power spectrum of phase variations as in the following equation 1 RQQ 5 f S e do The is written as a double sided power spectrum Using a single sided spectra would result in an additional factor of two The following equation shows the relationship between mean square timing jitter and the power spectrum of phase variations o 1 4 S o sin 2 do TO 0 For reasonably large offset frequencies such as a narrowband FM assumption that holds for phase modulation the assumption is that L f S f which creates the following equation o x e L Dsin aft df o 0 In the more common notation for timing jitter the following equation applies o s LO sin oar 0 0 This integral assumes a continual roll off in L f and is easily evaluated for an L f with f behavior the White FM region since the following equation is true oo sin nft n A ge 0 Given an L f that is written in non dB form as L L f 1HZ f HSPICE RF User Guide 243 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phas
399. undamental which you cannot remove These fluctuations are random processes and are typically expressed in terms of their power spectral density For most oscillators the phase noise is HSPICE RF User Guide 233 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Phase Noise Analysis 234 a low frequency modulation that creates sidebands in the oscillator s spectrum about o For example the following equation represents a simple sinusoidal variation in the phase v t Acos of Op sin f p is the peak phase deviation specified as 0 Ao o o is the peak angular frequency deviation For 0 1 the following equation approximates the output 0 t A esten 7 cos g p f cos g o t That is when the peak phase deviation is small the result is frequency components on each side of the fundamental with amplitude 05 2 Therefore an effective treatment of the noisy oscillator is to consider it a frequency modulated source operating with a small modulation indexp 0 under the conditions of the narrowband FM assumption modulation results in only two sidebands about the carrier The Single Sideband Phase Noise L fm is then the ratio of noise power to carrier power in a 1Hz bandwidth at offset o 2f V2 0 E b iT This model for oscillator noise shows that sidebands about the fundamental due to noise are directly related to the spectrum of the phase fluctuati
400. ur system configuration A library cannot contain a call to a library of its own entry name within the same library file AHSPICE RF library cannot contain the END statement ALTER processing cannot change LIB statements within a file that an INCLUDE statement calls Defining Parameters The PARAM statement defines parameters Parameters in HSPICE or HSPICE HF are names that have associated numeric values You can also use either of the following specialized methods to define parameters Predefined Analysis Measurement Parameters Predefined Analysis HSPICE RF provides several specialized analysis types which require a way to control the analysis For the syntax used in these PARAM commands see the description of the PARAM command in the HSPICE and HSPICE RF Command Reference HSPICE RF User Guide 65 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition 66 HSPICE RF supports the following predefined analysis parameters Temperature functions fn Optimization guess range Monte Carlo functions HSPICE RF does not support frequency lime Measurement Parameters A MEASURE statement produces a measurement parameter In general the rules for measurement parameters are the same as those for standard parameters However measurement parameters are not defined in a PARAM statement but directly in the MEASURE statement Altering Design Var
401. use the ENV command to do standard envelope simulation The simulation proceeds just as it does in standard transient simulation starting at time 0 and continuing until timezenv stop An HB analysis is performed at each step in time You can use Backward Euler BE trapezoidal TRAP or level 2 Gear GEAR integration HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 12 Envelope Analysis Envelope Simulation Recommended option settings are For BE integration set OPTION SIM_ORDER 1 For TRAP set OPTION SIM ORDER 2 default METHOD TRAP default For GEAR set OPTION SIM ORDER 2 default METHOD GEAR Example env tones 1e9 nharms 6 env step 10n env stop 1u Oscillator Analysis Form ENVOSC TONE f1 NHARMS h1 ENV STEP tstep ENV STOP tstop PROBENODE n1 n2 vosc FSPTS num min max Parameter Description TONE Carrier frequencies in hertz NHARMS Number of harmonics ENV STEP Envelope step size in seconds ENV STOP Envelope stop time in seconds PROBENODE Defines the nodes used for oscillator conditions and the initial probe voltage value FSPTS Specifies the frequency search points used in the initial small signal frequency search Usage depends on oscillator type Description You use the ENVOSC command to do envelope simulation for oscillator startup or shutdown Oscillator startup or shutdown analysis with this command must be helped along by converting a bias source from a DC description to a
402. ut as input ina NODESET statement for a later run You can copy the part of the output listing titled Operating Point Information or you can type it directly into the input file preceded by a NODESET statement This eliminates recomputing the DC operating point in the second simulation Automatic Node Name Generation HSPICE or HSPICE RF can automatically assign internal node names To check both nodal voltages and branch currents you can use the assigned node name when you print or plot HSPICE or HSPICE RF supports several special cases for node assignment for example simulation automatically assigns node 0 as a ground node For CSOS CMOS Silicon on Sapphire if you assign a value of 1 to the bulk node the name of the bulk node is B Use this name to print the voltage at the bulk node When printing or plotting current for example PLOT I R1 HSPICE inserts a zero valued voltage source This source inserts an extra node in the circuit named Vnn where nn is a number that HSPICE or HSPICE RF automatically generates this number appears in the output listing file Global Node Names The GLOBAL statement globally assigns a node name in HSPICE or HSPICE RF This means that all references to a global node name used at any level of the hierarchy in the circuit connect to the same node HSPICE RF User Guide 63 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition 64 The most comm
403. utput ac S noise output sc SnP S noise output sc citi SnP citi Phase Noise printpn pn PHASENOISE SN analysis printsn sn Transient analysis TRAN printtr tr Using the CosmosScope Waveform Display CosmosScope has been enhanced to support viewing and processing of HSPICE RF output files This section presents a basic overview of how to use CosmosScope to view HSPICE RF output Type cscope on the UNIX command line to start the CosmosScope tool Choose File gt Open gt Plotfiles or just press CTRL O to open the Open Plotfiles dialog Use the Files of Type filter to find the HSPICE RF output file that you want to open Table 3 on page 11 lists the HSPICE RF file types When you open a file its contents appear in the Signal Manager window The Signal Manager lists all open plot files If you double click a plot file name a new window appears showing the contents of that plot file To plot one of the signals listed here in the active chart double click on the signal label Tocreate a new chart use the File New menu Select either XY Graph Smith Chart or Polar Chart You can also use the first three icons in the toolbar to create new chart windows 12 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 2 Getting Started Using the CosmosScope Waveform Display To display the Signal Menu right click a signal label in a chart Using this menu you can change how signals look del
404. utput Data Files Errors and Warni References NOS c coe ean dm ote ve OS PH Ede Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis uls ule elseslssn Harmonic Balance for Input Syntax HB Simulation of Oscillator Analysis ASK KK RR RR KK Ring Oscillators liliis HBOSC Analysis Options 0 000 eee Additional HBOSC Analysis Options kK KK KK KK K HBOSC Output Syntax kk kk kk kK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KO Phase Noise Analysis Input Syntax Phase Noise Algorithms llle Measuring PHASENOISE Analyses with MEASURE Output Syntax Phase Noise Analysis Options liliis lees Timing Jitter Analysis 202 202 203 203 205 206 206 207 208 209 210 212 214 215 218 219 219 221 222 224 227 227 228 230 231 232 233 233 235 237 239 240 241 242 vii Contents viii 10 11 Timing Jitter Syntax kk kk kK KK KK KK K eee RMS JITTER Measurement kK KRI ee References Power Dependent S Parameter Extraction 0005 HBLSP Analysis Limitations Input Syntax Output Syntax PRINT and Output Data Files PROBE Statements eee Harmonic Balance Based AC and Noise Analyses Multitone Harmon ic Balance AC Analysis HBAC 0 55 Prerequisites and Limitations lille Input
405. vailable in directory lt installdir gt demo hspicerf examples options POST accurate param 0 950e6 PI 3 1415926 Ld 2e 9 Rload 5 Vin 3 0 param Lin 0 1n Vdd 2 Cd 1 0 4 PI PI f 0 0 Ld M1 drain gt 0 0 CMOSN L 0 35u W 50u AS 100p AD 100p PS 104u PD 104u M 80 Ls in gt Lin gate tuning Ld drain vdd Ld drain tuning Cd drain 0 Cd Cb drain out INFINITY DC block Rload out 0 Rload Vdd vdd 0 DC Vdd Vrfl in 0 DC Vin 2 0 SIN Vin 2 Vin 2 f0 0 0 90 HB Vin 2 0 0 11 hb tones f0 nharms 10 tran 10p 10n probe hb p Rload probe tran p Rload include cmos49 model inc end An HB analysis uses the following An HB command hb tones f0 nharms 10 This invokes a single tone HB analysis with base frequency 950 mHz and 10 harmonics 20 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 3 HSPICE RF Tutorial Example 2 Power Amplifier The HB source in Vrf1 HB Vin 2 0 0 1 1 This creates a sinusoidal waveform matching the transient analysis one The amplitude is Vin 2 1 5 V and it applies to the first harmonic of the first tone 950 MHz A PROBE command for plotting the output power probe hb p Rload To run this netlist type the following command hspicerf pa sp This produces two output files named pa trO and pa hb0 containing the transient and HB output respectively To view and compare the output 1 2 Type cscope to invoke CosmosScope To open both files use the F
406. variation vtoncd agauss 0 0 05v 1 delvton vtoncd sigma 0 05 vtopcd agauss 0 0 05v 1 delvtop vtopcd sigma 0 05 INC usr meta lib cmosl1 mod dat model include file ENDL TT LIB FF SHIGH GAIN P CH AND N CH CMOS LIBRARY 3SIGMA VALUES PARAM TOX 230 XL 0 18u DELVTON 15V DELVTOP 0 15V INC usr meta lib cmos1 mod dat model include file ENDL FF The usr meta lib cmos1 mod dat include file contains the model MODEL NCH NMOS LEVEL 2 XL XL TOX TOX DELVTO DELVTON MODEL PCH PMOS LEVEL 2 XL XL TOX TOX DELVTO DELVTOP Note The model keyname left equals the skew parameter right Model keys and skew parameters can use the same names HSPICE RF User Guide 333 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Worst Case Analysis Skew File Interface to Device Models Skew parameters are model parameters for transistor models or passive components A typical device model set includes MOSFET models for all device sizes by using an automatic model selector RC wire models for polysilicon metal1 and metal2 layers in the drawn dimension Models include temperature coefficients and fringe capacitance Single diode and distributed diode models for N P and well includes temperature leakage and capacitance based on the drawn dimension BJT models for parasitic bipolar transistors You can also use these for any special BJTs such as a BiCMOS for ECL BUT process includes current an
407. ve parasitic The major advantage of this flow is a smaller DSPF or SPEF file which saves disk space Figure 22 Selective Extraction Flow Star RCXT vy y DSPF SPEF Ideal Netlist v OR Post Layout Flow HSPICE RF y Active Nodes Star RCXT v DSPF SPEF v Post Layout Flow Note HSPICE RF generates an active node file in both Star RC and Star RCXT format It then expands the active node file to the Star RCXT command file to extract only active parasitics 292 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation Overview of DSPF Files ln general an SPF Standard Parasitic Format file describes interconnect delay and loading due to parasitic resistance and capacitance DSPF Detailed Standard Parasitic Format is a specific type of SPF file that describes the actual parasitic resistance and capacitance components of a net DSPF is a standard output format commonly used in many parasitic extraction tools including Star RCXT The HSPICE RF circuit simulator can read DSPF files DSPF File Structure The DSPF standard is published by Open Verilog International OVI For information about how to obtain the complete DSPF specification or any other documents from OVI see http www ovi org document html The OVI DSPF specification requires the foll
408. view of SPEF Files The Standard Parasitics Exchange Format SPEF file structure is described in IEEE standard EEE 1481 For information about how to obtain the complete SPEC EEE 1481 specification or any other documents from IEEE see http www ieee org products onlinepubs stand standards html SPEF File Structure The IEEE 1481 specification requires the following file structure in a SPEF file Parameters in brackets are optional SPEF file SPEF version DESIGN design name DATE date VENDOR vendor PROGRAM program name VERSION program version DESIGN FLOW flow type flow type DIVIDER divider DELIMITER delimiter BUS DELIMITER bus prefix bus suffix T UNIT time unit NS PS C UNIT capacitance unit FF PF R UNIT resistance unit OHM KOHM L UNIT inductance unit HENRY MH UH NAME MAP name index name id bit path name physical ref POWER NETS logical power net physical power net GROUND NETS ground net PORTS logical port I B O C coordinate L par value S rising slew falling slew low threshold high threshold D cell type PHYSICAL PORTS physical instance delimiter physical port I B O C coordinate L par value S rising slew falling slew low threshold high threshold D cell type DEFINE logical instance design name PDEFINE physical instance design name HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 13 Post Layout Analysis Post Layout Back Annotation D
409. w value is generated for a derived parameter Therefore it is possible to apply independent variations to parameters of different devices as well as the same variation to parameters of a group of devices Parameters that describe distributions can be used in expressions thus it is possible to create combinations of variations correlations These concepts are best explained with circuit examples In the three following examples variation is defined on the width of a physical resistor which has a model If this device was a polysilicon resistor for example then the variations describe essentially the effects of photoresist exposure and etching on the width of the poly layer HSPICE RF User Guide 357 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 15 Statistical and Monte Carlo Analysis Simulating the Effects of Global and Local Variations with Monte Carlo 358 testl sp has a distribution parameter defined called globw A parameter called globwidth is assigned the value of globw The parameter globwidth is assigned a different random value for each Monte Carlo sample The parameter globwidth is used to define the width of the physical resistors r1 r2 r3 and r4 with model resistor Since parameter globwidth does not have its own distribution defined but rather gets its value from the parameter globw the value for globwidth is the same wherever it is used thus the resistors have the same width for each Monte Carlo sample and therefore the same resist
410. ward 10 pF capacitor c calls the CBX model and its capacitance is not constant JCBisa 10 pF capacitor with an initial voltage of 4v across it CPis a 0 1 pF capacitor Example 2 V1 1 0 pwl On Ov 100n 10v V2 2 0 pwl 0n Ov 100n 10v C110 C V 1 V 2 1e 12 CTYPE 2 Example 3 HSPICE RF Only C2 10 C 1 TIME Time varying capacitor Charge Based Capacitors You can also specify capacitors using behavioral equations for charge Syntax Cxxx ni n2 Q equation dQ f C dV V V nl n2 is equivalent to Cxxx a b Q f V a b In the preceding equations d x dfe dx Example 1 Cl a b Q sin V a b V c d V a b This example is equivalent to CI a b C cos V a b V c d Example 2 C3 3 0 Q TIME TIME supported in HPICE RF only HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 7 Testbench Elements Behavioral Passive Elements Frequency Dependent Capacitors You can specify frequency dependent capacitors using the C equation with the HERTZ keyword The HERTZ keyword represents the operating frequency In time domain analyses an expression with the HERTZ keyword behaves differently according to the value assigned to the CONVOLUTION keyword Syntax Cxxx nl n2 C equation CONVOLUTION 0 1 2 FBASE val lt FMAX val gt gt Parameter Description n1 n2 Names or numbers of connecting nodes equation Expressed as a function of HERTZ If CONVOLUTION 1
411. wn reference node You can write the node definition in a clearer way as nd1 ndl nd2 nd2 ndN ndN Each pair of the nodes ndi and ndi i 1 N constructs one of the N ports of the S element HSPICE RF User Guide 125 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 5 Elements Transmission Lines Parameter Description nd ref or NdR MNAME FQMODEL TSTONEFILE CITIFILE TYPE Zo 126 Reference node Name of the S model Frequency behavior of the S Y or Z parameters MODEL statement of sp type which defines the frequency dependent matrices array Name of a Touchstone file Data contains frequency dependent array of matrixes Touchstone files must follow the S p file extension rule where represents the dimension of the network For details see Touchstone File Format Specification by the EIA IBIS Open Forum http www eda org Name of the CITIfile which is a data file that contains frequency dependent data For details see Using Instruments with ADS by Agilent Technologies http www agilent com Parameter type S scattering the default Y admittance Z impedance Characteristic impedance value of the reference line frequency independent For multi terminal lines N 1 HSPICE assumes that the characteristic impedance matrix of the reference lines are diagonal and their diagonal values are set to Zo You can also set a vector value for non uniform diagonal values Use Zof to spec
412. y point Note MEASURE PHASENOISE cannot contain an expression that uses an phasenoise variable as an argument You also cannot use MEASURE PHASENOISE for error measurement and expression evaluation of PHASENOISE The HSPICE RF optimization flow can read the measured data from a MEASURE PHASENOISE analysis This flow can be combined in the HSPICE RF optimization routine with a MEASURE HBTR analysis see Using MEASURE with HB Analyses on page 219 and a MEASURE HBNOISE analysis see Measuring HBNOISE Analyses with MEASURE on page 263 Output Syntax PRINT PHASENOISE phnoise phnoise element name PROBE PHASENOISE phnoise phnoise element name In this syntax phnoise is the phase noise parameter The PHASENOISE statement outputs raw data to the pn and printpn files HSPICE RF outputs the phnoise data in decibels relative to the carrier signal per hertz across the output nodes in the PHASENOISE statement The data plot is a function of the offset frequency Units are in dBc Hz lf you use the NLP algorithm default HSPICE RF calculates only the phase noise component lf you use the PAC algorithm HSPICE RF sums both the phase and amplitude noise components to show the total noise at the output If you use the BPN algorithm METHOD 2 HSPICE RF adds both the phase and amplitude noise components together to show the total noise at the output HSPICE RF outputs phnoise to the pn file if you set OPT
413. y Inexact Newton Methods MTT S Digest pages 1357 1360 1996 S Skaggs Efficient Harmonic Balance Modeling of Large Microwave Circuits Ph D thesis North Carolina State University 1999 R S Carson High Frequency Amplifiers 2nd Edition John Wiley amp Sons 1982 S Y Liao Microwave Circuit Analysis and Amplifier Design Prentice Hall 1987 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis References 8 J Roychowdhury D Long P Feldmann Cyclostationary Noise Analysis of Large RF Circuits with Multitone Excitations EEE JSCC volume 33 number 3 March 1998 9 Y Saad terative Methods for Sparse Linear Systems PWS Publishing Company 1995 10 J Roychowdhury D Long and P Feldmann Cyclostationary Noise Analysis of Large RF Circuits with Multitone Excitations IEEE Journal of Solid State Circuits volume 33 pages 324 336 March 1998 11 K Kurakawa Power waves and the Scattering Matrix IEEE Trans Microwave Theory Tech vol MTT 13 pp 194 202 March 1965 HSPICE RF User Guide 225 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 8 Steady State Harmonic Balance Analysis References 226 HSPICE RF User Guide Y 2006 03 SP1 9 Oscillator and Phase Noise Analysis Describes how to use HSPICE RF to perform oscillator and phase noise analysis on autonomous oscillator circuits Harmonic Balance for Oscillator Analysis HSPICE RF can analyze oscillator ci
414. your HSPICE netlist so that simulation evaluates two nodes as only one node Both nodes must be at the same level in the circuit design that you are simulating you cannot connect nodes that belong to different subcircuits You also cannot use this statement in HSPICE RF Deleting a Library Usea DEL LIB statement to remove library data from memory The next time you run a simulation the DEL LIB statement removes the LIB call statement with the same library number and entry name from memory You can then use a LIB statement to replace the deleted library HSPICE RF User Guide 69 Y 2006 03 SP1 Chapter 4 Input Netlist and Data Entry Input Netlist File Composition 70 You can use a DEL LIB statement with a ALTER statement HSPICE RF does not support the ALTER statement Ending a Netlist An END statement must be the last statement in the input netlist file Text that follows the END statement is a comment and has no effect on the simulation An input file that contains more than one simulation run must include an END statement for each simulation run You can concatenate several simulations into a single file Condition Controlled Netlists IF ELSE You can use the IF ELSE structure to change the circuit topology expand the circuit set parameter values for each device instance select different model cards reference subcircuits or define subcircuits in each IF ELSE block if conditionl statement

HSPICE RF User Guide - RFIC Group @ Fudan University

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents